BD2F BS3F Service Manual OCR

SERVICE MANUAL
MITSUBISHI
DIESEL ENGINE
S4E
( for BD2F . BS3F )
MITSUBISHI
HEAVY INDUSTRIES, LTD.
FOREWORD
This service manual has instructions and procedures for the subject on the
front cover. The information, specifications, and illustrations used in this
manual"are based on information that was current at the time this issue was
written.
Correct servlcmg will give this engine a long productive life. Befote
attempting to start a test, repair or rebuild job, be sure that you have studied
the respective sections of this manual, and know all the components you will
work on.
Safety is not only your concern but everybody's concern. Safe working habits
cannot be bought or manufactured; they must be learned through the job you
do. By learning what CAUTION Or WARNING symbol emphasizes, know
what is safe - what is not safe. Consult your foreman, if necessary, for
specific instructions on a job, and the safety equipment reqUired.
NOTES, CAUTIONS and WARNINGS

NOTES, CAUTIONS and WARNINGS are used in this manual to emphasize important and critical instructions. They are used for the following
conditions:
[ NOTE 1
.&J
.............. An operating procedure, condition, etc.,

which it is essential to highlight.
CAUTION
1 ....... Operating
WARNING
procedures, practices, etc.,

which if not strictly observed, will result
in damage to or destruction of engine.
Operating. procedures, practices, etc.,
which if not correctly followed, will
result in personal injury or loss of life.
January 1978
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
SERVICE GUIDE
Recommended periodical servicing schedule
CONSTRUCTION AND FUNCTION
Description ........... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Crankcase
Cylinder head ...........................................
Main moving parts ..................................... '. .
Timing gear train' ...... , ...................... , . . . . . . . . . .
Lubrication system .......................................
Fuel system ....... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling system
Electrical equipment .....................................
MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENT
Inspection and adjustment of engine proper
Crankcase
Cylinder head ...........................................
Timing mechanism .......................................
Lubrication system .......................................
Fuel system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling system
Electrical equipment .....................................
Bench tests .............................................
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY

Hints for facilitating disassembly-reassemblY work
Engine dismounting and mounting ...........................
Rocker arnlS and rocker shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cylinder head ...........................................
Timing gears
Lubrication system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling system (water pump complete with thermostat) ....... ..
Flywheel and ring gear ...................................
Fuel filter .............................................
Injection nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Injection pump and governor ...............................
Engine proper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Alternator and regulator unit ...............................
3
7
16
17
18
20
22
23
36
38
47
47
51
61
63
65
78
79
84
89
89
89
91
95
97
100
102
104
104
106
120
128
132
MAINTENANCE STANDARDS
Maintenance standards . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 137
Tightening torque ..................... ".................. 147
Application of sealers ...... ; .............................. " 148
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting chart (I)
Troubleshooting chart (2)
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
',0
150
154
157
:;
SERVICE GUIDE
( \
SERVICE GUIDE
RECOMMENDED PERIODICAL SERVICING SCHEDULE
o refers to engines in regular service.

refers to new engines being broken in.
Servicing intervals (hrs)
What to service
What to do
Criteria
Daily
110)
Oil pan
."
Change oil.
.\1 E
~
.o~
~
-l'~
Oil nIler
Replace nIter element.
Oil circuit
Clean by flushing.
Fuel filter
Feed pump
E
7.0 liters
(1.8 gallons)
Injection
nozzles
>-
-;;
:>
u.
Fuel tank
0
0
Drain out sludge and condensate.
0
0
Replace nIter element.
Clean inlet connection.
Decarbon and clean nozzles

and seats.
.Drain out condensate and

sludge.
120 5 kg/em'
(1706 71 psi)
60 liters
(16 gallons)
0
0
Clean by flushing.
Check water level and replenish.
Radiator
Change coolant.
~
~
>-
'0
Fan belt
Check and adjust tension.
Thermostat
Check for performance.
Coolant circuit
Clean by fluslting.
E
~
Air cleaner
~
~
>~
'"'"
.~
0
16 liters
(4.2 gallons)
,I
0
Clean radiator fins.
'"
.S
12 mm (1/2 in.)
of defiection
0
0
0
0
Clean element.
Bolts and nuts

Check for tightness and
on muffler and
retighten.
air cleaner
.~
Starter
:>0.
0'-
-" 0:>
-
Battery
w"
"
0.
Check acid level and replenish.
Valve clearance
Check and adjust.
Major bolts
Retighten.
0.
"c:
'0,
c:
Packings and
seals
0
0
Check electrolyte S.C.

Inspect for condition.
Inspect for leakage and repair.
0
0
for- wear; recondition as necessary.
Glow plugs
Standard duty
conditions -
Replace element.
Inspect brushes and commutator

~
-ro c:
~
Check injection pressure.
~
~
Remarks
Check oil level and replenish.
c:
0
.;::;
75 150 300 600 1200
0
0.25 mm(0.0098
in.)forbothintake
and exhaust valves
0
0
0
CONSTRUCTION
AND
FUNCTION
Description
Exterior views
Left-side view
(\
l-Water pump
2-Fan
3-Fan belt
4-Fuel injection pump
5-Fuel feed pump
60il pipe
7-Fuel feed pipe
8-Fuel filter
9-Rocker cover
10-Governor
11Fuel inlet
l2Adjusting lever
l3Starter
Right-side view
(
,.---------/~-,----!~-/~
CD~......
.. ~r-.....
'---==/
-JI
l--~~
~~==~==y=====~=~~~
@.
-I
""T'IT.
'l1ruii-----@
LL~J--=-F"-'----""-
1-Cylinder head
2Crankcase
3-Service meter
4-Flywheel housing
5-Exhaust manifold
6-R ocker cover
7-0il filler
8-Thermostat
9-0il pipe
10-Fan
ll-Alter'nator
12-Alternator bracket
~\
13Timing gear case

14-Mounting bracket
15-0illevel gauge
16-Drain plug
11-0il pan
Longitudinal cross section
I-Thermostat
2-Water pump
3Piston
4-Camshaft gear
5-Fan
6-Connecting rod
7-Crankshaft pulley
10
8-Crankshaft gear
gTiming gear case
10-0il pan
11-0il strainer
12-Elbow
13Rocker cover
14-Exhaust valve
15-lntake valve
16-Rocker shaft
17-Rocker bracket
18-Valve push rod
19-Cylinder head
20Crankcase
21-Tappet
22-Flywheel housing
23-Flywheel ring gear
24-Flywheel
25-Camshaft
26-Crankshaft
Transverse cross section
CD
tM~----(j})
1-Exhaust manifold
2-Piston
3-Valve push rod
4-Tappet
5-Camshaft
6Connecting rod
7-0il pump
8-0il strainer
9-Rocker arm
10-0il filler
11-Glow plug
120il injection nozzle
13-Fuel filter
14-Fuel injection pipe
16-Fuel feed pump
11
Specifications
Model designation
Type
Number of cylinders
Bore x stroke, mm (in.)
Piston displacement, cc (cu in.)
Compression ratio
Firing order
Direction of rotation
Fuel
Crankcase lubricating oil
Dimensions
'"
'"
Overall length, mm
(in.)
Overall width, mm
(in.)
Overall height, mm
(in.)
<0
~
"c
"
(!)
813 (32)
512 (20.1/8)
741 (291/8)
Weight (dry), kg (lb)
290 (639)
Maximum output, PS/rprn

Maximum torque, kgm (ft.lb)/rpm
DD model
35/2400
14.5 (104.9)/1200
"0
S4E
Watercooled,4stroke cycle, inline, turbulencechamber
type diesel
4
94 x 94 (3.701 x 3.701)
2609 (159)
19 : 1
134-2
Clockwise as viewed from timing gear case side
ASTM No. 2D diesel fuel
API service classification CC . class
Compression pressure, kg/cm 2 (psi) (rpm)

Minimum speed, rpm
Maximum speed, rpm
Cylinder sleeve
Number of piston rings
Compression rings
Oil
Valve arrangement
Valve timing
Valve clearance
.20 (284.4) (150 ~ 200), minimum

650 ~ 700
2640
Dry type, special cast iron
2
1 (with spring expander)
Overhead type
Intake valves
Open
Close
30 before TDC
50 after BDC
Exhaust valves
Open
Close
74 before BDC
30 after TDC
Intake, mm (in.)
Exhaust, mm (in.)
0.25 (0.0098) (cold)

0.25 (0.0098) (cold)
Starting system
Starting motor
Fuel feed pump
Model
Manufacturer
Cam lift, mm (in.)
ND . EP/KS22A
Nippon Denso
6 (0.236)
PES4A65B
Nippon Denso
Fuel injection pump
Model
Manufacturer
Plunger diameter,
mm (in.)
Plunger lead
Cam lift, mm (in.)
">-
~
~
~
0;
::>
u.
12
DPS model
37/2400
15.5 (112.1)/1200
6.5 (0.256)
Right hand
8 (0.315)
\)
Injection timing
Governor
Type
Model
Manufacturer
Centrifugal, flyweight, all-speed type

RSV
Nippon Denso
Nippon Denso
Bosch type, KCAI7SD
Bosch type, ND -DNOSD
Throttle type
Injection nozzles
Manufacturer
Nozzle holder
Nozzle tip
Type
Spray hole diameter,
mm (in_)
Spray cone angle
Injection pressure,
kg/em' (psi)
Filter element
Manufacturer
Paper-element type
Nippon Rokaki
Oil pan, liter (gal)

Oil flIter, liter (gal)
7_0 (1.8)
0_67 (0.18)
When operating,
kg/em' (psi)
When idling, kg/em' (psi)
3 ~ 4 (42.7
Type
Speed ratio to crankshaft
Displacement, liter
(cu in.)/min/rpm
Trochoid type
1/2
19.2 (1172)/2400 (engine speed), minimum
Oil temperature: 50C (122F)
Discharge pressure: 3 kg/em' (42.7 psi)
Oil flIter
Type
Paper element type
Type
Relief pressure kg/em'
(psi)
Piston-valve type
Relief valve
.;
c:
0
"
I
E
..
~
~
>~
0;
"
lL
Fuel filter
-
Capacity
..
25 I before TDC
Oil pressure
I (0_039)
0
120(1706) 5(71)
56.9)
1.0 (14.2), minimum.
~
~
>-
c:
."'"
0
Oil pump
"
oJ
"
'c
.0
Capacity (exci. radiator), liter (gal)
Centrifugal type
1.2 : I
Belt
Type
Manufacturer
Low-edge cog B-type "V" belt

Mitsuboshi Belt
Thermostat
Type
Manufacturer
Valve opening
temperature, c CF)
Wax type
Fuji Seiko
76.5 2 (169.7 3.6F)
(Fully opens at 90C (194F))
Type
Number of blades
Outside diameter,mrn
(in.) x pitch
Speed ratio to crankshaft
Steel blade, pusher type

6
..
'---
>-
'"
'"
.!:
'0
0
()
4.6 (1.2)
Type
Speed rathto crankshaft
Displacement, liter
(cu in.)/min/rpm
Water pump
~
~
3 0.3 (42.7 4.3)
.. _-.- ..
Fan
100 (6103)/2520 (pump speed)
380 (14.96) x 30
1.2 : I
13
Voltage
24V
Polarity
Negative
Glow plugs
Starter
"
E
c.
'5
0'
"[3
.;::
~
"
"
ill
Alternator
Regulator unit
Type
Rated voltage-current
Resistance value (at
normal temperature)
Sheathed type
22.5 volts - 4.8 amperes
Model
Manufacturer
Type
Voltage - output
Pinion/ring gear
(No. of teeth)
M005T27671
Mitsubishi Electric
Pinion-shift type
24 volts - 3 kilowatts
Model
Manufacturer
Type
Voltage - current
Rated voltage generating speed, rpm
. Rated output generating speed, rpm
AP401:2B,
Mitsubishi Electric
3-phase, enclosed type
24 volts - 12.5 amperes
11/132
1100
1900
Maximum permissible,
7000
rpm
Speed ratio to crank1.68
shaft
Model
Manufacturer
Type
Voltage regulator
cut-in voltage
Safety relay cut-in

voltage
14
4.5 0.5 ohms
RMS4227C.
Mitsubishi Electric
Voltage regulator
27.5 ~ 30.5 volts at 3000 rpm
(alternator speed)
5 volts, max.
CONSTRUCtiON AND FUNCTION.
Performance curves
Fully equipped (with fan, alternator and air cleaner)
Corrected to standard conditions [760 mmHg (29.9 in. Hg) pressure,
20C (68F) temperature and 65% humidity1
DD model
DPS model
15.5
I
I
.-- f-....
40
"".".-
40
i
In
Q.
20
1000
1300
lroo
1900
Speed rpm
2200
2500
2400
.-----
~35
/
0
/'
30
.........
I
I
i
37
i----.
14.5
I
I
"-
I
I
1000
I
1300
16CX>
Speed rpm
1900
2200
2500
240:>
Location of engine serial number

The engine serial number is embossed on the upper left
hand side, directly above the starting motor, as shown
below.
Engine serial number
15
Crankcase
a special cast iron are press-fitted. The sleeves arc of

"dry" type:- they are not in direct contact with engine
"
..
coolant.
The crankcase as a whole is designed for higll rigidity;
the strength built into it is calculated to withstand, with
an ample margin, the severe cyclic stress of complex
nature imparted by the internal running parts.
.
These stresses vary from one part of the crankcase to

another as in any diesel engine; the needed rigidity and
durability are secured by the skirt section, which is sized
more substantial and extending far below the level at
'.
which conventionaldesign crankcases are terminated to
mate with the oil pan.

Each main bearing cap is fitted into and held by the
crankcase, thus providing a more reliable support for the
crankshaft at five places along its length.
Main, thrust and big-end bearings
The five main bearings are of shell type, each consisthig
of two half shells, there being no distinction between
the two: each may be located on top or bottom at the
time of bearing installation in engine reassembly.
Crankshaft thrust is taken up at No. 5 journal. Three
bearing plates, each in the form of half-ring, are used:
two on the rear ahd one on the bottom front side of
No. 5 bearing. These thrust plates are held in place by
spring pins.
Connecting-rod bearings too are of shell type, each shell
being of tri-metal design. The shell is essentially a kelmet
metal fused to a steel backing base and covered by an
overlay of a lead-tin alloy deposited by plating.
l-Main bearing
lCrankcase
sleeve
2~Cylinder
3Side seal
4 Bearing caps
Crankcase and cylinder block
Crankcase
The crankcase and cylinder block are in one, shaped as
a single casting, into which the cylinder sleeves made of
16
.,
Air breather
The breather for letting fresh air into and letting out
fumy air from the crankcase is located on the right-hand
side of the engine_ It prevents the pressure inside the
crankcase from building up and thus minimizes the
amount of lube oil getting into the combustion cham.bers.
Cylinder head
The cylinder head is a singlepiece casting, elaborately
jacketed for improved cooling and also for greater
structural rigidity. Exhaust ports, intake ports and precombustion chambers, each-numbering fOUf, aTe cast out
inside the head. The exhaust ports open out to the right, .
and the intake ports to the left .
A total of 17 bolts secure the cylinder head to the
cylinder block. The positions of these bolts are sequentially referred to in the tightening procedure, and are
numbered sequentially, starting with "I" and ending
with "17" as shown.
Foward
:l:
Tightening sequence
Air breather
Cylinder head
Precombustion chambers
The precombustion chamber is formed with a cast-out
space and an orifice piece - precombustion chamber jet
- fitted into the cylinder head from its gasketed side.
The shapes of the piston crown and the communicating
orifice are such as to produce good turbulence even
when the engine is running. slowly. the glow plug,

sticking out into the ante chamber - precombustion
chamber - right beside the injection nozzle is a startin'g
aid in cold weather.
Cylinder head gasket
The gasket for sealing the joint between cylinder head
and cylinder block is essentially an asbestos insulator
sandwiched between two thin steel sheets, with its
combustion chamber holes being edged in apron fashion
by stainless steel grommets. The bottom surface in
contact with the cylinder block is coated with a special
sealing compound for improved sealing effecl.
Rocker cover
The rocker cover is aluminum alloy in material.
Valves, valve seats and springs
The intake valve has its disc sized as large as possible for
increased suction efficiency_
, 'I
~.:I.,
o
@
.
1-Rocker cover
2Cylinder head bolt

3Cylinder head
4Gasket
5Precomhustion chamber jet
6-Valve seat
Cylinder head
The material of valves is heat-resistant steel having good

hot-hardness. This steel used in exhaust valves is of a
special kind having extra high resistance to high-temperature creeping. burning and oxidation, fatigue and
thermal shock.
Each valve guide is fitted with a stem seal to prevent
lube oil from entering the combustion chamber.
17
A special heatresistant material of high durability type is

used in the valve seats of both intake and exhaust valves.
Each valve is loaded by a single coil spring, whose turns
arc spaced apart with equal pitch.

The valve stem end is capped; the cap is in contact with
the rocker arm and serveS as the wearing member.
:sv---_@
5
19
20
'Lock nut
2-Adjusting screw
3-Valve push rod
4Cylinder head bolt

5Racker bracket
6-Valve guide
7-Exhaust valve
8-Valve seat
15-Spring
g-Racker cover
16-Valve stem seal
lO-Rocker arm
11Rocker shaft
12-Spring retainer
13-Valve cap
20Cylinder head
14-Valve cotters
21Precombustion chamber jet
17-Glow plug
18-Fuelleak-off pipe
19Nozzle
Cylinder head - Cross section

Rocker aml5, shaft and brackets
The rocker arm is a forging. Its tip for pressing down the
valve ~tem is induction-hardened for increased resistance
to wear. Its bore for admitting the rocker shaft is bush
ed; the bushing is lead bronze in materiaL
Main moving parts

Crankshaft
The crankshaft is a single.piece forging complete with
balance weights. Its journals and crankpins are sized
large to increase its rigidity, and are casehardened by
induction heating.
Flywheel
The castiron flywheel carries the pilot ball bearing for
holding the forward end of clutch shaft. The flywheel is
doweled to the crankshaft and secured by four bolts.
Ring gear
Rocker arm
The rocker shaft is hollow; one end of it is plugged while

the other end admits lube oil for lubricating the rocker
arms. The external surface of this shaft is hardened by
nitriding at low temperatures.
The four rocker brackets are alluminum aHoy castings
shaped identically.
18
The ring gear is of a high carbon steel, its gears are

hardened by induction heating. The ring itself is shrink
fitted to the flywheel. There are 132 gear teeth, each
tooth being chamfered at its end facing the starter drive
pinion in order to facilitate the meshing action of the
pinion.
1-Crankshaft
2Ring gear
3Flywheel
4-Crankshaft pulley
5Crankshaft gear
6-Connecting rod bearing cap
7Connecting rod bearing (shells)

8Conne~tin9
rod
9-Piston pin bushing
1OPinton pin
l1-Piston
12Piston rings
Main moving parts
Pistons
The pistons are of an aluminum alloy. The piston crown
is recessed in such a way as to promote turbulence in
both precombustion chamber and main chamber. As
seen in side view, the piston is slightly tapered to present
an increasingly large diameter toward its skirt; and, as
seen in plan view, it is slightly oval. These two features
are calculated to compensate its roundness for unequal
thermal eX'pansion at the operating temperature.
The piston pin hole has its axis slightly offset toward
anti-thrust side in order to minimize piston noise. Each
piston has its weight indicated on its crown by punching.
All four pistons are rcquired to have the same weight
within a given tolerance so that the vibration of the
main moving parts during operation will be minimized.
Front of engine
Piston weight
Amount
of offset
Piston weight marking and pin hole offset

,
19
Piston rings
Each piston is fitted with three rings: two compression

rings (Nos. I and 2 as counted from top) and one oil
ring. No. I ring and oil ring have their faces chromeplated. No. 2 ring is tapered. An expander coil is
provided inside the oil ring to augment its elastic
strength.
Piston pins
The piston pin is hollow. Its sliding surface is case
hardened by carburization. It is fitted to the piston and
carries the small end of the connecting rod in "full
floating" manner. The pin inserted into the piston is
retained in place by a snap ring fitted into the pin hole
at each end.
Connecting rods
The connecting rod is a die forging, shaped to present
an "]" crOSs section in its shank in order to minimize its
own mass and yet to retain large strength necessary for
withstanding the high compressive force exerted by the
piston and also the complex bending stress. Its minimized mass reduces the stresses due to its own inertia ..
A lead bronze bushing is pressfitted into its small end .. '
A kelmet bearing is used in the big end to cope with the
high bearing load to which the big end is subjected.
2
lCompression rings
Timing gear train
2-0il ring
Piston rings
lCamshaft gear
2ldler
3-Crankshaft gear
4-lnjection pump gear
5ldler shaft
6Cover
7Timing gear case
Timing gear train
Timing gear case

To the front end face of crankcase is attached a large
mounting plate called the front plate. To this plate is
bolted the timing gear case, in which the timing gears are
housed.
The front plate is doweled to the crankcase by two pins.
20
The fuel injection pump is mounted on the front plate.

Thus, the position of the injection pump relative to the
engine is determined by these two dowel pins.
The fonvard end of crankshaft extends through the
timing gear case to drive the cooling fan through crank
shaft pulley. An oil seal is provided in the timing gear
I"'~""
1
case to prevent oil from leaking along this part of

crankshaft. The oil seal is doweled to take a given
position.
Timing gears
Helical gears made of high carbon steel are used to drive
injection pump and camshaft from crankshaft through
an idler. The teeth of these gearS"are finished by shaving
for increased durability and high machining accuracy.
Because of helical mesh, these gears run quietly and
assure accurate timing action.
1Valve push rod

2Tappet
3Crankcase
4Camshaft
AAmount of offset
. Tappet - Cross section
1Cam.shaft gear (No. of teeth: ~8)

2ldler (N~. of teeth: 43)
3-Crankshaft gear (No. of teeth: 19)
4-lnjection pump gear (No. of teeth: 38)
Timing gear configuration
Camshaft
The camshaft is a high carbon steel in material, and its
cam surfaces are chill hardened.
The front journal has an oil hole, through which the
lube oil under pressure flows from crankcase toward the
valve mechanism over the cylinder head. A part of this
oil lubricates the thrust face of camshaft.
Tappets
The tappet is of flat type and shaped potlike to admit
the push rod into its hollow. It is cast iron in material;
its camriding face is hardened by chilling. This design
provides a lightweight tappet, resistant to wear and
strong and thus suited to highspeed operalion. All
tappets, regardless of whether they are for intake valves
or exllaust valves) are identical and, therefore, identified
by the same part number.
Valve push rods

Made from carbonsteel pipe stock, the push rods has a
steel ball welded to its bottom end and a cavedin piece
welded to its top end. By the steel ball, the push rods
stands on the spherical scat provided in the tappet and,
by the cavedin top end, it bears against the adjusting
screw threaded in the rocker arm. These contacting ends
are hardened by carburizalion.
Valve timing and valve lash
Valve lash is prescribed' to be 0.25 mm (0.0098 in.)
(cold) for both intake and exhaust valves, and the valve
mechanism is limed to actuate the valve as follows:
INTAKE VALVES ..... open
close
EXHAUST VALVES
open
close
at
at
at
at
30
50
74
30
B.T.D.C.
A.B.D.C.
B.B.D.C.
A.T.D.C.
T.D.C.
30'
Exhaust stroke
Intake stroke
The axis of the push rod is slightly offset from the center
of the cam. This offset is calculated to cause the tappet
to rotate during operation and thus to prevent its camriding face from wearing unevenly.
74'
50'
B.D.C.
Valve timing diagram
21
CONSTRUCTION AND FUNCTiON
Lubrication system
~+-------~------CD
''i
0-1--
L __
'Piston
c~-+--(7)
20il filter
3-Cran"shaft
40il strainer
5-Rocker arm
6-Rocker shaft
70il pressure alar'm switch
8-0il pump
10Water pump
Lubrication oil circuit
Lube oil circulation

A trochoid rotary pump draws oil in the oil pan and
delivers it under pressure to a full-flow oil fliter, from
whlch the cleaned oil is forwarded into the oil gallery
. inside the crankcase. From the gallery, the oil is distributed to the various parts of the engine. The, pump is
driven from the camshaft.
Oil strainer
The strainer is a metal screen fitted to the suction siJe
of the oil pump. It serves the purpose of preventing any
large-size solid particles from entering the pump.
The oil fliter is of a cartridge type containing areplaceable

element through which the oil is forced. The element
becomes increasingly dirty as the solid particles accumulate on and in its texture, thereby increasing the
difference in pressure between inlet side and outlet side.
The element is to be replaced before the differential
pressure rises to a level at which the valve located'in the
bypass passage opens to allow the oil to bypass the
element and flow directly into the oil gallery.
gear formed of the camshaft. Being a trochoidal rotary
Oil pump
The pump is located inside the crankcase at its righthand rear portion. Its main shaft is driven from the skew
pump, it has two rotors, inner and outer. Inner rotor is
mounted on the shaft and drives outer rotor inside the

pump Case.
The bypass valve is an emergency means; it opens to

avoid any critically reduced supply of lube oil to the
running parts of the engine.
Oil pan
The. oil pan is a sheetmetal vessel shaped deeper in its
front part to provide an oil sump, The oil sump is so
located because of its position in the machine. The oil
level gauge is located at its right-hand side.
The gasket, through which the oil pan is attached to the
crankcase, is of rubberized cork.
'"
"
l-Drive gear
2Main shaft
3-Case
4Quter rotor
5-lnner rotor
,I
4
,',
m)llI'~'".H:'&'_ _~5
Oil pump - Cross section
22
It is a positive displacement pump with its rotors in

trochoidal mesh. This mesh is reiatively free of abrasive
action and enables the rotors to serve long and keeps up
its pumping performance. Its design performance is as
follows:
Pump speed
Displacement
Discharge pressure
1200 rpm
19.2 liters (1 172

cu in.)/minute
3 kg/cm' (43 psi)

at 50C (122F)
Oil nIter
The filter is mounted on the righthand side of crankcase
at its center part. The valve mentioned above for letting
the oil bypass the element is actually a relief valve
located in the center portion of the element. This valve
is set to open when the differential pressure across the
element rises to 1.0 0.2 kg/cm' (14.2 2.8 psi); when
the valve opens, the oil flows directly from inlet side to
outlet side. The flIter element must be serviced regularly
or before the element becomes so dirty as to actuate this
bypass valve.
R-l----H---(3
n---CD
CD
lElement
2Center screw
3-Bracket
4Relief valve
Oil filter
Fuel system
Fuel circuit
The fuel feed pump, mounted on the fuel injectioJ1
pump body and fanning a part of the injection pump
unit, draws fuel from the fuel tank and delivers it
through the fuel nIter to the gallery inside the injection
pump.
The injection pump is of individual plunger type, consisting of four plunger pump elements which are driven
from a common camshaft. Each pump element delivers,
intermittently, a shot of high-pressure fuel oil to its .
injection nozzle through its own injection pipe. These
shots are synchronized to the diesel cycle in each
cylinder and timed by the setting of the timing mechanism.
"Injection quantity," or the amount of fuel delivered
uniformly by the four pump elements to the engine
through their injection nozzles, is controlled from the
accelerator through a linkage and automatically adjusted
by the injection pump governor on the basis of engine
speed and load requirements.
1-Element
3Bypass valve
2-8racket
Oil filter - Cross section
The oil flIter head has a built-in relief valve operating in

response to the oil pump discharge pressure. This valve
starts relieving when the pressure rises to 3 0.3 kg/cm'
(43 4.3 psi), thereby bleeding the excess oil to the oil
pan and limiting the pressure of oil reaching the engine
oil gallery to a constant level.
Each injection nozzle is spring-loaded to spray fuel at

pressures not lower than 120 kg/cm' (1706 psi). A part
of each shot of fuel reaching the nozzle returns to fuel
feed pump through a leak-off pipe common to all four
nozzles. The injection nozzle is of throttle type (as
distinguished from standard type), and sprays fuel in
atomized form into the precombustion chamber.
The governor built in the injection pump body is a
mechanical all-speed governor, which limits the maximum and minimum engine speeds and actuates the
control rack of the injection pump to maintain a
constant engine speed under varying load condition at a
speed level proportional to the position of the accelerator.
23
.'.'-0,-
1:==1=-- From fuel tank
7
lFuel injection pump
2-Fuel feed pump
3lnjection pipe
4lnjection nozzle
5-Fuel leak-off pipe
6-Fuel filter
7-Fuel pipe
FU'el circuit
Fuelmter
The fuel mter is located forward of the intake manifold.

Its mtering element is made of a special paper designed
to provide high mtering performance and large capacity.
Total area of mtration
850 cm' (132 sq in.)
Filtering element mesh
2 microns (I')
Fuel feed pump

The camshaft in the bottom section of the injection
pump has an eccentric cam besides the cams for acluating the individual pump elements. By this eccentric
cam, the pumping plunger of Ihe feed pump is actuated
to draw fuel through the inlet strainer and forward it
with a discharge pressure limited to 2 kg/cm' (28.4 psi)
to the injection pump.
lBolt
2Gasket
5-Case
6Drain plug
3Cover
4-Air vent plug
7-Spring
8-Bolt
gSpring seat
10Element
AFrom fuel feed pump
BTo fuel injection pump
Fuel filter - Sectional view
24
A means of manually priming the fuel circuit ahead of

the feed pump is provided in this pump. It consists of a
plunger and a knob. Pushing the knob in rapid repetition
sends the fuel forward. The fuel circuit from the feed
pump through the fuel filter to the injection pump can
be primed in this manner. This feature is utilized also in
bleeding air out of the fuel circuit.
(I) Description
The pump body is an aluminum alloy casting and
houses all the moving parts of pump elements and
the camshaft. The governor housing is attached to
one end of the pump body.
n--t----I7
8
l-Hollow screw
2-Valve support
3Piston spring
~-Priming
pump
S-Check valve
6Feed pump housing

7-Gauze filter
aHollow screw
AFrom fuel tank
BTo fuel filter
Fuel feed pump - Cross section
Fuel injection pump
The camshaft is supported by two tapered roller ,

bearings. Like the engine camshaft, it has four
cams, one for each pump element, and is driven
from the crankshaft through a train of gears
arranged for a gear ratio of 2 to I. For each two
rotations of crankshaft, the injection pump camshaft rotates once.
The pump element consists of a plunger, barrel
(cylinder), tappet, plunger spring, control pinion
and spring-loaded delivery valve. The tappet rides
on the cam and pushes the plunger upward for
each rotation of camshaft. As the plunger rises,
the fuel in the barrel becomes compressed and is
forced out through the delivery valve into the
injection pipe. The upward plunger stroke, effective in compressing or pressurizing the fuel, is
variable, and is varied by 'means of the control
, rack and pinion in the manner to be explained
later.
The delivery valve, through which a shot of fuel is
forced out into the injection pipe by each upward
motion of the plunger, is essentially a check valve
having a special function of quickly reducing the
line pressure the moment the plunger begins to
descend. This quick relief of line pressure is
necessary to prevent the injection nozzle from
dribbling at the end of each injection. How this is
accomplished will become clear.
Injection pump data
1-Valve spring
2Delivery valve
3-Cylinder
4-Plunger
S-eontrol rack.
6-Control pinion
7Control sleeve
aPlunger spring
9Tappet
10-eamshaft
Fue"' injection pump
Cam lift
8 mm (0.315 in.)
Plunger diameter
6.5 mm (0.256 in.)
Delivery valve dia.
6 mm (0.236 in.); retraction

volume 51 mm 3
(0.003 cu in.)/stroke
Injection order
1-3-4-2
Injection interval
90 30'
(2) Pumping action

a. Pump element construction
The principal parts of the pump element are the
cylinder (barrel) and plunger, as shown in this
perspective view. Both are machined to extremely
close tolerances; the plunger slides up and down
in the bore of the cylinder with such a small radial
clearance as to make the fit virtually oil-tight.
25
The two - cylinder and plunger - are selectively

combined during manufacture and must be handled as an inseparable pair.
ii- CYlinder}
,1
Pump element
(2)----),,"
feed hole and, from this moment on, the plunger

compresses the fuel above it until the control
groove meets the hole. Effective stroke refers to
that lengtll of the plunger that keeps the feed hole
covered during the upward stroke. This length or
stroke can be increased or decreased by angularly
displacing the plunger.
,',,\
(
b; Pump element operation

The following description is referenced to the four
cutaway views below:
1. BOTTOM OF STROKE: Fuel flow; into the

inside space - delivery chamber.
Plunger
2. BEGINNING OF PRESSURIZATION: The cam

pushes up the plunger and, as it rises, its top
portion covers the feed hole.
l-Feed hole
3. FUEL- DELIVERY: Fuel is compressed; it

forces the delivery valve against its spring to
unseat the valve. From this moment, the fuel
in the line from delivery valve to injection
nozzle is pushed by the plunger.
. ;30rlving face
2-Control groove
Pump element
A helical slot is milled in the top portion of the
plunger. Called the control groove, this slot is
communicated to the space above the plunger
through a center hole (or a vertical groove in other
designs).
The eyUnder has a feed hole, through which the
internal space is communicated to the fuel chambet or gallery outside. Fuel (under pressure) flows
through this -hole when the plunger is down. As
the plunger rises, its top portion covers up the
(1) Bottom of stroke
(2) Beginning of pressurization
4. END OF EFFECTIVE STROKE: Pressurization

ceases and the delivery valve seats itself under
the force of its spring. This valve has an annular
recess. As the valve comes down, a small
amount of fuel becomes trapped and is extracted from the injection line, so that the
pressure ahead of the valve drops very sharply
to enable the injection nozzle to snap into
closed position. The amount of fuel so dfa\vn
back is called ilextraction volume," an impor-
tant factor of fuel injection.
(3) Fuel delivery
(4) End of effective stroke
Pump element operation
(3) Injection quantity control

a. Plunger rotating mechanism
The control sleeve, around which the control

pinion is fastened, surrounds the lower portion of
the cyUnder (barrel). The sleeve has two nocks or

slots in its bottom end; the driving face or flange
26
formed of the plunger is engaged with these slots,

so that the plunger rotates as the sleeve is turned.
The slots are long enough to permit the drive face
or flange to slide vertically for full plunger stroke.
,The control pinion is engaged with the teeth of
control rack.
b. Control action
The amount of fuel delivery, or injection quantity"
per stroke is detennined primarily by the effective
pumping stroke of the plunger. The control groove
milled out in the plunger being slanted, turning
the plunger around its axis changes its effective
stroke, and this turning is effected by moving the
control rack.
How the effective stroke is varied is illustrated in
three views of the plunger, cylinder, control pinion
and rack:
2Delivery chamber
5-Control pinion
7Plunger
a-feed.hole
3Control groove
6Control sleeve
g-Fuel chamber
l-Dellvery valve
Plunger rotating mechanism

Feed hole
A
\
Delivery stroke
Delivery stroke
Control groove
Effective stroke
'",'
Effective str~.l
T"
'-.....-L.::
(1) Non-injection
(2) Half injection
(3) Full injection
Injection quantity contiol

(4) Delivery valve
The seat of the delivery valve takes its position
right above the barrel and is held down 'tight by
the screwin pipe connection. The valve has its
guide portion fitted into the bore of the seat, and
is capable of moving vertically. A coil spring urges
the valve downward to keep the valve in contact
with the seat face by its conical face.
CD~
Q)-------
.1
Valve
Delivery valve
It should be noted that a land is formed of the

valve, a little above its guide portion, forming an
annular recess between it and the cone. This recess
assumes importance in regard to "extraction volume," mentioned previously.
l-$eating face
2-Land
Delivery valve
27
a. Check valve action

During normal operation, the valve spring keeps
the valve seated when the plunger is in noninjection position or, if it is in injecting position, when
it is moving on downward stroke. As the plunger
pressurizes the fuel in delivery chamber to overcome the force of valve spring, the valve unseats
anil lets out the highpressure fuel into the injection pipe .
. b. Retracting action
Consider the downward movement of the delivery
valve following the end of fuel pressurization. The
land enters the bore of the seat as the valve goes
down, so that the delivery chamber becomes
isolated from the injection pipe. The further
downward movement of the land draws a small
amount of fuel from the pipe and, when the valve
cone has seated fully, this fuel is in the annular
recess (called "extraction volu~e").
.
By this extraction, which occurs within
moment, the injection pipe becomes
de-pressurized, thereby enabling the
nozzle to snap into closed position
preventing the secondary injection or
from occurring after each fuel injection.
a flash of
instantly
injection
and thus
dribbling
1-Adjusting lever
2-Maximum speed stop screw
3ldling set screw
Governor
To make full Use of'the advantages inherent in this

governor) it is well to know its characteristics,
which may be summarized as follows:
(a) Compact and lightweight
(b) Automatic supply of excess fuel for starting
Extracting stroke
(1 r Beginning of extracting action
(2) End of extracting action
Type RSV governor

(1) Description
By type, the governor is a mechanical flyweight
governor; by function, if is 'an all-speed governor
operating in response to changes in engine speed
to actuate the control rack in order to maintain
engine speed at a constant level proportional to
the set position of the accelerator. This governor
function is in sharp contrast to that of a minimumspeed maximum-speed governor, whose control
action is to limit the lowest and highest speeds of
the engine, leaving the control of intermediate
speeds to the operator.
The RSV governor too limits the lowest and
highest speeds to provide a speed range over wmch
it performs the governing action mentioned above.
These limits, as well as its speed regulation, can be
changed by means of adjusting lever and screws.
28
(c) Adjustable speed range and regulation for

adapting the engine to each type of duty
(d) Maximum injection quantity for each speed
level can be adjusted to suit what the engine
demands, by adding an adaptor spring.
(2) Basic mles on governor setting
The governor is factory-sealed. Do not break the
seal in an attempt to change the settings of critical
parts unless you are qualified to do so.
1. Maximum speed stopper is set to supply the
right amount of fuel to the engine at the upper
limit of the speed range. Disturbing tms setting
is likely to result in lack of output power or in
overspeeding.
2. Full load stopper
amount of fuel for
ing this setting is
output power or
smoke.
is set to supply the right

fullload operation. Disturblikely to result in lack of
in dirty or black exhaust
Adjusting screw for the swiveling lever is set at

the position to which it has been backed away by
24 notches (6 rotations) or less from fully runin
position. Never try to back it away more than 24

notches or the. adjusting screw will come off
eventually to create a hazardous condition. (Refer
to the part dealing with the adjustment of speed
regulation.)
pulling this lever, can be changed by angling the

spring. Swiveling lever is the meanS of angling.
Unless you have overhauled RSV governors many

times and can remember the: overhauling proce
dure, be sure to refer to the disassembling and
assembling procedures outlined in the latter section of this manual if you are to overhaul them.
Never fc-use circlips, "E" rings and "0" rings
removed in disassembly. Use new parts in reassembly.
(3) Operating principles

The fundamental principles of a flyweight gover
nor are schematically illustrated here. Arms (A) of
flyweights, pivoting around point (C), push on the
spring-backed block, whose key point is indicated
as (B). The push is due to the centrifugal force of
revolving flyweights.
1-Control spring
2-Tension lever
4.swiveling lever
Control spring operation
1-Flyweights
2-Spring
Principle of governing action
When the revolving speed is constant, the push is

in balance with the counter-force exerted by the
compressed spring. This is an equilibrium condition. When the speed increases, for instance, the
whole ~ystem seeks a new equilibrium, relocating
point (ll) and block to the dotline position.
In the injection pump, point (B) is connected
through a linkage to the control rack; the rack is
pulled or pushed to vary the injection quantity,
thereby lowering or raising the engine speed.
(4) Control spriog
It will be recalled that the spring rate (or constant)
is the force required to stretch or compress it by
unit length. Of course, this force is in the axial
direction. For the tension lever, that part of the
spring rate of the control spring, effective for
Note that hook hole (E) is in the arm of swiveling

lever, and that this arm can be turned down (to
reduce the tensile preload on control spring) or up
(to increase the preload) by means of the adjusting
screw. Thus, that component of the spring force
acting on point (D) to turn tension lever can be
set initially by positioning swiveling lever and also
its adjusting . screw. Our interest is not in how
much force control spring exerts to tension lever
but rather in that part of this force effective in
turning the lever around its pivot point up above.
This arrangement of control spring (1) relative to
tension lever (2)explainswhy,in theRSVgovemor,
there is no need of using more than one control
spring to change the governed speed (the speed
which the governor operates to maintain) and to
increase or decrease the speed regulation (or speed
droop).
Note, also, that the block with its point (B) exerts
push to tension lever in the direction of the arrow;
this push is opposed by the pull of control spring.
This opposing pull can be increased or decreased
by turning the swiveling lever around its pivot (F).
If tension lever happens to be off and away from
full-load stopper, the increase or decrease of this
puil (against a given push of the block) causes the
control rack to move inward or outward, thus
varying the rate of fuel injection to raise or lower
the engine speed; consequently the push increases
or decreases to introduce a new equilibrium.
29
(5) Construction details

a. Flywheight device
The two flyweights are mounted on bushing keyed
to camshaft and secured by round nut. Since each
flyweight can turn around the shaft, and because
its inner tip has a roller, these two symmetrically
arranged flyweights are capable of pushing on the
flanged face of sleeve by their rollers through
rolling contact.
- '-'<"-;
l-Adjusting screw
2Torque spring
3Guide lever
lGuide lever
7-Camshaft
2-Ball bearing
3-Control block
8Governor housing
4Flyweights
SWeight supporting shaft
6-Reller
9-Camshaft bushing
10Governor sleeve
11Round nut
Flyweights and related parts

Sleeve is arranged to slide axially along bushing
and rotate around control block, there being
provided a liall bearing between sleeve and block.
The outer end of block is pinned to guide lever.
Thus, flyweights spread apart more or less depending on the r~nning speed of camshaft, and puSh
control block (toward the right in the illustration)
more or less through sleeve. In other words, the
rotating speed is translated into a linear force and
hence a resultant linear movement of block by the
medium of centrifugal force in opposition to the
force of springs.
b. Levers and springs
We are now to see how the speed-dependent movement of guide lever is transmitted to the control
rack of the injection pump. To do so, we must
take note of levers and springs intervening in this
Governor - Cross section
All these levers are movable, each being pivoted

to the stationary part of the governor at its top
or bottom end and pinned to another lever at its
other end or intermediate point.
Tension lever and guide lever are pendent from a
common pivot shaft (lever supporting shaft).

Control lever pivots on a fork joint (stationary)
by its bottom end, and its intermediate point is
pinned to a halfway point of guide lever, whose
bottom end is pinned to the control block, as
mentioned before.
The top end of control lever is linked to control
rack through shackle. Contiol spring is hooked
between swiveling lever and tension lever. Start
spring is hooked between the top end of control
lever and a stationary anchor point. Adaptor
spring is mounted inside the tension lever) and
opposes the control block. Idling spring is mounted

in the governor housing as if it were a cushion for
the tension lever.
transmission. To be examined are these levers and

springs: adjusting screw related to torque control
The shaft by which the swiveling lever turns

extends through the housing and, outside the
housing, is gripped by the adjusting lever. Turning
lever. torque spring on adjusting screw; guide lever;"
this lever turns the swiveling lever inside. I~ is to
tension lever; control lever; idling spring; adaptor
this adjusting lever that the accelerator (lever or

pedal) is linked; and it is by turning this adjusting
lever that the governed speed is manually raised
spring; control spring; swiveling lever; start spring.
30
4-Tension lever
5Torque control lever
S-PinA
7-Control lever
a-Idling spring
g-Tension lever pin
10-Adaptor spring
11-Fullload stopper
12-Flyweights
13-Control spring
14-Swiveling lever
15-Shackle
1SControl rack
l7-5tart spring
l8-Governor housing
19Adaptor
20-Lock nut
or lowered. Once the adjusting lever is set, the
c. Stop device
In the standard RSV governor, which is not
equipped with the stop device, turning the swivel.
ing lever all the way to reduce the preload (by
control spring) to zero causes the control lever to
pull the control rack ouMard, thereby reducing
the fuel injection to zero. This is the way. a
running engine is stopped.
governor operates to maintain a constant speed
corresponding to the position of the adjusting

lever.
The angular range of the adjusting lever is limited
by the maximum speed stopper at the upper end
of the range and by the stop adjust screw.
How these levers and spring cooperate will become
clear in the subsequent description of the governor
operation in three parts: ENGINE STARTING,
IDLING CONTROL and MAXIMUM SPEED CON
TROL. Before we consider the operation, we shall
discuss a special device - STOP DEVICE.
The stop device, if provided, makes it possible to

pull the control rack directly and independently
of the adjusting lever (outside) and swiveling lever
(inside). This device consists of a stop lever, a
supporting lever, two springs and a screw, all
associated with the control lever connected to the
control rack through the shackle.
CD
1-Start spring
2-Controllever
3-Stop lever
4$crew
5-Supporting lever
6Shaft
7-Pressure spring
8Return spring
9,Control rack
10Shackle
A~top
position
Stop device
Pushing down the stop lever to its stop position
(A) tilts the control lever outward and thus pulls
the control rack to its non.injection position. This
actuation is direct and fast.
In the standardspecification RSV governor, the
adjusting lever is turned to bear against the stop
adjust screw (both being located outside the
governor housing) to stop the engine. Where the
stop device is fitted to the governor, the stop
adjust screw may be so positioned as to limit the
lowest idling speed (beyond which the engine
should stall). How the stop device operates will
become clear later in the paragraph explaining this

deVice again in reference to a schematic side view
of the governor.
(6) Governor operation
a. Engine starting
Suppose the accelerator is a pedal. Depressing the
pedal turns down adjusting lever (shown as integral
part of the swiveling lever in the schematic side
view) toward the left, and pulls tension lever up
against full-load stopper, pushing control block
and governor sleeve.
31
responding automatically to any tendency of the

speed to rise or fall and acting to cancel off this
tendency by moving the control rack. Suppose,
now, that some load is put on the engine.
"roo
=m
, c
u.:..= a:
a ~
Stop~
Start
Stop
~.
.'-;
l
@
lAdjusting lever
4Guide lever
7Control block and governor sleeve

8-Flyweights
9-Swiveling lever
lO-Control spring
5-Tension lever
11Control rack
2-Start spring
3Control lever
The engine will then slow down and the flyweights

contract, reducing the push of control block to
allow the control rack to be pushed in. Consequently, the rate. of fuel injection increases to
raise the speed, and tltis increases the push exerted
by the control block. In no time, the governor
reaches an equilibrium state and the speed settles
again at a constant level. This new level, however,
is slightly below the previous one (because of
the speed regulation) and, if it is too low, could
cause the engine to stall.
Full load
Idling
Start
Stop
CD
6-Full-load stopper
Engine starting
By this movement, guide lever and control lever

tilt to the left, pushing the control rack to its
starting position. This pushing action is assisted
by start spring; this spring is designed to urge the
control lever toward the left with a relatively small
force.
When control rack is in its starting position, the

injection pump delivers. more fuel than is needed
for full-load operation. The excess fuel is needed
to help the engine fire up more easily.
b. Idling control
As the engine fires up, the operator would release
the pedal; this makes the swiveling lever and
adjusting lever move back to idling position to
reduce the pull on tension leve( and allow control
lever to be tilted back by the push exerted by
revolving flyweights upon control block. Control
rack is therefore pulled out to idling position, at
which the pump delivers fuel at a rate sufficient
for keeping the engine idling.
Under the conditions indicated, an idling equilibrium is established between control block on
the one hand and the total force of idling subspring and control spring, p1us start spring.
~".- "Idling" presupposes that the engine is not carry-
ing any load. With the adjusting lever (and hence

the swiveling lever , too) kept in the idling position
32
(j)
l-Adjustiog lever
2Control lever
3Guide lever
4Tension lever
5ldling subspring
6Full-load stopper
7-Control block
a-Flyweights
9Swiveling lever
10-Control rack
Idling control
c: Maximum speed control
Let us assume that the engine is idling with the
adjusting lever bearing against the idling set screw:
the adjusting lever is in idling position. If the
lever is moved gradually toward the maximum
speed stopper, the pull by the control spring
increases gradually and, through the process of
action and reaction involving the tension lever and
control block, the control rack moves inward,
increasing the fuel injection gradually to raise the

engine speed. As the adjusting lever meets the
full load stopper, the control block will be pushing
mentioned above, the governor maintains a con
the tension lever with a greater force, keeping the
stant engine speed (so-called "idling speed") by
lever off the full load stopper. Thus, the control
rack is prevented from moving too. far inward

beyond its "jdling" position.
,Adaptor .springj .
Fullioad stops action.
Idling
Start
, .. ;.
Stope=;> .
Stop
Full load
No load (Idling)
Start
Stop
1
.(1)
1Adjusting lever
2Control lever
3-Guide lever
4Tension lever
5Adaptor spring
6Fullload stopper
7Control block
aFlyweights
9-Swiveling lever
10-Control spring
11Contro! rack
Maximum speed control
(7) Speed regUlation and adaptor spring action

One way of considering the efiect of full engine
load on its speed is io see what would happen
when the load is increased gradually under the
lastmentioned condition of the governor; namely,
the adjusting lever is up against the maximum
speed stopper and the tension lever is off the
full-load stopper (with the flyweights spread wide
apart). As the load increases, the engine slows
down, and the tension lever closes in on the fullload stopper, causing the control rack to move
in the direction for increasing fuel injection quantity. As the engine slows down still further because
of the increasing load, the push by the control
block against the tension lever diminishes further
and, finally, the tcnsion lever touches the full-load
stopper_
The final speed, it must be noted, is lower than
the original no-load speed by several percent
despite the fact that the adjusting lever has been
kept at the position limited by the maximum
speed stopper. This difference in speed between
no-load condition and full-load condition is due to
the speed droop (or speed regulation) characteristic
inherent in the governor of this type_ "Speed
droop" is desirable for the stability of an engine
working under variable load condition.
l-Controllever
2Guide lever
3Tension lever
4ldling sub-spring
5-Full-load stopper
6Control block
7Flyweights
8Swiveling lever
gControl spring
10Control rack
No-load condition (transition from "full-load")

After the tension lever touches the full-load
stopper, what if the load on the engine increases
to lower its speed and causes the flyweights to
. contract? The tension lever can no longer push
back the control block; the control lever would
be unable to push the control rack inward to
increase the rate of fuel injection. This condition
is avoided by means of the adaptor spring built in
the tension lever.
Full load
Adaptor spring
starts to act
Idling (stop)
CD
Start
Stop e=;>
JI
11111111
Q)
l
l-Adjusting lever
2-Control lever
3Guide lever
4Tension lever
5Adaptor spring
6-Swiveling lever
7-Control spring
S-Control rack
Adaptor spring
33
Under the full-load condition, the tension lever

behaves as if it were rigid and the control block is
opposed by the adaptor spring. In other words,
the state of equilibrium is produced by the
adaptor spring and the control block. If the speed
falls due to a rise in load, then the adaptor spring
pushes the block to the left, causing the control
rack to move inward, thus increasing the delivery
of fuel to the engine.
Consider the reverse case: the load is decreased on
the engine running slow with full load. In this
case, the control block keeps on pushing the
adaptor spring to prevent the speed from rising
and, after compressing this spring fully, touches
the tension lever. From this point onward, the
block pushes the lever away from the full-load
stopper as the load keeps decreasing.
(8) Adapting injectioll quantity to engine
The true function of the adaptor spring can be
appreciated when the hvo important characteristics of a diesel engine and also of a plunger-type
injection pump are recalled.
The amount of fuel delivered per stroke by the
plunger in the pumping element is theoretically
constant when the plunger is in a given angular
position (with the control rack held in one position), regardless of its reciprocating speed (dependent on engine speed). Actually, tllis amount
. decreases as the speed rises. The reason is that the
leakage of fuel, though extremely small, through
the sliding clearance around the plunger decreases
as the speed rises.
On the other hand; the amount of intake air
drawn into each cylinder of a diesel engine is
theoretically constant and equal to the "swept
volume" of the cylinder; actually, this amount
increases as the speed of the engine rises. The
reason Is that air has mass and takes a definite
time to flow.
As long as the amount of air drawn into the
cylinder is sufficiently large for the amount of fuel
sprayed into it, there is practically no problem:
the fuel will burn completely and the exhaust
smoke will be clean. However, under full-load
condition and, consequently, with a large amount
of per-stroke fuel injected, a question has to be
asked: is there a sufficient amount of excess air
in the drawniJ1 air?
To summarize, where the control rack is held
steady and the speed is increased, fuel injection
quantity increases but intake air decreases. Under
full-load condition, the "smoke limit" would be
34
exceeded to result in a dirty exhaust smoke. To

avoid this situation, the control rack must be
pulled outward to decrease injection quantity,
that is, the control block must be allowed to
move toward the tension lever instead of being
stopped by this lever. This requirement is met by
the adaptor spring.
The graph shown here explains how the adaptor
spring adapts' injection quantity to the available
air in the engine:
Per-cycle Intake air for a cylinder
of the engine
a
0
'U
:~
~
'"~
~
I, --------r-_-_--~-_yi_---Injection quantity for
~_~bl
complete combustion
Injection quantity
"--t---- characteristic for two

typical settings of
"-
control rack
Speed (injection pump or engine)
This graph assumes that the control rack of the

injection pump is set for maximum injection
quantity_ Curve a - b' represents one setting, and
curve a' - b another. With curve a - b / , injection
quantity would too much at speed N' but just
right at speed Nt. With curve a' - b, the quantity
would be just right at speed at N' but too little
at Nt : What is desired for the air curve A - B is the
modified curve a - b, which can be produced by
causing the control rack to be pulled out by a
small amount as the speed rises under full-load
condition. The adaptor spring makes this possible.
(9) Governor characteristic

(End of stroke
limited by sleeve)
\
\
Rack pushed in beyond
Control block opposed
full-load position by
Adaptor spring yielding to the_ push
start spring
Adaptor spring fully compressed,
D
'-." __
.c-,:-~
Start spring in action
.-,-1-_-+---71
..>!.
.
by adaptor spring
control block being opposed direct
by tension lever
E
E
Maximum speed control range

(Tension lever is off full-load
stopper,)
Effect of
additional
e- c:
e .2
part, torque
g.~g I-~==:j~~~__-t__
-t__1
s_p_rirng______
rio-load position
Adjusting lever
in idling position.
Specified
~ K
idling speed
Start spring and
idling spring in
action----t::::=-__--.l______l __-.l______--.JL--.l___
Pump speed (rpm)
(10) Stopping the engine with stop lever

The stop device, mentioned in CONSTRUCTION
DETAILS, is shown schematically, as associated
with the bottom end of the control lever. With
the stop lever in normal position, the control lever
has its bottom end at the position for normal
governor operation. Pushing down the stop lever
Full load
Start
Stopc=;>
Idling
Stop
CD
~~~
1-Adjusting lever
2Control lever
3-Guide lever
4-Tension lever
5-Stop lever
6..control block
7-Flyweights
a-Swiveling lever
9-Control spring
10Control rack
---~._
tilts the control lever to pull the control rack all

the way out to the noninjection position, thereby
causing the engine to stop.
Injection nozzle and nozzle holder
Referring to the cross section of the nozzle, the internal
space of the nozzle and holder is filled with fuel. The
leakoff line for passing the fuel back to feed pump is
connected to nozzle holder. The leakoff passage drilled
out in the holder is communicated to the space above
distance piece, in which pressure spring is contained to
load upon pressure pin.
The fuel inlet, to which the injection pipe (not shown) is
.connected, is provided in the holder. The inlet passage
extends through the nozzle holder and opens out at the
pressure chamber formed in the tip of injection nozzle.
The needle valve has its conical face exposed to the fuel
in the pressure chamber.
In operation, a shot of high.pressure fuel reaches the
pressure chamber in the fonn of a pressure rise, causing
the needle to unseat so that the fuel is forced out
through the orifice into the precombustion chamber.
The pressure at which the needle unseats itself is deter
mined by the compressed state of pressure spring. This
preload can be varied for adjustment by chimging the
thickness of washer. The internal mating faces as well as
the threaded portions are finished to extremely close
tolerances to ensure the high oil.tightness required of
this injecting unit.
Stopping the engine with stop lever
35
Injection nozzle tip
Type
NPDNOSD
Opening pressure
120 5 kg/em'
(1706 71 psi)
Angle of fuel spray
o deg.
lRetalning nut
2Nozzle tip
3-0istance piece
4Pres5ure pin
~:Pressure spring
"6-Washer
7-Nozzle holder
g-Gasket
9Nut
Injection nozzle - Cross, section
Cooling system
Description
r-
Thermostat
I
I
Cylinder head
Crankcase
o Thermostat bypass
D
Water pump
Cooling system block diagram
CD
l-Thermostat
2Water temperature gauge
3Bypass hose
4-Radiator
5Water jacket
6-Cylinder head
7Crankcase
8Drain plug
Direction of coolant flow
36
Referring to IKe diagram, above, the coolant is set in

forced recirculation by the water pump, which is a
centrifugal pump driven by cooling.fan belt. The pump
draws coolant from the lower tank section of radiator
(4) and forwards it to the water inlet of crankcase (7).
Upon entering' the middle section of the crankcase,
coolant flows in the jacket to cool the cylinders; then it'
rises into jacket (5) of cylinder head (6) to cool the
combustion chambers and areas around the intake and
exhaust valves. From the forward end of the cylinder
head, the coolant, now hot because it has taken as much
heat as it can, flows into the inlet of thermostat (I).
The thermostat, responding to coolant temperature,
controls the flow of coolant toward the radiator upper
tank. When coolant temperature is low as when the
engine has just been started up from cold state, the
thermostat valve remains closed and aU of the coolant
is diverted back to the water pump inlet through bypass
hose (3): under this condition, radiator (4) is bypassed
by the coolant.
As the rising coolant temperature reaches 76.5C
(169.7F), the thermostat valve begins to open increas
ingly wide and the coolant begins to flow to radiato'r (4)
at a rising rate of flow, with a corresponding decreases
in the amount of coolant being bypassed. As the tern

perature reaches 90C (l94F), the valve becomes full
open, shutting off the bypass passage.
The probe for temperature gauge (2) is installed in the
coolant outlet of cylinder head. It is with the signal
produced by this probe that the gauge (located at the
control station) operates.
Water pump
Pump case (6) is secured to cylinder block through
cover plate (10). Pump shaft (3) is supported by two
baU bearings (5) having a large bearing capacity. Lube
oil is supplied under pressure from engine main oil
gallery into space (7) formed around shaft between the
two bearings.
Two oil seals (2) contain the oil so admitted to lubricate
the ball bearings. Unit seal (9) prevents coolant from
leaking out along the shaft. Impeller (8) is threadedly
mounted on the inner end of the shaft, and puUey (\) is
keyed to the outer end.
Crankshaft pulley and pump pulley (1) are in the speed
ratio of I to 1.2. The pump capacity is 100 liters
(6103 cu in.)/minute at 2520 pump rpm.,
l-Pu.'ley
20il seal
3Shaft
4.spacer
5-Ball bearings
6-Case
7-Space filled with lube oil
a-Impeller
g-Unit seal
10-Cover plate
Water pump - Cross section
Thermostat
The thermostat is of wax type, designedto start opening
its valve at 76.5 2C (169.7 3.6F) of rising tern
perature and open it fully at 90C (1 94F), lifting it off
the seat by 9 mm (0.35 in.) (maximum lift).
37
CONSTRUCTION AND FUNCTiON
Cooling fan
The cooling fan has 6 blades and drives air against the
core of the radiator. It is secured to the front end of
the water pump pulley. Its outside diameter is 380 mm
(14.96 in.); the pitch angle ofits blade is 30 deg.
Fan belt
A single low-edge cog belt of Type B is used to transmit
drive from crankshaft pulley to pump pulley. Its length
is 41 inches (1047 mm).
he E
Electrical equipmelit
Major equipment specifications
Equipment
Type
Make
Starter
M005T2767I
Mitsubishi Electric
Alternator
AP4012B,.
Mitsubishi Electric
Regulator unit
RMS4227C9
Mitsubishi Electric
Glow plugs
Sheathed type Hiyoshi Denso
L N F A Regulator unit
ryvyyy.
~1~A~~irrll
i i : I L':.:::.;!
I
Glow plugs:
Alternator (AC24V 12.5A)
L ____ _
Il ___
L':'::::::
.:... ____ _
Glow plug pilot lamp
Oil press.ure Indicator .
Charge pilot
lamp
If=:f===!l Fuse box
Starter switch
~=jh
Battery (12V'{)OAH) x 2
Circuit diagram
Starter
(1) Specifications
Item
Specification
Motor type
Lever-shift pinion type with overrunning clutch, built on totallyenclosed waterproof DC motor,
M005T27671, compound wound
Voliage
24 volts
Output
3kW
Yoke dia.
118 mm (4.646 in.)
Rating
30 seconds
Rotation
Clockwise as viewed from pinion

side
Weight
Approximately 12.5 kg (27.6Ib)
No-load
characteristic
4500 rpm, drawing not mOre than

50 amperes, at 23 volts
Lockedrotor
characteristic
Developing 4.0 kg-m (29 ft-Ib) and

drawing not more than 700 amperes at 9 volts
Switch-on
voltage
16 volts, maximum
38
(2) Construction
The motor enclosure is of totally-enclosed type,
designed tight against oil and water. The following
cross section shows that the starter motor consists
of three components: DC motor, engaging mecha

nism comprising an overrunning clutch, a shift
lever and a pinion, and magnetic switch for actuat
ing the lever.
Starter
1Bushing
2Rear bracket
3Brush
4Switch
6Plunger
6Lever
7-Front bracket
9-Yoke
10~Fje)d
coli
11Pole piece
12Armature
13Center bracket
14-Bushing
aOverrunning clutch
Starter - Cross section
(3)
Overrunning clutch
l-Splined sleeve
The inner race is integral with pinion (3), and the

outer race presenting five cams is integral with
splined sleeve (I). The sleeve is engaged with the
splined part of the shaft, there being 10 splines.
Five clutch rollers (2) are distributed around the
inner race, each being pressed against the cam by
a spring.
2Roller
3'Pinion
Overrunning clutch - Cross section
The splined sleeve is capable of sliding axially

along the shaft and, when it does slide, the whole
clutch moves axially. As the motor shaft rotates,
the sleeve revolves with the shaft (when the sleeve
is prevented from advancing any further with the
pinion meeting the stopper) to drive the pinion in
mesh with the ring gear of the flywheel. Under
trus condition, the rollers (2) are seized between
inner race and cams. If the flywheel ring gear
drives the pinion (after the firing up of the engine),
rollers (2) become released and "freewheel" between inner race and outer race: under this
condition, no drive is transmitted from engine
side to the starter.
39
The shift lever, extending from the magnetic

switch" embraces the splined sleeve (I) by its
forked end. The top end of this lever is held by
the magnetic switch plunger; and the middle part
is pinned. As the plunger jumps inward upon
energization of the switch coil, the lever tilts to
push the clutch toward the ring gear. When this
lever.shifting action occurs in actual starting up of
the engine, the motor will' be rotating rather
slowly to advance the clutch by the screw action

due to the helical splines. Thus, the pinion
advances rota tingly to mesh into the ring gear.
(4) Starter operation
How the starter is operated to crank the engine,
will be explained sequentially in reference to this
schematic diagram of the starter circuit:
--::- -
Contactor
.----.---{ M
Shunt winding
tI
tED
sw
T
-L
l8
,
Starting circuit diagram
a. Turning on the switch energizes the two coils of

the magnetic switch. The initial current from the
battery flows in these two coils, one of which is
connected in series with the motor, so that the
motor begins to run but slowly because the initial
current is rather small. In the meantime, the two
coils pull in the plunger to push the overtunning
clutch toward the ring gear. The clutch slides
along the helical splines and, for the reason already
stated, advances smoothly to mesh its pinion with
the ring gear.
b. As the pinion meshes into the ring gear fully, the
plunger is allowed to move in all the way, making
its contactor to close, thereby permitting full
'current to flow throUgil terminals (M) (B) into the
motor. Consequently, the motor runs with full
force to crank the engine. Under this condition,
the coil in series with the motofis shunted so that
practically no current flows in this coil, but the
other coil (connected between terminal (S) and
ground) remains energized to hold' the plunger in
pulledin position.
c. Turning off the switch (key switch) upon firing
up of the engine deenergizes the holding coil,
so that, by the force of the return spring, the
plunger snaps back to the original position, thus
disr.upting the motor current and pulling the
pinion away from the ring gear. The motor will
40
coast before coming to a halt: the counterelectro

motive force (reverse voltage) occurring in the
motor during this coasting helps the plunger move
outward.
Alternator 'and regulator unit
(1) Alternator specifications and data
The alternator is complete with a rectifier.
,
Item
Type
Specification
Enclosed-type alternator ,AP4012Bl
Rated output
24 volts, 12.5 amperes
Ground
Negative ground
Outside diameter
128 mm (5.039 in.)
Rotating
direction
Clockwise as viewed from pulley

side
Weight
6.4 kg (14.1Ib)
(2) Regulator specifications and data

Item
Specification
Type
Two-element type RMS4227 C.
Elements
Voltage regulator, and safety relay

(w/lamp)
Weight
0.45 kg (lIb)
'\
/
(3) Alternator construction

The alternator enclosure is of enclosed type. The
field is a single coil mounted on the shaft and surrounded by two multi-pole magnets; excitation
current is supplied through slip rings to the coil.
The armature coils are in three groups connected
to provide a threephas~ annature) and are mount
ed in the laminated core secured to the casing.
Thus, the armature is stationary and the field is
rotary. The rotor shaft is driven from the engine
through the belt and pulleys.
The three-phase output leads of the annature are
tied to the six-diode rectifier mounted inside the
casing: three diodes are soldered to the positive
heat sink and the other three to the negative heat
sink. Cooling is made by the fan from outside.
Alternator
J20091
1-Searing
2Rear bracket
3-5tator coil
5-Front bracket
6Fan
7-Diode
aPulley
9-Bearing
Alternator - Cross section
(4) Charging system operation

The first of the two circuit diagrams to follow
shows how the current flows from the battery
when the key switch is turned on for starting up
the engine. The second shows the flow of current
for charging the battery. In these diagrams, attention should be directed to voltage coils VCI and
VC2 and current coils CC, and CC2, the four
coils of the regulator unit.
VCI and CC, actuate points P, ; VC2 and CC2

actuate points P2 and P3. The energizing current
of a voltage coil is dependent on voltage; that of a
current coil (which is connected as a shunt coil) is
depending on current.
In these diagrams, the alternator unit (not shown)
is represented by its three terminals (A) (F) (N).
DC output voltage is available between terminal
CA) and ground. Another voltage occurs between
41
terminal (N) - neutral point of the rectifier - and

ground. Terminal (F) is for receiving field excitation current from the terminal (A) of the alternator unit itself or, at engine starting, from the
battery.
a. Engine starting
With the battery switch closed, turning on the key
switch (by moving It to position 1) allows current
to flow from the battery to the alternator field

and also to the lamp. Field, current at this time is
small because of resistor R. The lamp burns. to
tell that the alternator is not generating power.
Turning the key switch to position 2 connects the
battery to the starter to crank the engine through
the sequence of actions already described.
A ~~~----------------------------~
\'
R.
To terminal F
.c
II
on alternator
.~
?:
ve,
R,
!l
R,
RMS4227C9
~
m
_J
T
I
I
I
_1-
?:
~
m
~
P.
B
Flow of current for starting the engine
Under this condition, points PI, p, and P3 remain

in the indicated state by their springs.' Current
flows in VCI but it is too small to be of any
consequence.
b. Normal charging operation

As the engine starts up, the alternator unit begins
to develop output voltage, so that VC, becomes
energized (by the voltage between terminal (N)
and ground (E), as mentioned before) to open
points p, and put out the lamp.
The output current of the alternator unit flows
through point P3 toward the !'a!tery and toward
the alternator field through points PI when the
output voltage is up at the normalleve!.
If this voltage rises above the predetermined level,
the current in VCI increases to open points PI
42
against its spring, so that 'field current has to flow

through resistor Rs and is therefore smaller than
before: this reduces the output voltage of the
alternator unit. Actually, points PI open and close
in rapid succession to regulate the voltage at a
relatively constant level.
'\
!
A~~----------------~----------,
~.
.-----~vv----~IGr-7-----------~
1
Key switch
Battery switch
o
T
Battery I
I
R.
1
.,.
~---==~--~------------------~-------------'
Flow of current for charging the battery
c. Auxiliary circuits
Capacitor C and resistor Rl are for absorbing the
surge that occurs when points P, open. They
prevent arcing from jumping between the contacting faces of points p, .
Current coil CC, assists VC, in closing and
opening points p, sharply so that the output
voltage will be free from excessive ripples.
Current coil CC, and resistor Rs pass some
current for the alternator field when points p, are
open: they prevent the voltage from fluctuating
so widely as to cause the lamp to flicker.
Glow plugs
Each precombustion chamber of the engine has a
glow plug. The plug is a starting aid and serves to
warm up the chamber by "glowing" red with electricity
supplied from the battery. It is of a sheathed type in
Glow plug
construction.
The four glow plugs, one for each cylinder, are connected in parallel between the preheating line and
ground. Failure of one plug, therefore, does not cut out
the other three.
43
MA1NTENANCE
AND
ADJUSTMENT
Inspection and adjustment of engine proper

Valve clearance adjustment
The valve clearance specification for this engine is 0.2~
mm (0.0098 in.) fot both intake and exhaust valves.
This value assumes that the engine is at normal tempera.
ture, there being no temperature difference throughout
the body of the engine. The checking and adjusting
procedure is as follows:
(1) Rotate the crankshaft slowly to bring the piston in
No.1 cylinder to Top Dead Center (TDC). This
can be accomplished by observing rocker arms of
No. 4 cylinder. As you turn the crankshaft,
exhaust-valve rocker arm of this cylinder rises: stop
turning the crankshaft just when intake-valve rocker
arm begins to go down after exhaust valve rocker
arm has come uP all the way. Under this condition, adjust valve clearance in the usual manner on
intake and exhaust valves of No. I cylinder, intake
valve of No.2 cylinder, and exhaust valve of
No.3 cylinder.
(2) Turn the crankshaft one complete rotation (360),
and hold it there. Adjust the clearance on intake and exhaust valves of No. 4 cylinder, exhaust valve
of No.2 cylinder, and intake valve of No.3 cylinder.
12 mm 11/2 in.)
CD
1Alternator pulley
3-Fan pulley (water pump pulley)
2-Crankshaft pulley
Fan belt tension
Crankcase
Crankcase "inspection
(I) Inspect the outside and inside surfaces for evidence
of cracking. Visually examine the cylinder bores
for scuffing, rusting, erosion or" any abnormal
wear. -Using a straightedge,_ check the top face
(for mating with cylinder head), front face (for
mating with front plate) and rear face (for mating
with rear plate) for flatness.
Checking crankcase top for flatness

Adjusting valve clearance
Fan belt lesion adjuslment

Give a thumb pressure to the middle section of the belt
between alternator pulley and water pump pulley, and
see how much this portion of the belt deflects by
measuring with a rule. The deflection should be 12 mm
(1/2 in.): if not, loosen the mounting bolts of the
alternator holder to displace the holder in order to
lighten orslacken the belt. After obtaining the prescribed
amount of deflection, be sure to tighten the bolts good
and hard.
(2) Make sure that the top face of the crankcase is

flat within the repair limit specified below. If the
limit is found to be exceeded, reface the top by
using a surface grinder to make it flat within the
specified flatness. Be careful not to remove any
more stock than is necessary; if a stock of more
than I mm (0.039 in.) has to be ground off, then
the crankcase is done for.
Unit: -mm (in.)
Item
Flatness of crankcase
top face
Standard
0.05, max.
(0.002)
Repair
limit
0.2mm
(0.008)
47
Cylinder sleeve inspection

(I) Using a cylinder gauge, take J.D. measurements in
two directions (parallel and transverse to crank
shaft axis) on each cylinder sleeve, at. three places
indicated below; and, from the six measurements
taken, determine the amounts of wear (in comparsion with the specifications, listed below) and of
uneven wear to see if the repair is exceeded; if so,
rebore the sleeve to the next oversize.
(2) Two oversizes are provided for: +0.25 and +0.5

mm (0.0098 and 0.0]97 in.). After reboring, be
sure to hone the bore to the specified oversize
accurate within plus 0.035 mm (0.00]4 in.) or
minus 0 mm. Machining the bores of all four
sleeves to the same oversize is preferred. (pistons
and piston rings are available for the two oversizes.)
(3) If any sleeve bore is unevenly worn, determine the
oversize, to which the sleeves are to be rcbored,
on the basis of the maximum wear noted. This

will ensure perfect roundness in the oversized
bores.
[NOTE]
If the cylinder sleeves are found in good condi
tion, 'vith the wear far less than the repair limit,
it is permissible rebuild the engine with replace.
ment piston rings. In such a case, be sure to
ream off the '~ridge" and, as necessary, hone
the bore.
Taking I.D. measurements on cylinder sleeves

Crankcase g8sketed surface
>
:.'.
Positions for checking sleeve bore diameter
Unit: mm (in )
Item
Standard
94+ 0 .035
-0
Repair
limit
Cylinder
sleeve J.D.
+0.20
(3.70] ~~00]4) (+0.008)
Outofround
om 5 (0.0006),
Taper
Service
limit
+1.20
(+0.Q47)
max.
0.Ql5 (0.0006),
max.
NOTE: "Taper" refers to the parallel ness of bore wall.
Cylinder sleeve replacement

A cylinder sleeve badly scuffed or worn down beyond
the service limit must be replaced by a new one and, in .
such a case, it is not necessary to replace the other
sleeves.
If, however, the cylinder hole becomes damaged in the

process of removing a sleeve, then the hole must be
rebpred for repair and, only in such a case, all the four
sleeves must be replaced. The procedure of replacing the
cylinder sleeve is as follows:
(I) Set the boring machine on the crankcase, and

center it on the sleeve by referring to the lower
part of the sleeve which is least subject to uneven
wear.
(2) Operate the machine to cut the sleeve until its

wall thickness decreases to about 0.5 mm (0.0197
in.)
(3) Taking care not to damage the cylinder hole,
48
"MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENT
break the sleeve and take it out of the hole.
(4) Take measurements on the diameter of the cylin

der hole and also on the 0.0. ofthe replacement
sleeve; and, from these measurements, see if an
interference anywhere between 0.08 and 0.145
mm (0.00315 and 0.00571 in.) is available in the
fit to be made; if not, try another sleeve to meet
this interference requirement."
(5) With a proper replacement sleeve having been
selected, heat the crankcase in a bath of oil to
about 300C (572p). Using the sleeve installer
and hydraulic press, push the sleeve into the
crankcase in one stroke, making sure that the top
end of sleeve becomes flush with the gasketed
surface (top) of crankcase.
(6) Hone the installed sleeve to the standard 1.0.,

that is, 94 plus 0.035 mm or minus 0 mm (3.701
plus 0.0014 in. or minus 0 in.).
(bearing cap). On the basis of findings, determine

whether the bearing should be replaced or not.
(2) Check each main bearing to be used in engine
reassembly to see whether it will provide the specified radial clearance. This can be accomplished in
this manner.
Install the main bearings on the crankcase, less the
crankshaft, securing each bearing cap by tightening
its bolts to 10.4 kgm (75.2 ftlb), and read the
diameter in the two directions (A) (D), indicated
below. Mike the journal and, from these readings,
compute the radial clearance.
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Standard
Repair
limit
Radial clearance
between main
bearing and journal
0.05 ~O.l15
(0.0020 ~ 0.0045)
0.20
(0.008)
If the computed clearance exceeds the limit, reo

place the bearing or regrind the journal and use
the next undersize bearing. Two undersizes are
available for" this purpose: 0.25 and 0.50 mm
(0.0098 and 0.0197 in.). "
Replacing sleeve
Unit mm (in.)
Item
."
Standard diameter
-0.010 (3858 -0.00039)

Cylinder hole diameter 98 -0.045'
-0.00177
Por replacement sleeves, be sure to use the parts
with this part number:
Measuring main bearing I.D.
Unit mm (in.)
Part number
0.0.
1.0.
34407-00300
98 +0.10
+0.07
(3 858 +0.0039)
.
+0.0028
93 +0
-0.2
+0
(3.66 -0.0079)
Main bearing inspection

(I) Inspect each main bearing for evidence of wiping
or fatigue failure, for scratches by dirt particles
imbedded and for improper seating on the bore
Positions for miking main bearing
49
(3) Check each mainbearing shell for "crush." SheIis

found to be loose in the bore or have an excessive
crush must be replaced. A crush of up to 0.04 rom
(0.00157 in.), which will yield to a load of 500 kg
(1102.5 Ib), is prescribed.
500 kg
..
Crush: 0 ...... 0.04 nim
Miking camshaft hole
..
Unit: mm (in.)
Main bearing crush
Item
Tappet and tappet hole inspection

(I) Inspect the riding face of each tappet for wear,
contact pattern and crack. Replace defective
tappets.
(2) Check the radial clearance of the tappet in the
hole against the repair limit, indicated below. If
the limit is exceeded, then replace the tappet. If
the hole is worn down so much as to provide an
excessive radial clearance even with a new tappet,
the crankcase must be replaced.
Clearance of
journal in
hole
RlIc.hin~
Hole
Item
Tappet.
tochole
clearance
Tappet hole
diameter
Standard
Repair
limit
Service
0.035 -0.086
(0.0014 0.0034)
0.12
(0.0047)
+0.1 (hole)
(+0.004)
22 .+0.021
-0
(0.866Ij00083)
limit
+0.1 ..
(+0.004)
Camshaft hole inspection

(I) Inspect the inside surface of each hole for wear
and scratch.
(2) Mike the I.D. of respective holes and also the
camshaft journals and, from the readings taken,
. compute the radial clearance available on each
journal. If the clearance exceeds the limit, insert
bushing or replace camshaft to reduce the clearance
to the specification.
50
Journal
O.D.
Repair
limit
0.04-0.09
(0;0016 0.0035)
0.15
(0.0059)
Service
Iim;"t
54+0060
Nos. 1
-0
and 2 (2.12l0.00236)
-0
.
No.3
Unit: mm (in.)
Standard
53 +0.060
-0
2.087~00236)
54- 0 .04
Nos. 1
-0.06
and 2 2 126-0.00157)
. -0.00236
-0.1
(-0.0039)
53- 0 .D4
-0.06
No.3
(2087-0.00157)
. -0.00236
-0.1
(-0.0039)
(3) To install the camshaft bushings, use a group of

drivers (puller, 3009107300, adaptors, 30891
04500 and 30891.04600) after boring the ID of
camshaft holes in the crankcase up to 57 mm 0
(2.244 0 in.).
Valves and valve seat

(1) Inspection
Decarbon valve stems and seats; inspect both for
wear and evidence of burning. Provided that the
wear is within the service limit, grind smooth the
seating face of each valve, removing the wear
groove, if any, and finishing it to the specified

angle of 45 deg. For this service, use a valve
refacer.
'Handle
2Spacer plates -'
3-Pilot plate
4Bushing
5Crankcase
6Drive plate
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Service
Standard
limit
Use of bushing driver
Cylinder head
Cylinder head inspection
Check Ihe gaskeled surface of the cylinder head for
flatness by using a straightedge and thickness gauge as
in the case of checking the crankcase surfaces. This
check is to be made with the precombustion jets
Intake
8 -0.045
-0.060
-0.1
0
00177
(-0.004)
)
(0315- .
-0.00236
.
Exhaust
8 -0.060
-0.075
-0.15
(0315-0.00236) (-0.0059)
.
-0.00295
Valve stem
diameter
removed.
Use a surface grinder to reface the cylinder head, as

necessary, to the specified flatness.
Valve head thickness
I.5 (0.059)
1.2(0.0472)
after
refacing
Valve head thickness
Checking cylinder head face for flatness

Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Standard
Flatness of gasketed
0.05 (0.002),
surface of cylinder
max.
head
Repair limit
0.2
(0.008)
(2) Valve replacement

(a) Replace valves whose stems are found to have
worn down to the service limit or head thick.
ness is down to 1.2 mm (0.0472 in.) or under
after refncing.
(b) Any valve showing evidence of cracking parti

cularly in the head part must be replaced.
(c) "Valve sinkage" refers to a head face being
below the combustion chamber surface, as
shown, and is prescribed to be not greater than
1.3 mm (0.051 in.), the standard sinkage being

0.7 0.2 mm (0.028 0.008 in.). If the limit
is reached, replace the valve or seat.
(d) Replace valve caps found excessively worn at

the top face.
51
CD
.,
2r---_-lH
A-Sinkage
1-Valve
;"
2-Cylinder head
(3) Valve guide replacement
Standard
Service
limit
Intake
0.055;.... 0.085
(0.0022 ~
0.0033)
0.15
(0.0059)
Exhaust
0.070 ~ 0.100
(0.0028 ~
0.0039)
0.20
(0.0079)
Guide length outside

hole
::
Uriit: mm (in )
Valve stem
clearance in
valve guide
'.
3r--_ _J::!:1
Valve sinkage
Item
....,
.: ..:..
17 0.3
(0.669 0.012)
Where the stemtoguide clearance is found to have

exceeded the service limit, both valve and guide
must be replaced. Apart from this clearance, check
each guide to see if its J.D. near each end has
enlarged and, if so, replace it.
Valve guides are pressfitted. To remove them, use
press and a drift, which is a special tool called
the guide remover (31391.10500); to install, use
the installer (34491.00400), another specialtool
drift.
l-Installer
2-Guide
3Cylinder head
AGuide length outside hole
Installing valve guide

(4) Valve stem seal replacement
The valve stem seals should be replaced if the
engine disassembled shows evidence of lube oil
leaking into the combustion chambers along valve
stems. The seal can be readily removed. When
putting on a new seal, make sure that it fits snugly
into tlie annular groove provided in the valve guide
end.
If a valve has to lie drawn out for one reason or
another in the engine in regular use, be sure to
have a replacement stem seal on hand for that
valve. This is because the seal lip is certain to get
scarred by the sharp-edged stem end.
.:.:
.'
.. ;.....
: '.
'.
"
.'
'-'-="-l"
2-Guide
3-Cylinder head
Valve stem' seal replacement
2-Guide
3..(;ylinder head
Removing valve guide
52
',', "
lStem seal
l-Remover
(5) Valve seat refacing

A valve seat badly worn or coarsened must be
refaced by grinding in place. Use a valve seat
grinder or a seat cutter and 400.grit emery cloth.
Care must be exercised in using the seat cutter so
that the cut will be even all around. After cutting,
pinch the 400'grit emery cloth between the cutter
and the seat and grind the seat face smooth.
Before installing the valve, lap the valve and seat,

using the lapping compound. Check for contact
pattern after lapping, using a paste of red lead to
visualize the pattern. The pattern should be uni
form and continuous.
(6) Valve seat removal and instaliation
To remove the valve seat, thin it in place by
cutting with a rotary cutter, and break it loose
with a chisel, taking care not to nick the counter
bore in which the seat is seized by expansion
fitting.
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Standard
Repair
limit
Valve spring
free length
48.85
(1.92:i)
47.6
(1.874)
Valve spring
squareness
0.4/25, max.
(0.016/0.98), max.
As-installed
length
43
(1.693)
44
(1.732)
To insert the replacement seat, chill it first to

about _80C (-ll:fE). This low temperature can
be reached by immersing the seat in a pool of
either or alcohol and by placing dry ice in the
pooL Force the chilled seat into the counterbore,
which has been trimmed clean and smooth, and
c~lk around the seat with the calking tool (31391.
13010 for intake valve 0[3139113020 for exhaust
valve).
M-c---t--!
34.6 mm (exhaust)
42.6 mm (intake)
Checking valve spring for squareness
Rocker arm and rocker shaft inspection

(I) The valve-actuating tip of the rocker arm is subject
towearJ If the tip face is excessively worn, replace
the rocker arm.
(2) Take diameter readings on the bushings and the
rocker arm shaft, and compute the radial clearance
from these readings. If the limit is exceeded,
reduce the clearance by replacing the bushings or
rocker arm shaft.
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
1-Tool body
4-Valve guide
2-Valve seat
3-Cylinder head
5Calking ring
Installing valve seat by using calking tool

Valve spring inspection
Inspect each spring for cracks, and check it for square
ness, free length and as-installed length against these
specifications:
Bushing bore
diameter
Standard
Repair
limit
20 +0.021
-0
(0.787 ~g.00083)
Rocker shaft
diameter
20 -0.016
-0.034
(0 787 -0.00063)
.
-0.00134
Shaft clearance
in bushing
0.016 - 0.055
(0.0006 - 0.0022)
0.07
(0.0028)
53
This position is subject to wear.
Crankshaft inspection
(1) Crankshaft distortion
Support the crankshaft as shown and roll it to
measure its deflection with a dial gauge. "Distor
tion" is onehalf of the deflection (dial gauge
reading); if it exceeds ihe repair limit, reduce it by
bending the crankshaft in a press.
Rocker arm
Unit: mm (in.)
(3) Check to be sllre that the oil hole drilled out in

the rocker arm shaft is clear. When installing reo
placement bushings, be sure to align the oil holes.
Valvedearance adjusting screw inspection
Examine each adjusting screw to see if its end face for
contacting with the push rod is worn down excessively
or if its threads are showing signs of failure; if so found,
replace it by a new one.
Repair
limit
Standard
Item
Crankshaft distortion
0.05
(0.0020)
0.02 (0.0008),
maX
Push rod inspection

Check push rods for deflection, and inspect them for
wear at the end faces for contacting with the tappet and
adjusting screw. "Deflection" refers to the ,[unout
exhibited by the push rod being rotated with its ends

supported by such as "V" blocks.
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Push rod distortion
Standard
0.4 (0.016), max.
Exhaust manifold inspection

Inspect the manifold flange for cracks and distortion.
If the flange faces are warped by more than 0.2 mm
(0.0079 in.) when checked as shown, grind them smooth
and flat. If any flange is found cracked, replace the
manifold.
Checking crankshaft for distortion

(2) Journal inspection
(a) Inspect each journal for surface flaws such as
TOughing, scratches, pitting and bums, and, as
necessary, repair the journals by grinding to the
next undersize or replace the crankshaft.
(b) Mike each journal to take a total of four read
jogs to determine the wear) out-of-round and
taper (eylindricity). If any of the limits is

exceeded, repair by grinding to the next undersize or replace the crankshaft.
I.
Checking exhaust manifold flange faces for flatness
Miking crankshaft journals
54
r .-__
~O"
,@
1 2
Miking crankshaft crankpins

Positions for miking journal
Unit: mm (in.)
...
It.m
Standard
Repair
limit
Service
limit
75- 0 .030
Diarne-0.050
-0.15
-0.9
ter
(295rO.00118) (-0.0059) (-0.035)
. -0.00197
Crankshaft Out-of- om (0.0004),
0.03
jour- round max.
(0.0012)
nals
om (0.0004),
0.03
Taper
max.
(0.0012)
(c) 10umal undersizes
For the two undersize main beadngs available,
the journals are to be ground to these sizes:

Unit: mm (in.)
Journal
undersize
Journals to be ground to:
0.25 (0.0098)
7475 -0.030 (2 9429 -0.00118)

. .,-0.050'
-0.00197
0.50 (0.0197)
745- 0 .030 (29331-0.00118)

. -0.050
.
-0.00197
(3) Crankpin inspection

(a) Inspect each crankpin for surface flaws such as
roughing, scratches, pitting and burns, and, as
necessary, repair the crank pins by grinding to
the next undersize or replace the crankshaft.
Positions for miking crankpin
(b) Mike each crankpin to take a total of four

readings to determine the wear, outof-round
and taper. If any of the limits is exceeded,

repair by grinding to the next undersize or
replace the crankshaft.
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Diameter
Crankpins
Out-of-round
Taper
Standard
Repair
limit
58 -0.035
-0.055
0.20
(2283-0.00138) (0.00787)
. -0.00217
0.01 (0.0004),
max.
0.01 (0.0004),
max.
(c) Crankpin undersizes

When grinding the crank pins to the next undersize, be sure to finish each crankpin to the
tolerance prescribed for the undersize, which is
0.25mm (0.00984 in.) or 0.50mm (0.01969 in.).

55
Unit: mm (in.)
.
Crankpin
undersize
Crankpins to be ground to:
0.25 (0.0098)
5775 -0.035 (22736 -0.00138)

. -0.055'
-0.00217
0.50 (0.0197)
57 50 -0.035 (22638 -0.00138)

. -0.055'
-0.00217
.1
[NOTEl
Try to keep the center-tocenter distance between journal and crankpin within 0.05 mm
(0.00197 in.) of 47 mm (1.850 in.). When
grinding the crankpins to an undersize, be sure.
to size the corner radius (fillet) to 3 min (0.118
in.). This applies also to the fillets of journals.
3R
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Standard
0.1 -0.264
Crankshaft end
play
(0.00394 - 0.01039)
Repair
limit
0.3
(0.012)
The end play is due to the difference between the

width of thrust bearing and the dimension (A)
indicated below:
1\
@
3R
3R
Crankshaft corner radius (fillet radius)

(4) Crankshaft end play
Check the crankshaft for end play, as shown, by
using a thickness gauge at the thrust bearing. If a
play of 0.3 mm (0.0118 in.) or more is noted,
replace the thrust bearing.
Journal width for thrust bearing

(5) Oil seal inspection
Inspect each oil seal, and replace it if it is badly
worn, damaged or thermally fatigued at the lip
surface. An oil seal suspected of poor sealing
action evidenced by signs of leakage (noted upon
engine disassembly) must be inspected more
closely.
(6) Oil seal sleeve inspection
The outside surface of the oil seal sleeve is precisionmachined and chrome-plated for greater wear
resistance. Be sure to handle the sleeves carefully
and protect this surface against damage.
Even a slightest scratch mark, not to mention of a
dent or groovy wear, on this surface could result
in oil leakage, and a sleeve with such a surface flaw
must be replaced.
Checking crankshaft end play
56
(7) Replacement of rear oil seal sleeve (for crankshaft

gear)
To remove the sleeve, put a chisel to the outside
surface of the sleeve and drive it in axial direction
to stretch it. This will loosen the sleeve, making it
ready to be drawn out. When driving, be careful
not to damage the gear.
To install the replacement sleeve, oil its bore and

the crankshaft gear, using clean, frcsh engine oil;
hold the sleevc squarely and drive it into its position, keeping it trued up accurately.
clearance at each position. If the piston is worn

down so much as to exceed the limit [-0.2 mm
(-0.0079 in.)] at any ofthcse positions, replace it.
(8) Inspection of crankshaft keyway and screw threads

The forward end of the crankshaft is threaded and
has a keyway. Visually . examine the threads and
keyway and, as necessary, repair them.
Pistons and piston rings
(1) Piston inspection
Inspect each piston for any abnormal wear of its
sliding surface, for cracks at the crown and for
evidence of melting or fusion. Examine the ring
grooves for stepped wear and sloped wear. Replace
pistons found in bad condition.
(2) Piston clearance in the bore
Mike each piston at the positions listed below; and
by referring to the bore diameter, previously
determined, of its sleeve, compute the radial
Unit mm (in)
Item
Standard
Standard size
Piston
diame- 0.2S-mm
(0.0098 in.)
ter (at
skirt) oversize
O.SOmm
(0.0197 in.)
oversize
At piston
crown
'C'
Front of engine
Service
limit
93 .86 0.0 IS
(3.69S3 0.000S9)
.
94.110.0IS
(3.70SI 0.000S9)
-0.2
(-0.008)
Piston weight
94.360.0IS
(3.71S00.000S9)
0.6IS-o.680
(0.02421-0.02677)
At No.1 land
0.46S-o.S30
(0.01831-0.02087)
At No.2 land
0.4IS-o.480
(0.01634-0.01890)
Piston
clear Just below
ance oil ring
in
17 mm
bore
(0.669 in.)
below oil
ring
Miking piston
0.27S-0.340
(0.01083-0.01339)
O.l9S-o.260
(0.00768-0.01024)
37.Smm
(1.476 in.)
below oil
ring
0.ISS-0.220
(0.00610-0.00866)
At skirt
0.12S-o.190
(0.00492-0.00748)
Amount
of offset
Piston weight marking and pin hole offset

0.2
(0.008)
[NOTE]
Before reassembling the engine, make sure that
the four pistons do not differ by plus or minus
3 grams (0.1 oz) from the weight indicated on
the crown. If any of the pistons has to bc
replaced by an oversize piston, replace the
other three, too, by those of the same oversize.
(3) Piston ring gap
Be sure that each piston ring has its gap within the
serVice limit. Measure the ring gap with a thickness
gauge, holding the ring fitted in a new slecve.
57
Unit mm (in )
Item
. Repair
Standard
limit
No.1
Piston ring
c]earance
No.2
in the
groove
No.3
0.04 -0.08
(0.0016 - 0.0031)
0.2
(0.0079)
0.D25 - 0.060
(0.0010 - 0.00236)
0.15
(0.0059)
0.025 - 0.060
(0.0010 - 0.00236)
0.15
(0.0059)
(5) Pin clearance in piston

Replace the piston or piston pin if the pin clearance, as computed from diameter readings taken
on pin hole and pin, exceeds the service limit.
Checking piston ring gap

Unit:mm (in )
Item
Standard
Piston ring gap
0.3 "" 0.5

(0.0118 -0.0197)
Service
limit
1.5
(0.059)
(4) Piston ring clearance in groove

The clearance between a piston ring and its groove
is specified for each. This clearance is dependent
on the condition of the ring or the groove, or
both. If the reading taken exceeds the repair limit,
replace the ring and, if the replacement ring still
provides an excessive reading, it means that the
groove is WOfn so much as to require piston
replacement.
HI 0 3
Checking piston ring clearance
Unit mm (in)
Repair
Item
Standard
Piston pin diameter
+0
28 -0.006
+0
(1.102 -0.00024)
Pin clearance in the

piston
0-0.016
(0 - 0.0006)
limit
0.05
(0.002)
Connecting rods
. (1) Pin clearance In small end
Replace the piston pin or bushing if the pin clearance in the bushing, as computed from diameter
readings taken on pin and bushing, exceeds the
service limit.
. . '- -',
-'
:'--~~
:.
:'~:~~J::~~-;:\~:i'~~~~ii~l~~;it~%~:~{~~J
8- 8 0"(
Miking piston pin
INOTE I
To remove the bushing from and install it in
the small end, the special tool must be used.
Before installing the bushing, be sure to have
the oil holes aligned.
58
Unit: mm (in.)
Piston pin diameter
Repair
Standard
Item
limit
+0
28 -0.006
+0
(1.102 -0.00024)
28
J.D. of bushing in '.
small end
(I 102
._'.
Pin clearance in
bushing
to.Q45
+0.020
+0.00177)
+0.00079
0.Q20 ~ 0.051
(0.0008 ~ 0.0020)
0.08
(0.003)
(2) ConneCting rod alignment and big-end bearings

(3) Inspect each connecting rod for evidence of
-'.' cracking, particularly at the corner radius parts
of the "I" shank next to the big and small ends
and also at the oil hole in the small end. Can
necting rods found cracked or suspected of
cracking must be replaced.
Check each connecting rod for alignment by
fitting it to the aligner, as shown, and repair it
by cold.working with a press, as necessary. The
aligner tells whether the connecting rod is
twisted or bent beyond the limit.
J8806
Checking connecting rod fco' twist
(b) Inspect each bigend bearing for evidence of

wiping or fatigue failure, for scratches by dirt
particles imbedded in and for improper seating
on the bore. Determine whether the bearing
should be reused or replaced on the basis of
findings.
( c) Check the radial clearance between crankpin
. and bearing; if the repair limit specified below
is exceeded by the checked clearance, replace
the bearing. Where the crankpin is to be ground
to the next. undersize, use a replacement bearing of that undersize.
Unit' mm (in )
Item
Crankpin diameter
Radial clearance
between bearing
and crankpin
Checking connecting rod for bend
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Standard
Repair
Connecting rod align

ment (twist and bend)
0.05 (0.002),
0.15
(0.006)
max.
limit
Standard
Repair
limit
58 -0.035
-0.055
(2283-0.0014)
.
-0.0022
0.Q35
(0.0014
0.100
0.0039)
0.20
(0.008)
The two bearing undersizes are 0.25 mm

(0.00984 in.) and 0.50 mm (0.01969 in.).
As in the case of the main bearing, the clearance
is to be detennined from th~ crankpin diameter
(determined as described in CRANKPlN IN
SPECTION) and also the diameter readings
taken on the big-end bearing at the positions
indicated and in the manner illustrated.
59
load of 350 kg (772 lb), is prescribed. As in the

case of the main bearing shells, some "crush"
is needed for securing a proper fit, without
which the bearing might roll or jump in place,
resulting in localized overloading and consequ
ent flaking, burning or fatigue failure.
Check to be sure that the "crush" disappears

to allow the bearing cap to mate the big end
positively when the cap bolts are tightened to
8.5 kg-m (61.5 ft-lb).
350 kg
Crush: 0 ....... 0.04 mm
Measuring big-end
The big-end bearing fitted to the connecting
rod must be secured by tightening the cap bolts
8.5 0.5kg-m (61.5 3.6 ft-lb).
Big-end bearing crush
(I) Check each connecting rod for end play in the

manner illustrated, with the cap bolts tightened
to 8_5 0.5 kg-in (61.5 3.6 ftlb). Use a thick
ness gauge to measure the end play (which is the
clearance between big end and crank arm). If
the clearance measured exceeds the service limit,
replace the connecting rod or big-end bearing_
Unit: mm (in.)
Positions for miking big-end bearing

(d) Check the contact pattern of big-end bearing
on crankpin by fitting the big end in the normal
manner to the crankpin, with the crankshaft
laid out on the bench, and by using a paste of
red lead or Prussian blue to visualize the contact. Be sure fo tigJli~n the cap bolts to ihe
specified torque, that is, 8.5 kg-m (61.5 ftlb).
The contact should occur over at least 75% of
the entire surface; if not, replace the bearing.
Item
Connecting rod
end play
Standard
0.15
(0.006
0.35
0.014)
Service
limit
0.50
(0.020)
[NOTE]
The above job of checking the contact pattern
may be eliminated where the crankpin is ground
to the specified tolerance and the bearing has
been replaced. Tllis is because a replacement
bearing is precision-finished to ensure the specined extent of contact.
(e) Check each bearing shell for "crush_" Shells
found to be loose in the bore or have an exces
sive crush must be replaced. A crush of up to
0.04 mm (0_0016 in.), which will yield to a
60
Checking end play of connecting rod
)
)
Unit: mm (in.)
(NOTE 1
Before reassembling the engine, make sure thai
the four connecting rods are equal in weight
within S grams (O.lS oz) of the specification
weight.
Flywheel inspection
(1) Repair the friction surface of the flywheel if it is
found burnt, stepped, or grooved by rivet heads.
If this' surface is badly worn or damaged, the
flywheel must be replaced.
(2) Using a dial indicator, check the frictibn surface

fo( flatness and face mnout. A perfectly flat
suiface is no 'guarantee that the surface will not
"run ouC' when it rotates.
Fiatness can be checked, as shown, with the
flywheel laid on a surface plate. To take the
runout reading, secure the flywheel to the crank
shaft in the normal manner and roll the cranbhaft,
with the spindle of the dial indicator put to the
surface near its edge.
Item
Standard
Repair
limit
Flatness of friction
surface
0.15 (0.006),
max.
0.5
(0.020)
Face runout of
friction surface
0.15 (0.006),
max.
0.5
(0.020)
(3) Make sure that the flywheel securing bolts are in

good condition, with their screw threads showing
no signs of stripping. The ring gear with broken or
badly worn teeth must be replaced. Clean the
bushing for pilbt bearing; if the bushing is abnor
mally worn or showing defective contact pattern,
replace it.
Timing mechanism
Camshaft inspection
(I) Support the camshaft at No. I and No.3 journals
by "V" blocks, with the spindle of the dial gauge
put to No. 2 journal, and roll the camshaft to
measure its distortion (which is onehalf of the
deflection, that is, the dial gauge' indication).
Straighten the camshaft in a press or replace it, as
necessary.
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Camshaft distortion
Standard
Service
0.Q2 (O.OOOS),
0.05
(0.0020)
max .
limit
. -Checking flywheel for flatness
Checking camshaft deflection

(2) Mike each cam of the camshaft to read 01 (cam
height) and O. (diameier), and compute the
difference between 01 and 02. If this difference
is less than the service limit, replace the camshaft.
Checking flywheel for face runout
61
Unit' mm (in )
Item
Standard
Cam height
D,: 46.916~g:j
wear
Intake
cam
(Dl - D,)
t,
D,
Service
limit
Dl -D,
(I 847 +0.00394) = 6.184
.
-0.01181
(0.24346)
Dl - D, = 6.684
(0.26315)
Timing gear inspection

(I) Be sure that the backlash in each mesh is within
the repair limit. If the limit is exceeded, reduce
the backlash by replacing the worn gear. To
measure backlash, use a thickness gauge: put the
gauge squarely into between two gear teeth.
D, : 45.944 ~~.\
Exhaust
cam
Dl -D,
(I 8088 +0.00394) = 6.844
.
-0.01181
(0.26945)
Dl - D, = 7.344
(0.28913)
(3) Inspect the camshaft journals for abnonnal wear

and damage; the camshaft must be replaced if any
of its three journals is found in bad condition
beyond repair.
(4) Mike each journal of the camshaft in two direc
tions, one being at right angles with another, at
two places, front and rear. Measure each camshaft
hole in the crankcase. Compute the clearance
between the two; if the repair limit is exceeded,
. bore the hole up to
57H6 ~~.019
mm .
(2.24 ~.OOO7S in.) and insert a bushing to bring
it into the standard clearance range.
Unit mm (in )
Repair
Standard
Item
limit
Camshaft
journal
O.D.
Nos. I
and 2
No.3
54 -0.04
-0.06
(2 126-0.0016)
.
-0.0024
Standard
Backlash
0.Q7 -0.20
(0.0029 - 0.0079)
0.25
(0.0098)
(2) Check the radial clearance between idler bushing

and shaft by miking. Compute the clearance from
the readings taken and, if the repair limit is
exceeded, replace the bushing.
Unit mm (in )
Idler bushing J.D.

0.15
(0.0059)
Unit: mm (in )
Repair
limit
Item
Item
53 -0.04
-0.06
(2.087-0.0016)
-0.0024 .
0.04-0.09
Camshaft journalto.
hole clearance
(0.0016 -.0.0035)
Checking timing gear backlash
Repair
limit
Standard
36 +0.025
-0
(1.417 ~.00098)
Idler shaft O.D.
36 -0.025
-0.050
(I 417 -0.00098)
.
-0.00197
Bushingtoshaft
clearance
0.Q25 -0.Q75
0.1
(0.00098-0.00295) (0.0039)
(3) Check the idler end play with a thickness gauge.

Replace the thrust plate to reduce the play if the
thickness gauge reading exceeds the repair Ihni!.
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Idler end play
Miking camshaft journals
62
Standard
0-0.1
(0 - 0.004)
Repair
limit
0.35
(0.0138)
Item
Camshaft end play
Unit mm (in )
Standard
Repair
limit
0.3
0.05 ~ 0.112
(0.00197 ~ 0.00441) (0.0118)
(b) Injection pump gear

Inspect the gear teeth for damage and also the
mounting bolt holes for malcondition. Replace'
the gear if found in badly damaged condition.
(c) Crankshaft gear
Replace the gear if its teeth show signs of
defective tooth contact, or are excessively worn
. Checking idler end play
(4) If the idler shaft has to be replaced, use the idler

shaft puller to remove it, as shown: When installing
the replacement shaft, check to be sure tha{ the
oil holes are aligned.
or otherwise defective .
(d) Idler gear
Inspect the idler gear teeth and, as necessary,
replace the gear.
.
(6) Inspect the gear case for cracks, and for evidence
of oil leakage at the part ahead of the crankshaft.
A cracked case must be replaced. Inspect the crank
pulley, too, examining the condition ofthe surface
in contact with the oil seal and checking the
. keyway and key for wear. Replace the pulley if
found in defective condition.
Lubrication system
Oil level check
The oil level gauge is located at the right-hand side of
the crankcase, and carries two level' marks, upper and
lower. The oil pan contains about 7 liters (1.8 gallons)

when the oil is up to the upper mark, and about 5.5
liters (1.5 gallons) when it is up to the lower mark. The
oil pan should be kept filled to the upper mark.
Drawing out idler shaft
Oil pump inspection

(I) Running clearance between outer rotor and inner
rotor
Using a thickness gauge, check the clearance at
various positions. If the reading exceeds the service
limit, replace both rotors.
(5) Inspect the timing gears as follows:

(a) Camshaft gear
Replace the gear if its teeth show evidence of
flaking or excessive wear) or if its keyway is
galled, worn or otherwise disfigured. Make sure
that the camshaft gear as mounted on the
camshaft has no more end play than 0.4 mm
(0.0157 in.): to check the end play, use a dial
gauge. If the reading exceeds the repair limit,
replace the thrust plate. (Remember, this gear
is shrink-fitted to the camshaft.)
Checking rotor-ta-rotor clearance
63
Unit: mm (in.)
Standard
Item
Clearance between
inner rotor and
outer rotor
0.013-0.15
(0.0005 - 0.0059)
Service
Unit: mm (in.)
limit
Item
0.25
(0.0098)
Clearance between
outer rotor and
body
(2) Sliding clearance between rotors and cOver

This clearance is required to be not greater than
0.15 mm (0.00591 in.). If this limit. is exceeded,
grind off the mating face of the body to reduce
the clearance;
Unit: mm (in.)
item
Standard
Repair
limit
Clearance between
rotors and cover
0.04-0.09
(0.0016 -0.0035)
0.15
(0.0059)
Service
limit
Standard
0.2-0.28
(0.0079 - 0.011 0)
0.5
(0.0197)
(4) Rotor shaft diameter

Inspect the shaft for damage, and check it for
wear by miking. Determine the available clearance
of the shaft in the pump body from the mike
readings; if the service limit in terms of clearance
value is exceeded or if the shaft is in badly damaged condition, replacement is necessary.
Unit mm (in)
Item
Service
Standard
limit
to
to
13 -0.015
Rotor shaft
diameter
(0.512 -0.00059)
Shaft to body
clearance
0.032 - 0.074
(0.00126-0.00291)
0.15
(0.0059)
Oil fIlter inspection

The fIltering element is prescribed to be replaced after
each 600 hours of operation or whenever its fIltering
performance is noted to have deteriorated. Inspect the
element to see if it has any signs.of rupture or fissure;
and if so, replace it by a new one. Visually examine the
fIlter case for distortion and cracks.
Checking rotorto-cover clearance
(3) Radial clearance between outer rotor and pump

body
Insert a thickness gauge into between outer rotor
and body. If the clearance checked is greater than
the limit, replace the worn part.
Relief valve inspection

First, inspect the valve and valve seat for seating contact,
and check its spring for condition. Poor seating can be
corrected by lapping. A broken or fatigued spring must
be replaced.
Next, check the relief valve for relieving pressure in
reference to the specification. Increase or decrease the
spring preload, as necessary, to obtain a relieving (opening) pressure within 0.3 kg/cm' (4.27 psi) of3 kg/cm'
(42.7 psi).
Unit: kg/cm'(psi)
Checking rotortobody clearance
64
Item
Standard
Relief valve opening

pressure
3 0.3
(42.7 4.27)
Fuel system
Fuel mter inspection
Inspect the mter casc and cover for cracks, distortion
and damage and also for stripped threads at its threaded
part. Replace the case and cover if found in defective
condition.
- . ---1
Replace the connector bolts .and plug if found with

defective threads. The packings removed in disassembly
must be discarded: be sure to use new packings in
reassembly.
The filtering element is prescribed to be replaced at
intervals of 1200 hours, and the filter itself be made
free of sludges and condensation by draining at intervals
of 300 hours ..
( NOTE]
The filtering. element isc>of paper type not
meant to be cleaned by washing. Use a softhair brush and compressed air to clean it.
Fuel feed pump inspection
(1) Check valve
Inspect the seating faces of the check valve for
wear, and replace parts found in abnormally or
(3) Pump housing damage

Inspect the housing for cracks, broken screw
threads and other types of damage and repair or
replace it as necessary.
(4) Priming pump wear
Inspect the piston and cylinder for scratch marks, .
wear and rusting. Check the seating faces of its
valve for wear. An excessively worn or damaged
seating face must be corrected by replacement.
Fuel feed pump testing
The feed pump is in satisfactory condition when it
Illeets all of the test requireI)lents hereunder enumerated: .
(1) Suction performance
The pump should be capable of starting to deliver
fuel in 45 seconds of its starting at 150 rpm.
(2) Discharge pressure
Run the feed pump at 600 injectionpump rpm,
with the discharge side of the feed pump fully
closed. Under this condition, the discharge pressure should be anywhere between 1.8 kgicm'
(25.6 psi) and 2.2 kg/cm' (31.3 psi).
Unit: kg/cm' (psi)
excessively worn condition.
(2) Tappet wear

Mike the tappet and tappet hole to determine
their diametral wear. Replacement is necessary if
the amount of wear noted in comparison with the
standard diameter is 0.1 rom (0.004 in.) or more.
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Standard
Tappet diameter
Tappet hole diameter
Service
limit
.. 7(0.276)
0.1 (0.004)
7 (0.276)
0.1 (0.004)
The overall play of tappet roller pin, involving the

pin hole and roller, is prescribed to be not greater
than 0.3 mIll (0.012 in.). If this linlit is exceeded,
the whole tappet subassembly must be replaced.
Item
Standard
Feed pump discharge

pressure
1.8 - 2.2 (25.6 - 31.3)

at 600 rpm
(3) Capacity test

Run the pump at the speed specified below and
open the discharge side more or less to hold the
discharge pressure at 1.5 kg/cm' (21.3 psi) (as
read on the test gauge), with a measuring glass
cylinder set up to receive the discharged fuel.
Under this condition, the pump should deliver at
least 900 cc (54.9 cu in.)/minute.
Item
Standard
Repair limit
Feed pump
capacity
900cc (55
cu in.)/minute,
minimum at
1000 rpm
600cc (37
cu in.)/minute,
at 1000 rpm
Replace the roller if its diameter has worn down

to the service limit.
Unit mm (in )
Item
Standard
Tappet roller O.D.
+0
15 -0.027
+0
(0.591_0.00106)
Service
limit
-Om5
(-0.00295)
(4) Air-tightness
Immerse the feed pump in a pool of fuel, with its
discharge side plugged up. Apply an air pressure of
2 kg/cm' (28 psi) to its suction to see if any
bubbles come out of the pump. Some air, however,
will leak out through the clearance between its
pushrod and housing. The pump is sufficiently
air-tight if the amount of tlus leakage (with no
leakage from any other part of the pump) is not
greater than the value specified.
65
Item
reading greater than 7.02 rum (0.2764 in.), replace

the sleeve.
Standard
Not greater than 50 cc

(3 cu in.)/minute (with
Feed pump air-tightness
bubbles not larger than
2mm(0.08 in.) in size)
Air pressure,
2 kg/cm2 (28 psi)
~==~
~-------4
- - - - - - 6.J-~~
4
Width of sloti,; control sleeve
Inspect the sliding surfaces of plunger and barrel
for wear, scratch marks and. evidence of pitting
due to burning. If any defect is noted, replace the
whole pumping element (plunger and barrel).
3
- -
-.:...
........ - " - -
1Measuring cylinder
2Tappet
3Plug
4-Diesel fuel oil
Testing feed pump for air-tightness

If a greater leakage than the specified value occurs,
rework the pushrod hole with a burnishing broach
to the oversize and replace the pushrod by a new
oversize one.
Injection pump inspection
(1) Wear of pumping elements (plunger and barrel)
Mike the width of plunger flange. If this flange is
worn down to give a reading less than 6.95 rum
(0.2736 in.) [= 7 -0.05 mm (0.2756-0.0020 in.)] ,
replace the plunger.
Whether a pllinger is worn ornot can be told from

its appearance. A worn plunger has nO surface
luster. If any of the four plungers is in defective
condition to require replacement, then all four
pumping elements (plunger and barrel) should be
replaced to ensure the uniform pumping performance for the four injection nozzles. This replacement is necessary also when any of the pumping
elements rails to meet the following test requirement on the sliding clearance between plunger and
. barrel:
Fuel-tightness test on pumping element

After assembling the injection pump, install a test
pressure gauge on the delivery valve holder, and
run the pump at 200 rpm, with the control rack
held in a position for lowload engine operation.
The pressure gauge should be capable of indicating
up to 300 kg/cm' (4266 psi) or 400 kg/cm' (5688
psi)- When operated under these test condition,
the pressure gauge should register a pressure not
lower then 150 kg/cm' (2133 psi).
Unit: kg/em' (psi)
7- U
Standard
Repair
limit
Fueltightness of
plunger in barrel
150-200
(2133 -2844)
at 200 rpm
ISO (2133)
'
Width of plunger flange

Measure the width of the slot provided in the
control sleeve. If this slot is worn down to give a
66
Item
In addition to the above requirement, each pumping element has to meet the following requirement
as proof of a proper fit of the plunger in its barrel:
Into the barrel removed upon injection pump I
disassembly, insert its plunger about two-thirds of
the way, leaving a third of its length outside the
barrel, while holding the barrel horizontal; then

angle up the barrel slowly by about 60. This
should cause the plunger to slide in all the way by
its own weight to evidence a proper fit. If the
plunger goes inward in a freefalling manner or
becomes stuck on the way, then the pumping
element must be replaced.
and give thumb pressure to the bore. This should

raise the valve a little and release of thumb pressure
should allow it to settle into seatedconditlon; if
the valve remains seated without responding to the
thumb pressure, its fit in the bore is too loose.
snarr
~~
J BB 2 1
Checking delivery valve for fit
Checking pumping element for fit
(2) Delivery valve test
Each delivery valve must be tested for seating
tightness. Before testing it, inspect its piston, valve
seat and other parts for wear. If any part is excessively worn or if the seating contact is defective,
replace the valve piston and seat" as a unit.
Set up the assembled injection pump on the test
stand, with a test pressure gauge installed on the
delivery valve holder, as in the fuel-tightness test
outlined above. [The gauge should be capable of
indicating up to 300 kg/cm 2 (4266 psi) or 400
kg/cm 2 (5688 psi)]. Run the pump until the
pressure gauge reads SligllUy above 150 kg/cm 2
(2133 psi): With a stop watch in the hand, pull the
control rack to noninjection position and, at the
same time, start clocking the time required by the
fu~l pressure (ahead of the delivery valve) to fall
(due to leakage past the seated valve)
10 kg/cm2
(142 psi). If tlus duration is not less than 5 seconds, then the delivery valve is satisfactorily tight.
Item
Service limit
Seating tightness of delivery

valve in terms of duration for
a drop of 10 kg/cm 2 (142psi)
from 150 kg/cm 2 (2133 psi)
5 seconds, minimum
When the injection pump is in disassembled state,

check the fit of the delivery valve piston in the
bore by holding the valve with fingers as shown.
First, let down the valve all the way into the bore,
(3) Wear of control rack and pinions

The control rack must be replaced if it is found
distorted or bent or Its rack teeth are excessively
worn. After assembling the injection pump, check
each pinion for backlash, and replace pinions
found to exceed the service limit on backlash.
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Standard
Pinion-to-rack backlash
0.15
(0_0059)
Service
limit
0.25
(0.0098)
Using a spring scale, check the force necessary to

set the control rack in sliding motion. Repair or
replace the control rack if it offers a resistance
requiring a greater force to overcome than 150
grams (5.25 oz).
Checking sliding resistance of control rack
67
~', '.
'
Unit: gram (oz)

Item
Standard
Sliding resistance of
control rack
Not more than 150 (5.3)

as starting pull
(4) Wear of tappets and rollers

The tappet roller consists of roller, roller bushing
and pin. The overall wear of these three parts is
to be checked by measuring the radial play of the
roller with a dial gauge as iUustrated., With the
tappet subassembly held as shown, move the roller.
up and down with a rod. If a reading greater than
O.3'mm (0.0118 in.) is obtained, replace the whole
tappet subassembly.
,-,:
'CD
1Dial gauge
2Tappet
3Vise
4Rod
Checking tapper roller for wear

Mike each tappet and tappet bore to determine the
amount of radial clearance between the two.
Replacement of worn parts is necessary if the
, clearance computed from micrometer readings ex
ceeds the service limit.
Unit: mm (in.)
Radial clearance
between tappet and
tappet bore
Standard
Service
limit
0.D2~0.062
0.25
(0.0008 ~ 0.00244) (0.0098)
Check the outside diameter of each roller; if the

reading as referred to the standard O.D. reveals a
wear of 0.075 mrn (0.00295 in.) or more, replace
the whole tappet subassembly.
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Tappet roller 0.0.
Standard
0
17_ 0 .007
(0.669 -~,OOOIl)
Service
limit
-0.075
(-0.00295)
(5) Delivery.valve springs, plunger springs and seats

Springs showing evidence of cracking must be -
68
Standard
Item
limit
49 +1
-0
Plunger
spring
Free length
of spring
Service
-0.5
(-0.020)
(1.929 ~g.039)
Delivery
valve
spring
320.5
-I
(1.26 0.020) (-0.D4)
Inspect each plunger.spring seat; if the seat is

found to have a recess (due to the seating end of
the spring) of 0.1 mm (0.0039 in.) or more in
depth, replace it.
CD
Item
replaced. Measure the free length of each spring;

if the spring is found to be shorter by -0.5 mm
(-0.020 in.) (plunger spring) or by -1 mm (-0.039
in.) (deliveryvalve spring) than the smallest stand
ard length, replace it.
Unit: mm (in.)
(6) Wear of camshaft and its tappet roller bearings

Replace the camshaft if any of its cam surfaces is
badly worn, grooved or otherwise damaged or if
its keyway or threaded end portions are found
defective. Mike the major diameter (cam height)
of each cam to determine its wear in reference to
the standard size and if the amount of wear is
noted to exceed the service limit, replace the
camshaft.
Unit mm (in )
Item
Cam height
(major dia.) ,
Service
Standard
limit
32 +0.1
-0
(1.26 ~g.0039)
-0.2
(-0.0079)
Inspect the tapered roller bearings for wear. A

loose, rattling or otherwise defective bearing must
be replaced.
(7) Condition of pump housing
Inspect the housing for cracks and examine the
threaded parts for damage. If the housing is in
cracked or damaged condition or if any of its
tappet bore is found to have worn down exces
sively as a result of the check on the radial clear
ance of the tappet (in (4) above), replace the
housing.
Unit mm (in )
Item
Pump housing tappet bore
Service limit
24 - 0.15
(0.945 - 0.0059)
.(
Injection pump testing and adjustment

A diesel engine cannot give the full performance it
should be capable of even if it were in its best operable
condition, unless the injection pump and governor
serving it are equally in best condition. The following

testing and adjusting instructions are for making sure
that the pump is insuch a condition and must be carried
out with utmost care. Instructions on the governor will
be given separately in the subsequent section.
The tests and adjustments, set forth under three head
ings, presupposes the use of special servicing equipment
- the injection pump tester. It should be borne in mind
that the pump and its governor constitute an inseprable
set and must be tested and adjusted to meet the specified
criteria before installing them on the engine.
(c) Bleed air out of the injection pump, as follows:

First, move the selector lever of the pump
tester into Hjnjection" position and tum on the
motor switch to start up the motor.
Next, produce the prescribed delivery pressure
by means of the pressure adjusting valve. Loosen
the air bleeder screw on the pump to let out'
the trapped air, if any.
'
[NOTE 1
It is riot necessary to "run" the pump in order
'to bleed air out.
(\) Preparation
(a) Mount the reassembled injection pump on the
tester.
Air bleeding
The pump is now ready for these operations:
CONTROL RACK SLIDING RESISTANCE
TEST, INJECTION TIMING ADJUSTMENT,
and INJECTION QUANTITY ADJUSTMENT.
Setting up the pump on the tester
(b) Attach the rack position measure. Remove from
the governor these parts: maximum speed stop
per, stop adjusting screw, idling spring, torque
spring and adaptor spring. !,ush in the control
rack toward the governor side as far as it will
go, and set the rack position measure (9590401060) at the starting,position (zero mm).
(2) Control rack sliding resistance test

Run the pump at 1000 rpm and measure the
resistance with the hand spring balancer. The
control rack should be capable of sliding without
offering any resistance greater than 50 grams (1.8
ounces).
Checking rack sl iding resistance

Setting rack measure at O-mm position
69
(3) Injection timing adjustment

(a) Pre-stroke adjustment
"Pre-stroke refers to the upward movement of
the plunger (and hence of the tappet) and is
measured as the distance the tappet travels from
its lowest position until the feed hole (in the
barrel) becomes closed by the plunger.
Loosen the nozzle holder overflow valve; move
the selector lever of the tester to "injection~'
position; and start running the high-pressure
pump of the tester by engaging the clutch; and,
with the tappet clearance measuring device
(95904-02100) securely installed, turn the camshaft to bring No.1 plunger to bottom dead
center (lowest) position.
From this position of camshaft, rotate it gently
in normal direction to raise the tappet (and
hence the plunger). In the meantime, fuel will
be overflowing. Stop turning the camshaft just
when the fuel ceases to overflow, and read the
distance traversed by the tappet from its lowest
position.
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Standard
Plunger pre-stroke
1.95 - 2.0
(0.077 - 0.079)
If the reading is not within the standard range,

adjust the pre-stroke by repositioning the tappet
adjusting bolt vertically with the tappet wrench.
Turning this bolt by about a half rotation varies
. the pre-stroke by about 0.5 mm (0.020 in.).
After making this adjustment, be sure to have
the lock nut tightened fully.
Check and adjust the other plungers for the
prescribed pre-stroke by repeating the foregoing
procedure.
(b) Checking and adjusting the angular position of
. the beginning of injection
The end of prestroke corresponds to the beginning of injection: the plunger begins to pres
surize the fuel in the barrel when it has just
closed the feed hole.
Take the position of No. I plunger at its beginning of injection as the reference angular
position (0 deg.), and check the angular position
at which each of the rest of the plunger begins
to inject. Make sure that the beginning of
injection comes within the I deg. tolerance of
the angular value prescribed:
Item
Standard beginning of injection
Angular
spacing of
injection
timing
Measuring pre-stroke
No.1
No.2
No.3
8930'
17930' 26930'
-9030' -18030' -27030'
Increase or decrease the pre-stroke to bring the

beginning of injection, as necessary) into the
tolerance allowed. Turning the tappet adjusting
Adjusting pre-stroke
Checking interval between injections
70
No;4
bolt by about a one-fifth (1/5) rotation changes

the beginning of injection by about I degree_
(c) Tappet clearance measurement
By the term -"tappet clearance" is meant the
marginal upward stroke of the tappet from its

top dead center position, through which the
tappet can be moved, by forcing with a lever.
This clearance is prescribed to be not less thall
the value specified below, and normally should
not require any adjustment Thus, the purpose
, of this measurement just for making sure that
,some clearance greater than the specified minimum is available.
Uriit: mm (in.)
Standard "
Item
Tappet clearance
0.2 (0.0079), minimum
Use the tappet clearance measuring device

(95904-02100), as shown, and lever up the
tappet which is pushed up all the way by the
cam. If the reading happens to be less than the
minimum, increase it by means of the tappet
adjusting bolt, without causing the injection
timing (beginning of injection) to deviate from
the I-deg. tolerarice. Increasing the tappet clearance will increase the pre-stroke: be sure not to
exceed the upper limit [2.0 mm (0.0787 in.)].
Measuring tappet clearance
The injection is properly timed in the injection

pump when all fout pumping elements have
their pre-stroke and' tappet clearance uniformly
set to the specifications, with the four angular
intervals between successive beginnings of injection are equalized within the given tolerance.
(4) Injection quantity adjustment

"Injection quantity" is expressed in terms of cubic
centimeters (cc) offuel delivered by each pumping
element for many strokes of its plunger. This
quantity is measured as follows:

Close the nozzle holder overflow valve, so that the
injection nozzle will spray out the fuel delivered
by its pumping element. Have the high-pressure
pump of the tester taken out of service by disengaging its clutch. Keep the selector 'lever in "injec,
tion" position.
(NOTES
a) Keep the fuel supply pressure at 2.0 kg/cm'

(28.4 psi).
b) Be sure to use a measuring cylinder for each
pumping element.
c) To empty a measuring cylinder, in to which
fuel has been sprayed, be sure to invert the
cylinder and keep it in that position for at
least 30 seconds before using it for the
subsequent measurement;
Take three measurements on each pumping element, one measurement for each set of conditions,_
namely, pump speed, rack position and number of
strokes, and compare the measurements taken with
the specifications:
Injection quantity specifications
Pump Rack
speed position Strokes
rpm mm(in.)
Injection
quantity
cc(cu in.)
Difference
cc (cu in.)
1000
8.5
(0.335)
200
7.2-7.8
(0.44 ~ 0.48)
0.4
(0.02)
1000
8.0
(0.315)
200
6.4-7.0
(0.39 - 0.43)
0.4
(0.02)
200
6.0
(0.236)
500
5.0 - 8.0
(0.31 - 0.49)
1.0
(0.06)
If any pumping element is noted' to deliver too

much or too little fuel, adjust it to bring its
injection quantity into the range specified by
displacing the control sleeve relative to the pinion.
Loosening the pinion clamp screw allows the
sleeve to be rotated in the pinion; turning the
sleeve toward the governor side increases the
injection quantity) and vice versa.

Be sure to set the pinion and sleeve accurately so
that all four pumping elements will deliver the
same amount of fuel without exceeding the limit,
indicated above, on difference between the largest
and the smallest measurement. Be sure to tighten
the' pinion clamp screw good and hard after adjusting the contiol sleeve.
71
(2) Inspection of parts related to control lever

(a) If the control block is worn down at its end
and chrome plating is off, replace the control
block or guide lever.
(b) Measure the clearance between the holes of the

tension lever and guide lever, and supporting
lever shaft. If the limit is reached, replace them.
If any excessive -uneven wear in holes and
stepped wear on the shaft are found, replace
the supporting lever shaft and levers.
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Adjusting injection quantity
Governor inspection
Upon disassembling the governor, visually inspect the
ball bearing (which is between control block and sleeve
as a means of transmitting the push and pull between the
flywheel device and the lever mechanism) for wear and
damage. Examine the balls and the raceways carefully
and, if any abnormal or ~xcessive wear is noted, replace
the bearing. Make sure that this bearing is in perfectly
good condition: any rattle or abnormal noise is not
permitted.
There are a total of five items to be checked and
serviced in the governor during the process of reassem~
bly. A repair limit is specified for each and, if the limit
is reached, then the part or parts responsible must be
repaired or replaced to bring the item (dimension) into
the standard dimensional range.
(1) Flyweight inspection
(a) Measure the clearance between the flyweight
roller and roller pin. If the limit is reached,
replace the flyweight assembly.
Unit: mm (in.)
Nominal
diameter
Flyweight roller
and roller pin
clearance
8
(0.315)
Item
Standard
Service
limit
0.Q25 ~ 0.062
0.10
(0.00098 ~
(0.00394)
0.00244)
(b) Check the contact surfaces of the flyweight

roller and governor sleeve. If any excessive wear
or damage is found, replace the flyweight
assembly.
Unit mm (in )
Nominal
Service
Item
Standard
..-, -.-'
-,-,,-
limit
diameter
Flyweight
roller O.D.
72
16
(0.63)
0
-0.11
0
<-0.0043)
-0.25
(-0.0098)
Tension lever
and guide lever
holes, and sup
porting lever
shaft clearance
Nominal
diameter
8
(0.315)
Standard
Service
limit
0.013 ~0.05
(0.0005 ~
0.0020)
0.10
(0.00394)
Cc) Measure the clearance between the schackle pin

and control rack hole. If the limit is reached,
replace the schackle or control rack.
Unit: mm (in )
Item
Nominal
diameter
Standard
Schackle pin
and control
rack hole
clearance
5
(0.197)
0.Q15 ~ 0.0056
(0.0006 ~
0.00022)
Service
limit
0.08
(0.0031)
(3) Swiveling lever inspection

Measure the clearance between the swiveling lever
shaft and bushing. If the limit is reached, replace
the bushing. When replacing the bushing, replace
"a" ring and oil seal, too.
Unit mm (in)
Item
Swiveling lever
shaft and
bushing clear
ance
Nominal
diameter
II
(0.433)
Standard
0.016 ~ 0.07
(0.0006 ~
0.0028)
SerVice
limit
0.15
(0.0059)
(4) Torque control lever inspection

Measure the clearance between the torque control
lever bushing and supporting pin. If the limit is
reached, replace the lever.
Unit mm (in)
Item
Nominal
diameter
Torque control lever

bushing and
supporting pin
clearance
8
(0.315)
Standard
Service
limit
0.026 - 0.056
0.10
(0.00102(0.00394)
0.00220)
(5) Spring inspection

When the governor is adjusted, check various
'springs and determineif they are defective or not.
Expecially at disassembly, check them for bent,
damage, fatigue and IVsting. Check the control'
spring at its hook part, too. Replace springs found
in abnormal condition.'
Governor testing and adjustment
As to the meanings of various technical terms used in the
following instructions regarding governor performance
and adjustments, reference must be had to the governor
characteristic curves, below, and to the table of standard
adjustment data, carried at the end of this part.
The procedures which follow assume that the injeCtion
pump has been properly set for injection timing and
injection quantity as outlined in the preceding part, and
that the injection pump unit (complete with its governor
less the adaptor spring and idling spring) is set on the
pump tester.
(1) Govcrnor adjustments
After servicing the governor, securing the prescribed clearances in the various running parts,
make four adjustments; adaptor adjustment, maximum-speed control adjustment, low-speed control
adjustment and torque spring adjustment. Each
adjustment will be explained in reference to the
characteristic curves.
(b) Maximum-speed adjustment

I. Setting the full-load stopper
Run the injection pump at the speed corresponding to "Nc," which is indicated in the
characteristic curve diagram. Turn the adjusting
lever in the direction for raising the speed; this
tensions the control spring, making the control
rack move inward. Stop moving the adjusting
lever vihen the rack comes to the position
corresponding to "Rc" [; 8,8 0.1 mm (0.346
,O.004 in.)], and secure the adjusting lever'
there tenstatively. Rack position "Rc" is for
maximum injection quantity. Bring the full-load
stopper into contact ,vith the tension lever
under this condition.
Adaptor spring yielding to the push
a~b
Ra
C
f----.<
Iv
m""
~
,\H-
0.
0.
"
c~ _
~
0._
u 0.
~diu"ing
lever
in idling position
"0 .~
~ k;
h\\
a~
E ~
1\ ~
'xro
~
,2
~
;,;!::
\
\
Ng
,..
Na
Nb
Pump speed (rpm)
Nc
Nd
Ne
-)00-
Governor characteristic curves
(a) Preparation'
Install the angular".c.le plate (protractor) on
the governor housing to read the angular position of the adjusting lever. (vertical; 40)
Setting full-load stopper

2. Setting the maximum-speed stopper
Slowly raise the speed from "Nc to see when
the control rack begins to come out (in the
direction for decreasing injection quantity). The
speed at which this should occur is prescribed
H
Protractor on governor housing
73
to be 1200 rpm (= Nd); This requirement can

be met by unlocking the adjusting lever (which
was secured in the preceding step), by turning
the lever, and by slowly raising the speed. Upon
locating that position of adjusting lever at
which the control rack begins to come out at
1200 rpm of rising speed, bring the maximum
speed stopper into contact with the lever,
thereby setting the maximum.speed position of
adjusting lever. The lever angle for this position
is prescribed to be 47 S.
, I
Drive in the adjusting screw as far as it will go

in, and then back it away by four (4) rotations.
Four notches of this screw. correspond to one
(I) rotation.
Backing away the screw increases the regulation
(making the curve "d" ,....,. He" less sharp). Never

back it away by more than 24 notches (6 rota
tions) or the threaded engagement of the Screw
will be so smalI as to invite a hazardous condi
tion.
3. Speed regulation adjustment

What "speed regulation" signifies was explained
previously: it refers to the difference between
two governed speeds: noload speed and full
load speed for a given position of the adjusting
lever, It is expressed as a percentage of fulIload
speed:
Speed regulation
= noload speed - fulIload speed
x 100(%)
fullload speed
Generally speaking, the smaller the speed regu

lation, the better is the engine control;. but
some regulation is necessary for the sake of
running stability and the smallest regulation for
the type of aIIspeed governor as the present
one is limited by the governor mechanism.
Moreover) -each engine runs best when the
governor is set to provide the regulation speci
fied for the engine.
For the maximum speed position of adjusting
lever, speed regulation is represented by that
portion of the characteristic curve from point
"d" to point "e" for the differential speed from

liNd" to "Ne."
In the present governor, the regulationcan' be .
changed by means of the adjusting screw pro
vided in the swivel lever. Tightening this screw
increases the tension of control spring to
reduces the value of regulation, and vice versa.

With a small regulation, the curve "d"""'" "e'" is
sharper. and, if it should be too sharp, the
governor would become too sensitive.
It is important to note that the speed regulation
of an engine unit (complete with its injection
pump and governor) is determined not solely
by the governor setting but by the character
istics of the engine (Which were explained
earlier in the discussion of the torque spring).
For the present engine, a proper regulation will
obtain when the adjUsting screw (on the swivel
lever) is set as folIows:
74
. Setting adjusting screw

4. Readjustment of maximum.speed stopper set
. ting
Changing the speed regulation by tightening or.
loosening the adjusting screw is, in substance,
changing the tension of the control spring. For
this re~son, after each repositioning of the
adjusting screw, the position of maximumspeed
stopper for determining "Nd" (the speed at
which the governor begins to perform its high
speed control action) must be changed to raise
or lower "Nd u to a proper level by repeating
the process described above.
(NOTE 1
In the table of standard adjustmeni data, the
angular position of the adjusting lever assumes
that 40 is vertical.
(c) Adaptor adjustment
1. Move the adjusting lever to make it bear against
the maximumspeed stopper, and install the
adaptor in its normal position in the tension
lever.
2. Run the pump at "Na" (= 900 rpm). This
should move the control rack inward to the
9.2 0.1 mm (0.362 0.004 in.) position
(= Ra); if not, change the thickness of shim
plate (3) indicated in this illustration
3. Raise the pump speed from "Nan to "Nb." Tills
should pull the control rack out to the position

"Rc" [~ 8.8 0.1 mm (0.346 0.004 in.));
if not, tighten or loosen adaptor screw (4).
INOTE]
The rack movement from liRa" to "Re') corre
sponds to the amount of compression of adap
tor spring (5), which is referred to as "adaptor
stroke." Tightening (or driving inward) adjusting
screw (4) elongates this spring to increase the
stroke, and vice versa.
Setting idling spring for low-speed control

4. After completing the foregoing adjustments,
stop running the pump and turn the adjusting
lever in the stopping direction until the control
rack comes to I mm (0.0394 in.) position. Set
the stop adjusting screw to limit the stopping
end of adjusting lever stroke, and secure the
screw by tightening its lock nut.
1-Tension lever
2-Lock nut
3-Shim plate
4-Adaptor screw
5Adaptor spring
Adaptor adjustment
(d) Low-speed control adjustment
This adjustment is related to the lowspeed
control curve in the diagram given above, and
is effected as follows:
(~ 275
adjusting lever bearing against
speed stopper; turn back the
until the control rack comes to
0.1 mm (0.217 0.004 in.));
adjusting lever there.
I. Run the pump at "Ni"
rpm), with the

the maximumadjusting lever
"Rh" [~ 5.5
and secure the
(3) Matching the pump to the engine

After adjusting the governor according to the
procedures set forth in (2) above, check the
injection quantity by running the injection pump
as outlined in (4) INJECTION QUANTITY
ADJUSTMENT, INJECTION PUMP TESTING
AND ADJUSTMENT. Use a 500cc (30.5cu in.)
measuring cylinder to receive and collect the fuel
delivered by the four pumping elements, with the
adjusting lever set at 47 5. For this test, take
two readings, one by running the pump at 900 rpm
and the other at 1200 rpm. If the readings differ
from the values indicated in the table of standard
adjustment data, adjust the pumping elements.
2. Install the idling spring. Drive in the adjusting

screw of this screw, as shown, until the control
rack moves in and comes to "Ri." Be careful
not to set tlus adjusting screw too far inward
or the no-load maximum speed will rise too
high in operation.
3. Lower the speed to "Ng" (~ 200 rpm); this
should cause the control rack to move in and
comes to "Rg" [~ 11.0 mm (0.433 in.) minimum) owing to the action of the idling spring.
M~asuring
injection quantity
75
Table of standard adjustment data

(
APPLICABLE TO: Injection pump, 0900009721

(ND.PES4A65B320RND972)
(2) Lowspeed control

Lever angle
Governor, 090800 4030

(ND.EP/RSV250.1750A2/302ND403)
1. Injection timing adjustment
(1) Direction of rotation: Clockwise as viewed from

drive side
(2) Injection order: I - 3 - 4 - 2
Highspeed control
lever angle MINUS
26 3
(3) Interval between successive injections: 90 30'

(4) Pre:stroke: 1.95 0.05 mm (0.077 0.0020 in.)
(5) Tappet clearance: 0.2 mm (0.0079 in.) minimum
2. injection quantity adjustment
The listed values arc based on these conditions:
I) injection nozzles, 093400.0090,2) nozzle opening
(injecting) pressure, 120 kg/cm' (1706 psi), 3) fuel
supply ptessure, 2.0 kg/cm' (28.4 psi), and 4) high
pressure tester pump, 1.6 nun (0.0630 in.) dia. x 6
mm (0.2362 in.) dia. x 600 mm (23.622 in.).
Pump Rack
Pumping
speed position
strokes
rpm mm (in.)
8.5
1000
(0.335)
8.0
1000
(0.315)
6.0
200
(0.236)
Individual
injection
cc (cu in.)
7.2~7.8
200
(0.44~0.48)
6.4~7.0
200
500
cc (cu in.)
0.4
(0.02)
(0.390~0.43)
5.0-8.0
(0.30-0.49)
1.0
(0.06)
(1) Highspeed control
47 5
76
275
5.5 0.1
(0.2165 0.0039)
330
5.0 0.1
(0.1969 0.0039)
with subspring
200
>
=
11.0 (0.4331)
(3) Control by adaptor action

Lever angle
Speed
rpm
Rack position
mm (in.)
400
lOA 0.1
(0.4094 0.0039)
650
8.8 0.1
(0.3465 0.0039)
51 0 50
difference
0.4
(0.02)
Speed
rpm
Rack position
mm (in.)
NOTE: Figures in box I=::::J are for initial lever

setting.
Permissible
3. Governor adjustment
The listed values are based on these conditions:
I) governed speed range, 275 - 1200. rpm, and
2) Swivel:lever adjusting screw setting, backed away
about four (4) rotations from the fully tightened
position.
Lever angle
Speed
rpm
Rack position
mm (in.)
1100
8.2 0.1
(0.3228 0.0039)
1230
7.0 0.1
(0.2756 0.0039)
1290
;::; 4.0 (0.1575)
(4) Match between injection pump and engine

Lever
angle
Pump
speed
rpm
Total injection qt.

cc (cu in.)/500
strokes, 4 cyl.
Remarks
600
81 2
(3.1890 0.0787)
With adaptor
spring
1200
62 2
(2.4409 0.0787)
With torque
spring
51 50
Injection nozzle semces

(1) Needle valve and nozzle body
(a) Immerse needle valve and nozzle body in a pool
of clean kerosene, insert the valve into the
body, and move the valve back and forth to be
sure that the sliding contact is smooth without
evidencing any excessive clearance. The injec
tion nozzle as a whole must be replaced if the
fit is found defective.
(b) Visually examine the nozzle body with a magnifying glass having a power of 4 or 5.
Item
(c) Inspect the needle valve for distortion or damage at its seating part and for wear of its end
face in contact with ihepressure pin.
Injection pressure
(d) Poor seating contact may be corrected, if the

defective condition is not advanced too far, by
lapping the valve agamstthe seat with a coat of
clean lube oil applied to the seating faces. If
this does not help, the injection nozzle must be
replaced.
(b) Move the lever up and down slowly, completing

each up-and-down cycle in about a second, to
pressurize the injection nozzle, while observing
the indication of the test pressure gauge. As the
nozzle begins to spray, the indicating pointer of
the gauge being deflected will start perceptively
oscillating: read the pressure right then as the
injection pressure.
Unit: kg/cm' (psi)
(2) Nozzle holder and distance piece

Check the fit between nozzle holder and distance
piece and between distance piece and nozzle
holder. Detennine the quality of the fit from
contact patterns obtained With the use of red lead
paste: defective fit will be evidenced by an abnormally high rate of return oil (lead-off) flow.
Standard
Repair
limit
120 5
110 (1564.2),
(1706.4 71.1) minimum
(c) If the reading taken is helow the limit, increase

the thickness of the shim used on the pressure
sprinr. IncreaSing the shim thickness by 0.1 mm
W.0039 in.) raises the injection pressure by .
about 10 kg/cm' (142 psi). Adjusting shim
stock for this purpose is available in 20 sizes,
from 1.0mm (0.0394 in.) up to 1.95 mm
(0.0768 in.) in increments of 0.05 mm (0.0020
in.) each.
(3) Pressure spring and pressure pin

(a) Replace any pressure spring broken, cracked or
otherwise defective, or out of square. Inspect
each spring for these defects.
(b) Inspect each pressure pin for wear at its end
faces, one for pressure spring and the other for
needle valve.
(4) Leak-off pipe packing
If the packing is found in deteriorated condition,
replace it.
Injection nozzle testing and adjustment
(1) Injection pressure
The pressure at which -the needle valve unseats.
itself against the force of the pressure spring is
referred to as "valve opening pressure" or "beginning-of-injection pressure," but will be called here
"injection- pressure" for short. The value of this
pressure is specified; it is checked and adjusted as
follows:
(a) Install the injection nozzle in the nozzle tester,
and operate the manual pumping handle of the
tester several strokes to prime the nozzle.
Checking injection pressure on nozzle tester
(2) Spray pattern

The injection nozzles used in the present engine
are of throttle type. Some throttling action takes
place when the needle valve begins to unseat,
thereby limiting the amount of fuel being sprayed
out during the initial stage of each fuel injection_
Thus, each slug of fuel sprayed out may be
regarded as consisting of two parts: initial throttled
spray and tenninating main spray.
When tested on the nozzle tester, the injection

nozzle can be made to produce these two kinds of
spray for visual inspection. Initial throttled spray
comes about when the tester lever is operated at
a rate of 60 cycles per minute (up and down in
77
--.. '
one second); terminating main spray occurs when

the lever is operated rapidly at a rate of, say, 4 to
6 cycles per s~cond.
1
llilJ
I1llI
IWI
1~
"Y".';':
IDIJ
Ij\
II
'1\
lGood
2-Spray cone too large
4After-dribble
5-Fissured spray
3Qff-center sp-ray
6Whirling spray
1\,
Possible patterns of spray

(a) Initial throttled spray
When the nozzle" is producing only this spray,
atomization is generally poor and the pattern is
rather straight than conical, there being more
or less after-dribble, that is, fuel dribbling after
injection. All these are due to the fact that the
fuel being injected is being throttled by the
pintle protruding from the valve.
While the nozzle is making this spray, see if the
needle valve chatters in synchronism with the
cyclic motion of the lever; if so, then the needle
valve is free from any sticking or hitching
tendency and, if not, the nozzle and needle
valve must be cleaned by washing and re-tested.
Offcenter spray or directionally erratic spray,
if noted, should be taken to mean that the
injection nozzle needs thorough cleaning.
(b) Terminating main spray
With the" iester lever operated at a rate of 4 to
6 cycles per second, the initial throttle spray is
hardly visible. The spray under this condition
may be regarded as main spray.
tester, raise the pressure slowly to 100 or 110

kg/cm' (1422 or 1564 psi) (without exceeding the
set pressure of 120 kg/cm' (1706 psi), so that the
needle valve will not unseat). Hold the pressure
and observe the nozzle tip: there should be no
evidence of fuel oozing out to form a dribble. If
such evidence is noted, then the contacting faces
of the needle valve and seat must be repaired by
lapping in the manner already suggested or the
injection nozzle as a whole must be replaced.
Cooling system
Flushing service
Even drinking water contains one or more substances in
extremely small quantities as impurities. In the engine in
use, the cooling water deteriorates gradually: the concentrations of impurities increase progressively to form
sludges, scales or rust on wet walls inside the engine
jackets and in the radiator core to interfere with smooth
heat conduction.
Overheating tendency of the engine is often due to its
cooling water circuits fouled with scale, sludge orrus!
formation. For this reason, it is necessary to periodically
change the cooling water and, at the same time, flush
the cooling system clean. For the cooling water, besure
to use a soft water (drinking water is usually soft).
Water pump services
(1) Check to see if the bearing rattles or develops
hitches when the pump shaft is spun by hand; if it
does, replacement is necessary.
(2) Inspect the pump impeller for pitting, erosion and

breakage; replace the impeller if it is found in bad
condition. An impeller found with its front or rear
edges showing evidence of rubbing against pump
case or rear cover means that the impeller together
with the bearing need replacement.
CD
The main spray should be a good straight cone,

0
about 0 in angle, consisting of finely atomized
fuel particles without any large droplets, and
should terminate with no dribble at the tip, not
to mention of any fuel dripping.
(3) Seating tightness
An injection nozzle tested and adjusted as above,
and found to produce a good spray pattern may
be re-used in the engine provided that it passes
this final test - seating tightness test.
With the injection nozzle mounted on the nozzle
78
l-Floating seat (carbon)
1.5mm
(0.059 in.)
2-Seal ring (ceramic)
Unit seal
(3) The unit seal must be' replaced as a whole if water.

leakage from it has been complained by the user.
Referring. to the sectional view of the unit seal,
examine floating seat (carbon) (I) and seal ring
(ceramic) (2) particularly carefully for wear. If the
wear is found excessive, replace the unit seal.
Item
Freestate height
of unit seal
Floating seat height
Unit:mm (in.)
Wear
Standard
limit
21.8 I
(0.858 0.D4)
1.5 (0.059)
(4) Check the fit of pump shaft in the bearing inner

race for tightness. If the fit is loose or if the mating
faces are badly damaged; replace shaft or bearing
or both.
Unit: m'm (in.)
Item
(5) Inspect the bore provided in the viater pump case

for receiving the bearing outer races to see if the
bore is damaged; if so, replace the case or the
whole pump assembly. Be sure that the bore
admits the bearing. races with a tight fit.
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Standard
0.01lL~0.025T
Fit of bearing outer

races in pump case
bore
(0.0004L~
(2) Inspect the fan blades for distortion and cracks

and replac~ the fan as necessary.
J<;lectrical equipment
Starter services
(1) Inspection before disassembly
(a) Checking the starting circuit for operation
With the starter in place, cheCK to be sure that 1. The battery is in good condition, with its cell
plates showing no evidence of "sulfation" or
any other fauliy condition, and is in fully
charged state.
2. The battery terminal connections are clean and
tight.
Standard
O.OOIT ~ 0.017T
Fit of pump shaft in (0.00004T ~ 0.OO067T)(front)
bearing inner race
O.OOIT ~ 0.017T
.
(0.00004T ~ 0.00067T) (rear)
Inspection of fan belt and fan

(I) Inspect the belt for signs of deteri'oration such as
cracks, and check it for permanent stretch. An
excessively stretched or cracked belt must be
replaced.
O.OOIOT)
(front)
O.OIlL ~ 0.02ST .
(rear)
O.OOIOT)
(O.0004L~
(6) Inspect the threaded portion of the impeller for

damage.
3. The starter terminal connections are tight.

4. The wires are securely connected to terminals,
and are free of any insulation stripping due to
fraying, there being no signs of grounding or
breaking.
5. The starter switch closes and opens the circuit
positively at each position.
Do not jump into a conclusion that the starter
. is in trouble when the engine refuses to fire up
upon cranking: the engine could be in trouble.
(b) No-load test
If the starter is suspected of trouble, take it
down from the engine and run a no-load test
on it to find out if it is really in trouble.
When removing the starter, be sure to have the
battery switch turned off.
Switch
Thermostat inspection
Test the removed thermostat to see if it starts opening
o
at 76.S C 2C (169 fp 3.6p) of rising temperature
and becomes fully open at 90C2C(194P 3.6p).
If the difference between these temperature levels is too
large, replace the thermostat.
The test is carried out by immersing the thermostat in
water contained in an appropriately sized pan and by
heating the water with such as an electric stove. Check
the rising temperature with a thennorneter.
Battery I
I
-e
No-load test circuit
Here's how to carry out the no-load test: Form

a test circuit with a voltmeter and an ammeter,
as shown, using a fully charged 24-volt battery;

close the switch to run the starter until its
79
speed rises to and above 4500 rpm; and then

read the voltmeter and ammeter when the
starter is spinning. The ammeter should show
that the starter is drawing not more than 50
amperes, with the voltmeter indicating at least
23 volts (at the speed of at least 4500 rpm);
if not, estimate the cause of the trouble by
consulting the troubleshooting guide, wWch
follows:
Starter troubleshooting guide

.Symptom
Possible cause
1. Bearings are dirty, or need
lubrication.
Large current
and low speed
2. Rotor (armature core) is

rubbing the pole pieces.
Testing armature coils and commutator for
ground and open
3. Grounded coil in the armature

or in the field.
4. Short-circuit in the armature
coils.
I. Magnetic switch is grounded
and is not working.
Large current
butno speed
2. Grounded coil in the armature

or in the field.
3. Seized bearing.
'\
I. Open-circuited coil in the

armature or in the field.
No current and
no speed
2. Broken brush pigtail.

3. No conduction between brushes
and commutator because of
"high mica" condition or dirty
co.mrnutator surface.
Small current
and low speed
Loose coil connection in the field.
Very large current and very

Wgh speed
Short-circuited field coil.
The best way of testing the starter is to run it

under loaded condition, but that requires special
testing equipment. For ordinary servicing purposes, the noload test and troubleshooting
guide will do.
(2) Inspection after disaSsembly
(a) Check the armature coils and commutator for
ground, open and short. A circuit tester will
serve the purpose of checking the coils and
commutator for ground and open. To check for
short, however, the "growler" must be used.
80
Testing armature for short with growler
(b) Inspect the commutator surface for burning

and "high mica" condition. Surface burns can
be removed by turning the commutator in a
lathe provided that there is enough stock.to be
removed by macWning without exceeding the
limit diameter [43.2 mm (1.701 in.)]. "High
mica" must be corrected by undercutting the
mica between commutator segments. Inspect
the risers and, if their solder is found melted,
repair them by re-soldering.
Check the commutator for radial runout and,
as necessary, repair it by turning in a lathe.
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Commutator
mnout
Standard
Repair
limit
Limit
dia.
0,03
(0.00118)
0.1
(0.0039)
43.2
(1.701)
(3) Testing the reassembled starter

Upon reassembling the starter, conduct a noload
test in the manner already outlined, and check the
magnetic switch and its lever mechanism for pinion
shifting action.
To check to see if the pinion plunges forward and
recedes properly, open and close the switch (in the
test circuit arranged as shown below) repeatedly.
The pinion should move back and forth smoothly
through its full stroke, without any hitches. If any
faulty movement is noted of the pinion, disassem.
ble the shift mechanism and repair It.
Checking commutator for runout
Switch KI
(c) One end of the shunt field coil is soldered to

the yoke. Undo this ,soldered connection, and
check the positive (+}brush holder for.ground
by putting one testing prod of a circuit tester
(with its selector knob set in the ohmic zone)
to the "M" terminal of the starter and the other
prod to the field coil: the tester should indicate
"continuity." Shift the latter prod to the yoke:
the tester should indicate "infinity." This check
is for finding whether or not the positive
brush holder is satisfactorily insulated. If the
insulation is found defective, repair or replace
the holder.
(d) Check the brushes for wear. The brush worn
down to 13 mm (0.512 in.) in length must be
replaced.
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Service
limit
Standard
Brush length
19 (0.748)
13 (0.512)
e
'------i
Battery
ED
1- -I ~_----l
Testing circuit for checking pinion shifting action
Having made sure that the pinion moves satisfacto

rily, Close the switch (Kl) to advance the pinion
all the way out and hold the switch closed. Under
this condition, move back the pinion by giving a
light push to it with a fingertip to take up its play,
and measure the clearance between pinion and
stopper. This clearance should be between 0.5 and
2 mm (0.0197 and 0.0787 in.); if not, increase or
decrease the number of washers used in the mag
netic switch mounting.
Unit mm (in )
(e) Replace the rotor if the armature shaft is worn

down at any of the three places indicated
below; and also replace the bearing if it is so
worn that the radial clearance exceeds the
upper limit of the range indicated:
Shaft clearance
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Nominal
diameter
Standard
Repair
limit
Commutator
side
14.2
0.034~O.l04
0.2
(0.559) (0.00134 ~0.00409) (0.0079)
Pinion side
12.2
(0.480)
Center
bracket side
20.3
0.D20 ~ 0.353
(0.799) (0.00079 ~0.00139)
0.034~O.l04
(0.00134~0.00409)
0.2
(0.0079)
Item
Clearance between
pinion and stopper
Standard
0.5-2
(0.0197 - 0.0787)
After mounting the starter in place, test it by

cranking the engine a second or so about.I0 times
just to make sure that the pinion meshes with the
ring gear properly.
Generating system services
(1) Cause of poor charging operation
If the user complains that the battery tends to
become overcharged or discharged, check the ran
belt for tension and, if the belt is in proper
tension, check the wiring connections for tightness.
Be sure that there is no open in the charging
circuit.
81
After these two checks, check for each of the four

possible causes listed in this guide:
I. Voltage regulator is set to
maintain too high a voltage.
A. The battery tends
to become overcharged.
2. Voltage coil VCr is open

circuited.
3. Resistor Ra is opencir
cuited.
4. The battery is internally
shortcircuited.
I. Voltage regulator is set to
maintain too Iowa voltage.
B. The battery tends

to become dis
charged.
2. Point Pr or P2 Is not can

tacting firmly.
3. The alternator is producing
not enough power.
4. Too much current is being
drawn by one or more
electrical loads.
If the cause happens to be I "The alternator is

producing not enough power," B, then the alter
nator and its diode rectifier must be tested to
ascertain what is preventing the alternator unit
from producing enough power.
(2) Alternator tests
(a) Output test
Set up the alternator unit on the test bench and
couple the alternator shaft to the variablespeed
drive source (motor) of the bench. Make electri
cal connections to fonn a test circuit arranged
as shown:
under this condition, the alternator field draws

excitation current from the alternator itself
(from the DC output terminal of its rectifier)
whose output voltage is now high enough to
buck the current from the battery.
Raise the speed further until the voltmeter
reads 28 volts, and check the speed right then.
This speed is the one at which the alternator
unit develops the rated voltage, and should be
about 1100 rpm.
Next, close switch K2, with the variable load
resistor set for maximum resistance (so that no
load current will flow). Reduce the load resis
tance gradually while increasing the speed of
drive equally gradually, and read the ammeter
at respective levels of rising speed. Compare
these readings (output current and speed) with
the performance speCifications to determine'
whether or not the alternator unit is capable of
the specified output performance.
&1
CAUTION]
Be sure to increase the speed and reduce the

resistance, both gradually, to avoid rupturing
the rectifier diodes and breaking the selfexcit
ing condition of the alternator unit.
(b) Checking the rectifier diodes for open and short
The six diodes of the rectifier are connected, as
shown here to pass the current only in the
direction (forward) of arrows:
~-.----.---=-<' A }-=-~-'--r----,
Switch Kl
Switch
K2
a:
Battery I
I
Alternator output test circuit
With switch Kr closed (to energize the alter

nator field from the battery), drive the alter
nator by turning on the drive motor) increasing
the speed of drive gradually, and observe the
indications of the voltmeter and ammeter. Stop
increasing the speed when the ammeter indica
tion reaches its zero mark, and open switch Kl :
82
At+1
N
_ E (-)
;
Ground circuit --' .... __ ____ :::r
Electrical load
Schematic rectifier connection
It is obvious from the above schematic diagram

that, by biasing each group of three diodes in
reverse direction, the shorted (ruptured) can
dition of one or more diodes can be told:
current will flow if any diode is ruptured. If, on
the other hand, no current flows when the
three arc biased in forward direction, it means
that all three diodes are opencircuited.
A lamp (2 to 10 watts, 24 volts) and a 24-volt
battery with two lead wires will serve the purpose.
sound condition if a resistance reading of
Lamp (with the same amount of

voltage as the battery)
approximately 27 oluns [at 20C (68F)] is

obtained_ A lower reading than this calls for
rotor replacement.
F.
Alternator coupler
Battery
Diode checking arrangement with a lamp

Alternatively, a circuit tester may be ~sed. In
this case, bear in mind that the {+) terminal of

the tester is connected to the (-) side of its
built-in battery and the (-) terminal to the
(+) side_
Tester
Alternator coupler.
F
4-
:.;
~
I
{j)
-e
Checking diodes with a circuit tester
If the foregoing check reveals that the rectifier
Checking field coils for layer-short

Cd) Checking the armature windings for open and
ground
Using the circuit tester, check for continuity
from and through the neutral poin t (N) to the

end of each winding and also between the
windings and the core_ An armature found
open-circuited or grounded must be replaced_
is in unsatisfactory condition, then check each
individual diode for open and short, and also

check to be sure that the diodes are not
grounded_
Checking armature windings for open and short
Ce) Each brush may be left in service until it wears

down to the limit line marked on it. Be sure to
use genuine replacement brushes.
Checking diodes for ground

Diodes fouJ)d short-circuited, open-circuited or
ground-circuited by the foregoing methods must

be replaced_
Wear limit line
(c) Checking the field coils for short through layers

Check the ohmic resistance of field circuit by
using the circuit tester) with its testing prods
put to the two slip rings_ The field coils are in
Wear limit mark on brush

83
(3) Regulator tesls and services

. With the altemaior unit mounted on the lest.
bench and coupled to the variablespeed drive
source (motor), connect the regulator unit, as
shown below, with two ammeter A, and A2 and

a voltmeter. Be sure to use a fully charged 24Y
battery. Before starting the lest operation, check
to be sure that Ihe resistance inside Ihe regulator
unit between terminal IG and terminal F is any
where between about 35 and 41 ohms. This ohmic
value is important: . this much resistance means
that resistor R. is in sound condition and that the
point faces of contact p, are smooth and closing
positively to pass field current properli.
.------i.E
Regulator
Ammeter
Switch KI
A~----~~
Voltmeter
Regulator test circuit

(a) Checking for regulated voltage
Close switches K, and K2 and start driving the
alternator. Just when ammeter A, indicates zero
to signify that the alternator is nOw in self
exciting condition, open switch K2. Raise the
speed to 3000 rpm and read the voltmeter. The
regulator is properly set and working satisfacto
rily if this reading is between 28.0 and 31.0
volts.
(b) If the indication of ammeter A2 remains zero,
it means I) contact Pi is not working properly,
or 2) voltage coil YC2 is opencircuited.
(c) If the voltage read on the voltmeter is outside
the range stated above, despite ammeter A,
showing some field current being supplied to
the field, then it means I) voltage coil YC, is
opencircuited, 2) resistor R3 is open-circuited,
or 3) contact p, is stuck closed with its point

faces fused together.
Bench tests
An overhauled engine should be operated on the test
bench in order to correctly break it in, to adjust the
engine and injection pump and governor for best engine
performance, and to quantitatively determine the output

power the overhauled engine is capable of.
84
The test bench is an apparatus complete with a dynamo .

meter. In the following procedures, a standardtype test
bench is assumed.
(1) Breaking in
Have the engine set up on the bench, and aligned
to the dynamometer. Operate the engine for a
total of2 hours according to the schedule indicated
below. During this operation, observe the running
condition carefully and, if any malcondition is
noted to be developing, shut down the engine and
take steps to correct it.
Breakingin schedule
Order
Engine speed
(rpm)
1000
30
1500
7.5
30
2000
15
60
2500
20
60
Load
Duration
(PS)
(minutes)
Run the engine with (a) lube oil pressure held

between 3 and 4 kg/cm' (42.7 and 56.9 psi), (b)
cooling water temperature held between 75 and
85C (167 and 185F), (c) lubeoU temperature,
as measured in the oil pan complete with a vacuum.
pump, held between 80 and 90C (176 and
194F), While the engine is running, check to be
sure that there is no leakage of oil, water or
combustion gases, and listen into the engine now
and then for abnormal noise.
For this breakingin run, start up the engine as

follows:
(a) Fill up the cooling system and the oU pan, and
make sure there is enough fuel. Prime the fuel
system, letting out all trapped air, if any.
(b) Use. the preheating system to make sure that
the glow pilot lamp works. The lamp should
glow in about 20 seconds.
(c) With the adjusting lever of the governor moved
to the stariing.position, crank the engine with
the starter and, after starting up the engine,
move the adjusting lever to its idling position.
(d) With the engine kept in idling condition, inspect
for leakage of oil or water, observe the color of
exhaust smoke, listen into the engine for abnor-
mal noise, and check 1ube oil pressure and

cooling water temperature.
Until the cooling water temperature rises to its
normal operating range, the engine might develop
sharp knockinglike sound, but this is no cause for
alarm because it will disappear as the temperature
rises.
(2) Engine perfonnance tests

Have the air cleaner) vacuum pump, alternator unit
and other auxiliary devices mounted on the engine,
and test the engine for (a) noload maximum speed
(governor setting), (b) fuel injection (rack setting),
and (c) noload minimum speed (idling set ting).
Have the \tlynamometerturned off for these three
tests.
(a) Setting the governor (noload maximum speed
test)
Immediately after the breakingin operation, set
the governor to limit the highest speed to
2640 20 rpm. With the governor so set, the
engine speed will, as it should, fall to 2400 rpm
when full load (rated load) is put on the engine
by means of the dynamometer.
(b) Setting the rack(injectionquantity test)
Set the rack so that fuel injection quantity will
be between 7.6 and 7.8 liters (464 and 476
cu in.) per hour at 1600 engine rpm.
(c) Setting the idling stop screw (noloadminimum
speed test)
Set the stop screw so that, when the adjusting
lever is turned to bear against this screw, the
governor will allow the engine to run at 600
rpm.
(3) Engine output test

Turn on the dynamometer to impose load on the
engine running at noload maximum speed and
increase the load until the speed faUs to 2400 rpm.
Read the dynamometer indication right then.
Determine the formal output power by multiply
ing the reading by this correction factor K:
K~
760
f?73+t
H-Hw,.,J---m-
where H : barometric pressure in mmHg

Hw : partial pressure of H2 0 vapor in mmHg
t : room temperature in
c.
85
I
(/I
(/I
I
DISASSEMBLY
AND
REASSEMBLY
..
Hints for facilitating disassembly-reassembly work
Rocker anns and rocker shaft
Engine disassembly
(a) Orderliness is important. Have work benches and
parts trays in good condition, clean and tidy.
Washing sinks and pans should be neat and ready
for use. Have the disass.embled parts placed in
respective trays, keeping a group of associated
partS in the same tray for easy identification.
Rocker shaft assembly removal

(1) Remove rocker cover and gasket. Remove oil pipe
eye bolt (1) and disconnect pipe (2).
(2) Loosen short bolt (3) first and long bolt (4) next
on each bracket and, after freeing all four brackets ..
lift the rocker shaft assembly (5) off the cylinder
head.
(b) Before separating two parts, be sure to make

match marks as necessary. Even for those parts to
which positional matching is not critical, such
facilitate reassembly work.
marks
will
~-
(c) Signs of some defects or lIaws are visible during

disassembly but may disappear when the disassembled parts are washed clean. Leave your fmdings
on record when such signs are noied.
(d) Use the right kind of tool for each disass~mbling
job, in order to protect the parts and to speed up
the work.
(e) Handle bearings and bushings and the like with
care. They are critical parts: a little nick could
make them unfit for re-use.
Engine reassembly
(a) Make it a rule not to reuse dirty parts in reassembly. Oil seals and bearings must be particularly
clean. Before installing them, be suie to clean the
bores for admitting them.
1Eye bolt
2-0il pipe
3-Short bolt
4-Long bolt
5Rocker shaft assembly
(3) Draw out push rods (6), and remove valve caps (7).
(b) It is a good practice not to reuse those gaskets

and sealing members removed from the engine
that has been in long service. Use of replacement
parts is more economical as far as gaskets and the
like are concerned.
(c) Before fitting a running part, be sure to oil its
sliding surfaces. Use clean, fresh engine oil.
(d) Have the specified sealing compound on hand.
Use of the compound is prescribed for most of
sealing parts.
(e) Torque limits. are specified for some bolts and
nuts. Be sure to use torque wrenches and to refer
to the specified values of torque limits.
Engine dismounting and mounting

The engine and transmission are to be taken down
together from the machine. The two must be combined
on the bench and then remounted as a unit. The dismounting and mounting procedures are set forth in
another manual.
6-Push rod
Rocker shaft assembly installation

(I) Insert push rods into respective tappet holes.
Mount valve caps on the heads of respective valves.
Position the rocker shaft assembly on the cylinder head and make the short bolts and long bolts
fingerlight.
(2) Tighten the 8 short and long bolts to a torque
value between 1.5 and 2 kg-m (10.8 and 14.5 ft-lb).
Give the final torquing to long bolts first and to
short bolts next, making sure that all bolts are
tightened equally.
89
(3) Reconnect the oil pipe and secure the connection

by tightening the eye bolt.
improper valve clearances.

As to the valve clearance, refer to the part dealing
with valve clearance adjustment in the latter part
of this section. For both exhaust and intake valves,
this clearance is prescribed to be 0.25 mm (0.0098
in.) (cold).
Upon starting the reassembled engine for the

first time, inspect the rocker shaft assembly,
checking for evidence of any loose bolts on the
brackets and making sure that the rocker arm
mechanism is properly lubricated. Check, also, for
abnormal noise, such as valve chatter ~ue to
; - '.
Rocker shaft disassembly and reassembly
,~
Q)
"
l-Eye bol,t
2-0il pipe
3-Snap ring
A-Washer
5-Rocker arm assembly
lOBracket
11-Short bolt
({)~ "~
(0:/
14-Long bolt
15-Spring
16Shaft
Rocker shaft assembly - Exploded view
Removing snap ring
Rocker shaft assembly

(1) To break the rocker shaft assembly,
taken off
the cylinder head, into its component parts, the
first step is to remove snap rings (I), one at each

end of the shaft. Pliers must be used to pick out
the rings.
(2) Remove washer (4). This permits the assembly to
be broken into components: brackets (10), rocker
arms (5), springs (15) and shaft (16).
90
[NOTE]
Reverse the above sequence of disassembly to
rebuild this assembly. Make sure that each
rocker arm in place is capable of smooth rocking motion.
Cylinder head
Removal
(I) Disconnect bypass hose (I) and pipe (2). To do so,
the thermostat elbow and water pump clamp must
be displaced.
aCyllnder head bolt
9-Cylinder head
Removing cylinder head (3)
&[CAUTION]
1-Bypass hose
2Pipe

(2) Remove bracket (3) and fuel mter (4).
(3) Disconnect injection pipes (5), leak..,ff pipe (6)
and return pipe (7).
Cover up the open ends of injection pipes and

air intake pipe to avoid entry of dirt. When
removing the gasket' from cylinder head, be
careful not to nick or mar the gasketed surfaces
of head and block. Read the torque needed to
loosen each cylinder head bolt: these readings
might help locating the cause of the trouble
reported.
Installation
(I) Place new gasket (I) on the block (2), and lower
cylinder head (3) squarely onto the gasket. Be sure
to have two guide bolts (4) installed so that the
gasket in place will not shift.
3-Bracket
4Fuel filter
5-lnjection pipe
'.6Leakoff pipe
7-Return pipe

(4) Remove rocker cover, and take out the rocker
shaft assembly, push rods and valve caps, as
described previously.
(5) Remove cylinder head bolts (8). Lift cylinder
head (9) straight up to remove it from the block
of cylinders and crankcase.
'Gasket
2-Crankcase
3Cylinder head
4Guide bolt (2 pes)
Installing cylinder head (1)

(2) Using a torque wrench, tighten the cylinder head
bolts to 12 0.5 kg-m (87 3.6 ft-lb) in the
sequence indicated by the ascending order of
numbers, starting with HI."
91
?'
Front end of engine
"
Tightening sequence
3-Nut
4i:xhaust manifold
5lntake manifold
Disassembling cylinder head (2)
(4) Remove thennostatelbow (6) and take out ther"

most at (7).
Installing cylinder head (2)

(3) Insert push rods, fit valve caps and install the
rocker shaft assembly as described previously.
(4) Reconnect injection pipes, bypass hose and others.
(5) Adjust the valve clearance as prescribed, and
mount rocker cover.
Disassembly
(l) Remove nozzle holders (I) and glow plugs (2).
6Thermostat elbow
7Thermostat

(5) Remove exhaust and intake valves as follows: Compress valve, spring by operating the valve lifter,
pick out valve c'otters (8) and retainer (9), release
spring (10) and remove spring and valve (11).
1-Nozzle holder
2Glow plug

(2) Remove nuts (3) securing exhaust manifold (4) to
the block. Take off manifold (4).
(3) Similarly remove intake manifold (5).
Removing valve cotters
92
DISASSEMBLYAND REASSEMBLY
o
.~
.... -
2
II
a-Valve cO.tters
gUpper retainer
lO-Valve spring
11.valve
Valve - Exploded view

(6) After disassembling the head, decarbon it thor
oughly and clean the threaded holes for glow
plugs and nozzle holders by washing. Clean the
plugs and holders similarly. Use compressed air to
dry washed parts. When washing the nozzle holder
units, be careful not to damage their nozzle tips.
l-Valve guide
2-Gylinder head
A-Valve guide remover

/) Leave the precombustion chamber jets in
place unless their replaceinent is necessary.
To remove a jet, as when cracks are noted
"on it, ease the jet out by driving with a
flat-faced drift pin inserted through the
glow plug hole, as shown:
[NOTES I"
a) Intake and exhaus! valves are not marked to
identify the respective cylinders they serve.
Upon removing each valve, be sure to mark
it or otherwise identify it to ensure that it
will be restored to the original place of
service.
b) The two halves of each valve cotter must be
handled as a matched pair for the valve from
which it w~s removed in disassembly.
c) Leave the valve guides in place unless they
need replacement.
d) Observe the carboned condition of the com
bustion chamber surfaces, intake and exhaust
ports and valve heads before cleaning them.
What is observed is an important symptom
for troubleshooting.
Removing precombustion chamber jet
Before installing the jet, wash the precombustion chamber cavity clean, and drive the
jet into position, with its orifice pointing to
the center of the cylinder.
e) To remove the valve guide, be sure to use

the valve guide remover CAl.
93
Reassembly
Make sure that all component parts have been serviced (
or otherwise checked to be in re-usable condition; have
them all clean, free of greasy matter. Refer to this cross
section in executing the reassembly work:
A-Intake port
B-Exhaust port
C.chamber jet
Precombustion chamber jet location
'-Lock nut
2-Adjusting screw
3Push rod
4
3
4Cylinder head bolt

5Rocker bracket
6.valve guide
7ExhauSt valve
>NJ~----i18
8-Valve seat
gCover
lORocket' arm
l1-Rocker shaft
12-Spring retainer
13-Valve cap
14-Valve cotters
15-Spring
19
6~--~--~r---~il
l6Stem seal
17Glow plug
18-Leak. off pipe
19-Nozzle
20Cylinder head
21Precotnbustion chamber jet
Cylinder head - Cross section
(1) Assuming that the valve guides have been removed,

install each guide (2), as shown, with the use of the
guide installer (A). After driving the guide in,
check to be sure that the dimension (B) measures
17 mm (0.669 in.).
'"
l-Gylinder head
2-Valve guide
A-Valve guide installer

BSpecified length:. 17 mm 10.669 in,}
94
'. '.
'. ',':
"
: ::,','
.:
1-Cylinder head
2Valve guide
3Stem seal
5,Nut and washer
6-Nut and washer
Stem seal
(2) Mount valves (7), springs (15) and retainers (12).
Install valve cotters (14) on each valve with the
spring compressed by means of the valve lifter.
Leave out caps (13), which are to be put on when'
installing the rocker shaft assembly.
7-Pump pulley
8-Crankshaft pulley
Removing pump pulley and crankshaft pulley
(3) Restore to the cylinder' head the thermostat,

thermostat cover, nozzle holders, leak-off pipes,
glow plugs, connection wires, exhaust manifold
and intake manifold.
Timing gears
Removal
(I) Remove bolts (1) and take down the fan (2).
Loosen bolt (3) securing the adjusting plate to the
alternator, and take off fan belt (4).
7Pump pulley
APuller
Drawing pump pulley off
'-:::-~~{
.... ".
-.
"
, /" "
,0,
. -,
,~
\
1Bolt and washer 14 pes each)
2Fan
3Bolt
4Fan belt
Removing fan
(2) Remove nut (5) on water pump shaft, and hut (6)
on crankshaft. From the pump shaft,remove fan
spacer and, by using the fan puller (A), draw pump
pulley (7). Draw pulley (8) from crankshaft with
the puller.
a-Crankshaft pulley
A,Pulier
Removing crankshaft pulley

(3) Remove bolts (9) securing the cover (10). Remove
bolts (10) securing the timing gear case (12). Take
off the cover and gear case,
95
Leave camshaft gear (17) and injection pump gear

(i 8) in place, unless they have to be serviced or
replaced: each gear is to be removed complete
with its shaft.
[NOTE]
Before removing any of the timing gears, be

sure to tum over the crankshaft to bring these
gears into the position. at which the timing
marks provided on them meet each other.
Removed gears, if any, are to be fitted to take
the same angular position, which is illustrated
below:
9Bolf and washer (5 pes each)
lO-Bolt and washer (9 pes ea~h)
11Cover
12Gear case
Removing timing gear case
(4)
plate (14) and
3
l-Camshaft gear
2-ldler gear
3-Crankshaft gear
4-lnjection pump gear
Timing gear match marks meeting each other
13801t
14-Thrust plate
15Nut and washer
16)dler gear
17..camshaft gear
l8lnjection pump gear

19Crankshaft gear
Timing g~ars
(5) . Draw idler gear (16) while twisiiilg it in the direction of its helix.
161dler gear
Removing idler gear
96
Installation
The procedure is generally the reverse of removal. It is
assumed here that injection.pump gear (4), camshaft
gear (1) and idler gear (2) have been removed.
(1) Mount pump gear (4) and camshaft gear (1). Turn
.these gears while fitting idler gear (2), so that the
match marks will meet as shown above.
(2) Position timing gear case (i) in place, as governed
'Tlming gear case

2Cover
3-Bolt and washer

(13 pes each)
Securing gear case
)'
by the locating pins provided on the front plate,

and secure the case by tightening a total of 13
volts. Install injection pump gear cover (2).
sure that the seating face is clean and that the packing
is in good condition.
(3) . Install water pump pulley (5) and crank pulley (6)
by driving. them onto respective shafts with in
stallers (B) (C).
1Bolt and washer: (4 pes each)
2~iI filt"er assembly
Removing oil filter

./
5Water pump pulley
a-Installer
Installing pump pulley by driving
Oil fIlter disassembly and reassembly

To disassemble the oil fIlter, use the oil fIlter wrench to
detach element (I) from fIlter bracket (3). Removing
relief valve (4) from the bracket completes disassembly.
To reassemble the oil fIlter, reverse the disassembling se
quence.
6-Crank pulley
C-Installer
Installing crank pulley by driving

(4) Fit the washer to crank pulley and fasten down
the pulley by tightening the nut.
(5) Pass the fan belt around the pulleys and install the
'Element
2-Center screw
3Bracket
4Relief valve
Oil filter - Exploded view
cooling fan. Adjust the belt for proper tension as

described in the part titled "Fan belt tension
adjustment." Belt tension is specified in terms of
"belt defiection" and is prescribed to be 12 mm
(0.472 in.) (deflection) under thumb pressure.
Lubrication system
Oil fIlter removal and installation
The oil filter is bolted to the crankcase. Removing the
four bolts (I) allows the fIlter (2) to be detached from
the engine for removal. When installing the fIlter, make
97
CV'-~
When installing the oil pump, examine the gasket for

the mounting bolt. Replace the gasket if it is nicked or
otherwise defective.
Oil pump disassembly
(1) From the pump, remove oil strainer (2) and pump
cover securing bolts (1). Separate the cover.
'Element
2-Mounting bracket
3-Relief valve
Oil filter - Cross section
Oil pump removal

To remove the oil pump, the oil pan must be separated
from the crankcase. Before removing the oil pan, be sure
to drain it completely. Removing the mounting bolt (1)
allows the pump (2) to be pulled out of the crankcase.
Reverse this sequence of removal to install the oil pump.
l-Bolt and washer (4 pes each)

20il strainer
Removing oil strainer.
(2) Invert the pump case and catch outer rotor (3),
which will slide out of the bore by its own weight.
./'~
1801t and gasket
2-0il pump
Removing oil pump
[NOTE 1
The oil pump will not come off if oil pump
drive gear is firmly meshed with camshaft skew
gear. While giving a pull to the oil pump, turn
over the crankshaft a little to ease the drive
gear from the skew gear.
98
3.Quter rotor
Removing outer rotor
(3) Drive out tapered pin (4) by using a drift, as

shown, and pull drive gear(S) off main shaft (6).
Draw the main shaft out of the pump case.
.::.. ~
l
4-Tapered pin
6-Main shaft
5Drive gear
Removing tapered pin

(4) Drive out inner rotor pin (7), and separate main
shaft (6) from inner rotor (8).
dIflJll~ifHl;-:'---~~5
::0"
1Pump drive gear

2Main shaft
4-Outer rotor
5lnner rotor
3Pump case
Oil pump - Cross section
Mounting drive gear

'. 6-Main shaft
7-lnner rotor pin
alnner rotor
Removi.ng inner rotor pin
Oil pump reassembly

After securing inner- rotor to shaft by driving in the pin,
insert the shaft into the pump case, and mount the gear
on the shaft, locking the gear by driving in the tapered
pin.
Fitting cover to case by matching marks
99
(NOTES)
a) If main shaft or drive gear has been replaced,

a new pin hole must be made by drilling
through the gear mounted on the shaft.
b) After putting on the cover, check to be sure
that the match marks are, correctly indexed.
If the cover is in a wrong position relative to
the case, the pump will not draw in oil.
Tighten the bolts after checking to be sure
that the marks are correctly matched.
c) After reassembling the pump complete with
its str~iner) immerse the strainer in a pool of
oil and run the drive gear by hand to make
sure that the pump is capable of sucking oil
in.
7Union nut
aPulley
6-Bypass hose
Disconnec.tif'!9 hose and pipe
Cooling system
(water pump complete with thennostat)
,Water pump removal
(1) Remove four bolts (I) and take off fan (2).
Loosen bolt (3) and remove fan belt (4).
(4) Remove the nut securing pulley (8), and draw the
pulley off the shaft by operating puller (A).
aPulley
A-Puller
Removing pulley
lBolt and washer (4 pes each)
~-,.
3Bolt
4Fan I>e!t
(5) Remove mounting bolts (9) and take off the water
pump assembly from the crankcase.
Removing fan
(2) Loosen clamp (5) and disconnect bypass hose (6).
(3) The oil pipe for pressurefeeding lube oil to the
water pump is connected to the pump by means of
union nut (7). Loosen this nut and disconnect the
pipe.
9-Bolt and washer (4 pes each)

10Pump assembly
Removing water pump
100
(6) Remove two bolts (II) securing elbow (12), and

take off thermostat (13), as outlined previously.
11801t and washer

(2 pes each)
12-Thermostat elbow
13Thermostat
Removing thermostat
Installation is reverse of removal and can be effected by

carrying out the foregoing steps in the reverse order.
After installing the water pump, be sure to adjust the
belt for proper tension.
[NOTE
l-Bolt and washer

2-Cover
Removing pump cover
(2) Hold the pump shaft rigidly, and unscrew pump

impeller (3) to remove it from the shaft.
Handle the fan belt with care, keeping it free of

any greasy stains. After removing the water
pump from the crankcase, be sure to close the
water opening of crankcase to avoid entry of
dirt.
Water pump disassembly
J20211
. Impeller (3) is mounted threadedly on the shaft. The

screw threads isof right-hand screw. To remove impeller.
turn it in the direction of the arrow.
Removing impeller
(3) Ease out oil seal (5) from pump case (10).
1-801t
2Cover
3-lmpelJer
4-Unit seal
5-0il seal
6Snap ring
7Bearing
aShaft
9,-Bearing
lOPump case
J20212
Water pump - Exploded view

5-0il seal
(1) Remove cover (2), which is secured to the pump

case by bolts (1).
Removing oil seal
(4) Using pliers, pick out snap ring (6) from around
the shaft.
101
(I) Fit oil seal (10) into the case (4).
(2) Mount bearings (2) on shaft (I), put on spacer (3)

and insert the shaft into the case.
.
(3) To the pulley side of the pump case, fit snap ring
(5).
(4) Attach unit seal (7) to impeller (8), and mount
the impeller on the shaft by running the impeller
onto the shaft.
(5) Put on cover (9) and, after fastening it down to

the case, check to be sure that the impeller does
not rub the cover.
I
ml1l
Flywheel and ring gear
S-Snap ring
Removing snap ring

.(5) Draw shaft (8) out from the pulley side of the
pump case. Separate the two bearings (7) (9) from
the shaft.
lUng gear separation from flywheel

It is assumed here thalthe clutch has been removed .
(1) Straighten lock washers (I) and remove bolts (2).
"
J
,
--,
,"
.,;~
:,'
J20214
7-Searing
8Shaft
g'Bearing
l-Lock washer (2 pes)
2-801t (4 pes)
Removing flywheel (1)
Removing shaft
(2) Hold the flywheel with both hands, as shown, and
pull it off crankshaft. Lay the removed flywheel
on the bench top ..
Water pump. reassembly
lShaft
2-Searings
3-5pacer
4Case
5-Snap ring
6-0il seal
7-Unit seal
. 8-lmpeller
gCover
lO-Oil seal
11Pulley
A-Oil cavity
Water pump - Cross section
102
Removing flywheel (2)

(3) Using a drift, drive pilot bushing (3) out.
. . . . . . .. . . A.,..
\, 'il .
lJI.!
. ~'"ii. " , ....
,/
Installing pilot bushing
3Pilot bushing
Removing pilot bushing

(4) Immerse the flywheel in a hot bath of oil at 100C
(212F). Keeping the .flywheel in this bath for
3 minutes will heat the flywheel uniformly to this
temperature. Take out the flywheel, place it on a
firm, level working surface, and ease ring gear (4)
off flywheel (5) by driving with a drift bar.
(4) Screw two guide bolts (A) into the crankshaft end.
Hold out the flywheel squarely against crankshaft,
positioning it as guided by dowel pins.
F"eu,~-"''''')'- "'~
{~~Ilit
A-Guide bolt (2 pes)

Remove guide holts after correctly
positioning the flywheel.
.
Fitting flywheel to crankshaft

(5) Put on washers and tighten mounting bolts to
secure flywheel to crankshaft. Be sure to torque
these bolts t08.5 O.5 kg-m (61.5 36 ft-Ib). Lock
the tightened bolts by bending the washers firmly
against each bolt head.
4-Ring gear
5-Flywheel
Removing ring gear
Flywheel reassembly and mounting

(I) Cle~n the shouldered periphery of the flywheel for
receiving the ring gear. Clean" the ring gear simi
larly.
(2) Heat the ring gear to about 100C (212F) in a
hot bath of oil. Keeping the gear in the 100C
(2IfF) bath will heat it uniformly to this temperature. Upon removing the ring gear from the
oil bath, fit it to the flywheel, making sure that
the ring is seated firmly.
(3) Drive the pilot bushing into the flywheel.
Securing flywheel to crankshaft.
103
Fuel filter
Removal and installation

(\) Close the fuel supply valve under the fuel tank.
(2) Disconnect fuel feed pipe (2) from filter.

(3) Remove two mounting bolts and take off the fuel
filter assembly (3).
lDrain plug
2Fuel feed pipe (2 pes)
3Filter assembly
Removing fuel filter

Reverse the foregoing sequence of steps to install the
fuel filter. After installing the fuel filter, run the engine
and inspect for fuel leakage from pipe connections.
Disassembly and reassembly
The two views of the fuel filter given here are self
explanatory and will serve to explain the methods of
disassembly and reassembly:
(1."
Parts are to be taken off one another in the

ascending order of reference numbers.
l-Bolt
5~Spring
2-Filter cover
3-Gasket
6-Spring
seat
7-Filter case
4.Element
Fuel filter - Exploded view
Injection nozzles
Removal and installalioil
(I) Loosen connector (I) and disconnect injection
pipe (2) from the nozzle holder.
l-Filter cover
2-Gasket
3-Element
4Spring
5-Filter case
6-80h
7-Drain plug
8-Bolt
9-Air vent plug
Fuel filter - Cross section
104
(2) Loosen the union nut and disconnect return pipe

(3) from the holder.
(3) Remove nut (5) on each nozzle holder and discon
nect leakoff pipes (4) interconnecting the holders.
(,
1Connector 14 pes)
2lnjection pipe
3Return pipe
4Leak-off pipe
5-Nut (5 pes)
Removing nozzle holder
Removing injection nozzle
(4) Put the wrench to the retaining nut, and unscrew

the injection nozzle assembly to remove it froin
the cylinder head. Take off the packing remaining
behind on the seating face by plucking with a
screwdriver tip. Examine the removed packing to
see if it can be reused.
[NOTE I
Reverse the foregoing sequence of removing
steps to install the injection nozzles, making
sure to tighten the nozzle holder in place by
torquing its nut to S O.S kg-m (36.2 3.6 ft-Ib).
After removing' each nozzle assembly, be sure
to plug up the hole with a wad of cloth to
avoid entry of dirt into the cylinder.
Disassembly
(I) Before disassembly, collect data on the nozzle by
testing it for injection pressure (beginning of
injection), spray pattern and internal oil-tightness,
all in the manner already described. Throughout
the disassembly, cleaning and reassembly work,
handle each nozzle assembly with care to protect,
---in particular, the nozzle tip.
(2) Clamp retaining nut (1) between the jaws of a vise,
as shown, put the wrench to the holder and loosen
it to separate it from the nut (1).
(3) Take out of the removed holder these parts:
nozzle tip (3), distance piece (4), pressure pin (S),
spring (6) and washer (7).
Wash the disassembled parts clean with clean
kerosine or diesel fuel oil, and dry them with
compressed air. Using a wooden scraper, remove
carbon: after decarboning, wash the decarboned
parts with a more powerful cleaning fluid such as
gasoline.
1Retaining nut
2Nozzle holder
3Nozzle tip
4Distance piece
5Pressure pin
6'Spring
7Washer
BNut
gGasket
Injection nozzle assembly - Exploded view

Reassembly
The reassembling steps are the same as the disassembling
steps except that the sequence is reversed, and that the
job of fitting a part to another must be carried out in a
pool of clean kerosine.
Ifthe n,eedle valve and nozzle proper have to be replaced,
be sure to wash the replacement parts in the pool of
kerosine after removing their protective film of plastic:
wash off the rust-preventive oil from the nozzle proper
by stroking the needle valve back and forth in the needle
valve stem bore.
105
9)---1-:;
l-Adjusting lever rod

2-Control wire
5Connector
6-lnjection pipe (4 pes)
4Fuel feed pipe
Removing injection pump (1)
lRetaining nut
2-Nozzle tip
3Distance piece
4Pressure pin
SSpring
6Wash"er
7-Nozzle holder
8-Gasket
9-Nut
Injection nozzle - Cross section
Injection pump and governor
&( CAUTION]
Unless the circumstances require disassembly
of the injection pump and its governor, these

components should not be disassembled. To
overhaul them, special equipment complete
with testing devices and special tool is needed.
Furthennore, the overhauling work must be
performed by a person skilled in this service
and in a place specially kept clean.
Removal
(1) Disconnect control wire (2) from adjusting lever
rod (1); and disconnect fuel feed pipe (4) from
the pipe joint at injection pump. Similarly disconnect the pipe between fuel filter and injection
pump. Remove fuel return pipe (3) by undoing its
3Return pipe
70i! pipe
Removing injection pump (2)
(2) Remove the injection pump gear cover. Turn over

engine crankshaft to bring the piston in No. 1
cylinder to top dead center on compression stroke.
Look into the timing gear case to check to be
sure that the match marks provided on the idler
and pump gear are meeting each other correctly.
pipe connections.
At each injection pipe connection on the 'pump

unit~ undo connector (5) to disconnect injection
pipe (6). Remove oil pipe (7).
aPump gear
Injection pump gear
106
(3) Remove boIts '(9) securing the mounting flange of

the injection pump to the engine front plate, and
take down the injection pump unit.
(4) Tilting the pump toward the engine advances the

timing, and vic'e versa._ Refer to the graduation
marks provided on the edge face of the mounting
flange: one division is equivalent to 6 deg. of crank
angle.
(S) Having made sure that all timing marks are
matched as prescribed and that the beginning <if
injection is correctly timed (in reference to No. I
cylinder), reconnect the injection pipe (No. I).
Prime the fuel circuit in the manner previously
described: make sure that no air remains trapped
in any part of the circuit.
[NOTE]
9-Solt' and washer
Removing injection pump(3)

Installation
(I) Alignment marks (line marks) are provided on the
pump body and mounting flange. Make sure that
these marks are lined up. With the pump gear and
idler properly positioned in their meshed condition
inside the timing gear case, that is, the match
marks on these gears indexed to each other ,mount
the injection pump unit on the engine front plate
and secure it by tightening the mounting bolts .
Whether the injection pump is correctly install

cd must be checked by actually running the
engine. Run the engine in all speed ranges;
listen in for abnor~al noise and examine the
color of exhaust smoke. Evidence of malconditions noted could be due to mistimed fuel
injection.
Feed pump removal and installation

(I) Disconnect fuel feed pipe (I) and return pipe (2).
(2) Remove nuts (3) securing ihe feed pump to the
injection pump body, and take off feed pump
assembly (4).
. (2) Install fuel feed pipes and lube oil pipe, and
reconnect all but No. I fuel injection pipe.
(3) Turn over engine c'rankshaft slowly until the
plunger in No. I pumping element comes to the
position for "beginning of injection." Check to be
sure that the timing mark on crank pulley is
matched to the mark on the timing gear case;
if not, adjust the mounted position of the pump

in the following manner:
1Fuel feed pipe

2Return pipe
3-Nut and washer (3 pes each)

4-Feed pump assembly
Removing feed pump
Setting injection timing
107
[NOTE)
Feed pump disassembly and reassembly
Priming pump is not meant for disassembly:

its cylinder and valve holder are integrally com
bined by using a bonding compound.
(2) Loosen piston chamber plug (4), pick out piston

spring (6), and draw out piston (5).
(
lpump housing
2Priming pump
3-Check valve
4-Piston chamber plug
5Piston
6Piston spring
7Ring
8Tappet
9,Push rod
10-Valve support
l1-Check valve spring

12-Hollow screw
13Hollow screw
14-Gauze filter
15Nipple
Feed pump - Exploded view
(I) Remove priming pump (2), and take out check

valve (3).
4Piston chamber plug
6Piston spring
5Piston
Removing feed pump piston
.
(3) Remove ring (7), and take out tappet (8) and push
rod.
lValve holder
3Check valve
2Priming pump
Removing priming pump
108
7Spring
8Tappet
Removing feed pump tappet
(NOTE
cover to the housing, and detach the cover by

pulling it a little. Insert the screwdriver and
move the shackle upward or downward with
the tip of screwdriver to undo the pinned
connection between control rack and shackle.
Assembly is reverse of disassembly. Be sure to

correctly assemble by referring to the cross
section.
Disconnecting shackle from control rack

(c) Using the long-nose pliers, unhook the start
spring. Remove the governor cover complete
with the lever mechanism.
5
lPump housing
2-Check valve
7Priming pump
3Valve support
4Hollow screw
5Piston and tappet
6Check valve
8-Valve holder
9-Gauze filter
10Hollow screw
l1-Cover
Feed pump - Cross section
Governor disassembly
The following tools are needed to disassemble and
assemble the RSV governor ~f the injection pump unit:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Screwdriver
Wrench set
Long-nose pliers
Special wrench for torquing governor weight round
nut
(e) Flyweight extractor
(f) Overhauling tool set
Disconne"cting start spring

(2) Remove the flyweights as follows:
(a) Remove round nut (5) by loosening it with the
round nut wrench.
Before starting to disassemble the governor, wash the

exterior surfaces of injection pump unit and set up the
pump on the bench. Drain lube oil.
(I) Detach and remove the governor cover as follows:
(a) Loosen idle lock nut (I), remove idling subspring (2), loosen screws securing cover piece
(3), and take off this cover piece.
(b) Remove the six screws (4) securing the governor
Removing round nut
109
".-,>
Governor - Exploded view

(b) Run the flyweight extractor into the threaded
hole, as shown, and force the flyweights off the
camshaft by jacking action.
Removing tension lever
Removing flyweights ..
(3) From the removed governor cover, take out the
lever mechanism parts, as follows:
(a) Remove two screw plugs (2), and draw out
lever supporting shaft (8), on which tension
lever (7) is hinged.
(b) Raise the swiveling lever, as shown, take out
tension lever (7) and remove control spring.
(c) Take out guide lever (9) together with control
lever (10) and governor sleeve (II).
(d) To remove swiveling lever (12), remove adjust
ing lever (13), pick out snap ring (14), drive out
lever bushing (15) to outer side. This permits
the lever (12) to come out of the cover.
110
Governor reassembly
Carry out the sequential steps of disassembly in reverse
order, adhering to the following instructions:
(I) Flyweight mounting
After positioning the flyweights on camshaft,
secure it by tightening the round nut to 6 kg,m
(43.4 ft.lb). Be sure to place a spring washer under
this nut.
(2) Combining governor sleeve and guide lever (float.
ing lever)
If these two parts have been separated, combine
them in the following manner:
Referring to the sketch below, press the ball bear
ing into the governor sleeve, and press the control
block into the bearing, making the flange of the \
block seat firmly against the inner ring of the
bearing. Fit the sleeve (complete with the control
.,
"
block) onto the flyweight support, and measure

the distance between the end face of governor
housing and the flangc of control block. This
distance is prescribed to be from 15 mm (0.591
in.) to 15.2 mm (0.5913 In.); if not, adjust it by
shimming. The shim stock for this purpose is
available in three sizes: 0.2 mm (0.0078 in.), 0.3
mm (0.0118 in.) and 0.4 mm (0.0157 in.).
(3) Check to bc sure that the adjusting screw in the

swiveling lever is positioned as prescribed; jf the'
screw is too far in or out, adjust it by referring to
the value indicated in the list of adjusting standards

so that the governor adjusting work to be carried
out after reassembly will bc made easier.
- '-.',1
Checking position of adjusting screw in swiveling lever

15+ 0 .2
1-Governor sleeve
2Control block
3Governor housing
Position of control block
.~
. :
(4) Make sure that cach lcver and link set in position
moves smoothly without unduly heavy resistance.
After securing the governor cover to the housing,
check to be sure that tensioning and relaxing the

start spring cause the control nick to slide outward
and inward smoothly .
Injection pump disassembly, inspection and reassembly
(I) General rules on work
a. Make a batch of washing fluid available for ready
use. For the washing fluid, use clean kerosine or
diesel fuel oil.

b. Work .in a clean place. The injection pump is a
precision-machine component and, as such, abhors
dust. After removing it from the engine, wash its
Pressing
~all
bearing into governor sleeve
exterior clean and inspect for damage: this should

be accomplished before starting to disassemble the
pump.
c. Some jobs are prescribed to be effected with the
use of special tools .. Use of common' tools is not
permitted.
d. Handle cach plunger and its cylinder (barrel) as a
suit, and each delivery valve with its seat as another
suit. Upon removal of these parts, have them set
aside as distinct suits identified for the cylindcr

numbers.
1-Control block
2-lnner ring supporting tool
Pressing control block into ball bearing
e. When installing the dclivery valve holder, be careful

not to overtighten it or the pump housing will
break. A sticky control rack is often due to an
overtightened valve holder. Use a torque wrench,
and tighten it to this torque limit:.
111
Unit: kgm (ftlb)

. Item
Limit
Delivery valve holder

tightening torque
2.5 - 3.5
(18 - 25)
f. Each plunger has its part number punched on its

flange. When reassembling the injection pump, be
sure to position each plunger so that its punched
part faces the front; this means that, with the
plunger so positioned, its control groove meets the
feed hole. Remember, the adJustability ofinJection
quantity presupposes that all plungers are so posi
tioned in their barrels.
The off side has a letter

R or L marked by punching.
[NOTEl
Removing one part after another without exam
ining each part critically and heeding to the
story each part wants to tell is a wasteful
practice and prevents you from taking proper
measures necessary for restoring the pump as
close to the original condition as possible.
Sett.ing up pump by meanS of holdingfixture

(b) Remove the governor from the pump proper,
as in Governor disassembly.
Example of part number
l-Feed hole
2Control groove
Pumping element parts
g. It is highly essential that the control rack should

slide smoothly in place. If any stickiness is noted
after reassembly, the pump must be disassembled
and reassembled once again. Stickiness of the
control rack is often caused by nicks or dents
sufferred by the rack, defective rack teeth or
(c) Turn the pump camshaft by hand to "feel"

the resistance of camshaft: abnormal resistance
means that there is something wrong in the
pump. Using a spring balance, measure the
sliding resistance of the control rack, and write
down the reading for reference. A limit is

specified on this resistance:
Unit: gram (ounce)

Item
Sliding resistance of control rack
in standstill pump
Limit
150 (5.3)
pinion teeth, '-interference between pinion and
pump housing, or overtightened delivey valve

holders.
h. Axial play is specified for the camshaft. Make sure
that it is between 0.03 and 0.05 mm (0.0012 and
0.0020 in.). If too much or too little a play is
noted, adjust it by shimming.
[NOTESl
a) A control rack not sliding smoothly could
mean that tappets or control sleeves are in
bad condition. Check these parts carefully

when taking them out in disassembly.
b) Move the control rack all the way in each
(2) Disassembling procedure

(a) Drain lube oil. Examine the drained oil for
evidence of malcondition. Set the injection
pump firmly on the work bench, by means of
the holding fixture.
Remove the cover plate and look in to see if
there are signs of rnalcondition.
direction, and note the position of each

control pinion for the extreme positions of
the rack. Restore these positions at the tbne

of reassembly.
(d) Isolate the four tappets from the cams by
holding them in lifted condition. This is accom
plished by turning the camshaft by hand to
raise each tappet to the hlghest position artd
locking the tappet in that position with a tappet
insert.
112
\
/
(g) Remove the tappet inserts locking the tappets

in raised position. To do so, the roller clamp
(95905-06030) must be used: insert the clamp
through the screw plug hole to pinch the tappet
roller, and give a push to tl)e tappet with the
clamp to allow the tappet insert to be pulled
out.
,
> .... ,.
-.-.- ,
.-~;
Locking tappets
(e) Lay down the pump and remove the screw
plugs, as shown:
Taking out tappet inserts

(h) Insert the tappet clamp (95905-02030) through
bearing hole to pinch the tappet, take off the
roller clamp, and remove the tappet. Remove
all four tappets in this manner.
(NOTE]
Tilt down the pump so that the plungers and
springs will not fall off.
Removing screw plugs
(f) Remove the bearing cover, and draw out the

camshaft gently.
-&[ CAUTION]
When removing the bearing cover, be careful
not to nick or mar the seating faces or oil
leakage will develop during operation.
'-."
--
~t
-j
I\
\.
. 11
Removing tappets
t j'
(i)
Remove the plungers and lower spring seats by

using the plunger clamp (95905-09030): pinch
the lower portion of the plunger with this tool,
and draw out the plunger together with its
lower spring seat.
&[ CAUTION]
Removing camshaft
This removal operation must be carried out

with great caution to avoid scratching the
plunger: pull the plunger straight out.
113
&,(
CAUTION 1
When installing the extractor, be careful not to
run down the threaded portion of the extractor
too far onto the delivery valve in place.
(1) Take out the cylinder (barrel) from top side by

pushing on it.s bottom.
Removing plungers
G) Draw out each plunger spring, and remOve the

. control sleeve and upper spring seat.
Removing cylinder
(m) Remove the rack guide screw, and draw out the
control rack.
Removing plunger springs and upper seats
(k) Raise the pump body into vertical position.

Unscrew and remove the delivery valve holders.
Install the extractor and draw out each delivery
valve, as shown:
Removing control rack
(3) Inspection
Layout the removed parts in the trays, segregating
them in groups, each group for each pumping
element and related parts, as identified for the
respective reference numbers, No.1, No.2, No.3
and No.4. Do not disturb the original suits.
Wash each part clean, and dry it with compressed
air, making ~ure that orifices, screw threads and
pockets are all clean.

Removing delivery valve
114
(a) Pump housing

Inspect each bore, from which the cylinder
(barrel) has been drawn out, to see if there is
any damage. Check to be sure that the counter
bore (into which the shoulder of the cylinder
fits) is in good condition to ensure a .good oiltight fit. To repair this counterbore use the
counterbore cutter, one of the special' tools for
servicing work. Fuel leakage into the camshaft
chamber is often due to a defective fit in this
counterbore.
(b) Pumping elements
1. If any scratch or scoring is noted on the cylinder bore under visual- ~xamination, replace it
together with its plunger:
2. Each suit of cylindei and plunger must be
checked for the tightness of sliding fit by
testing as follows:. Hold the cylinder tilted,
forming an angle of 60 deg. relative to horizontal, with its plunger inserted into its bore; pull
out the plunger about 20 mm (0.8 in.); and
release it to see if it slides down smoothly by
its own weight. If it Goes in several angular
positions with the cylinder so angled;the fit is
satisfactory. Replace the cylinder and plunger
as a suit if any stickiness or free-falling sliding
motion is noted.
Oe
Delivery valve test
Set up the pump on the tester, and install a test

pressure gauge on one of the delivery valve
holders. Prime the pump with fuel oil, and
drive the pump at 200 rpm, with the control
rack locked in idling position. The pressure
gauge indication under this running condition
tells whether the cylinder and plunger being
tested is satisfactory or not: the- pressure criteria
are as follows:
Unit: kg/em' (psi)
Item
Standard
Service
limit
Oil-tightness of sliding
fit between cylinder
and plunger
150 - 200
(2133 - 2844)
at 200 rpm
150
(2133)
Cylinder-plunger suits not capable of developing at least 150 kg/em' must be replaced. For
the test pressure gauge, use one caHbra.ted up
to 300 or 400 kg/em' (4266 or 5688 psi).
TestingJit of
plun~~r
in cylinder
3. Measure the width of plunger nange. If the

nange is worn down to 6.95 mm (0.274 in.)
or under in width, replace the plunger and
cylinder.
4. Oil-tightness test
The cylinder and plunger found to be in satisfac~ory
condition must -u'ndergo another test for
checking the oil-tightness of sliding fit between

cylinder and plunger, after reassembling the
injection pump. Be fore- reassembling the pump,
make it absolutely sure that the delivery valves
are an in satisfactory condition as determined
by the methods to be described SUbsequently.
(c) Delivery valves

I. A delivery valve found with its piston worn
excessively or valve seat showing evidence of
poor seating contact or damage must be replaced together with its seat.
2. Hold the suit of delivery valve and seat between
two fingers, as shown, with the thumb plugging
the bottom hole. Pull up the valve and let it
go to see if the valve goes down smoothly but
becomes arrested as its extraction land closes
the bore~ if it does, then the suit is satisfactory
for the first test. For the second test, push the
valve down till it touches the seat, and remove
the push to see if the valve springs upward to
the arresting position mentioned above: if it
does, then the suit is satisfactory for the seco.nd
test. A valve-seat suit found unsatisfactory in
either test must be replaced. Remember I these
two tests are meaningful only when the valve
115
and seat are absolutely clean and oiled adequately to form oil films on their surfaces.
Test each suit of delivery valve and seat in the
foregoing manner and, when reassembling the
pump, use only those found satisfactory.
(e) Tappets
Using a dial gauge, read the radial play of the
roller of each tappet by moving the roller up
and down in the manner illustrated: use a rod
to push the roller up from bottom side. If a
reading of 0.3 mm (0.012 in.) or more is
obtained, replace the whole tappet.
Check the sliding clearance' of each tappet in
the bore of the housing; tappet replacement is
necessary if the clearance noted exceeds the
service limit.
Unit: mm (in )
Item
Service
limit
Standard
Tappet-to-bore
clearance
0.02 "-'0.062
0.25
(0.0008 ~ 0.00244) (0.0098)
Testing delivery valve and seat

3. Oil tightness test
Test the delivery valve for oil-tightness of its
seating contact after checking the cylinders and
plungers for oil.tightness by running the reassembled pump at 200 rpm in the manner
already described. It is assumed here that the
cylinder and plunger served by a particular
delivery valve are in good condition with respect
to oil-tightness.
.
./
Run the pump at 200 rpm in the same testing

setup, with the control rack kept in idling
position, and, when the pressure gauge indication reaches 150 kg/cm 2 (2133 psi), move the
rack into non-injection position ("0" mm) to
see if it takes more than 5 seconds for this
pressure to fall to 10 kg/cm 2 (142 psi); if it
does, then the delivery valve under. test is
satisfactory.
(d)' Control rack and pinions
A control rack in distorted condition or presenting excessive wear on its rack teeth must be
replaced. After reassembling the pump, check
each pinion for backlash and, as necessary,
replace the pinion or control rack, or both, to
reduce the backlash to the specification:

Unit: mm (in )
Item
Standard
Service
limit
Rack-to-pinion backlash
0.15
(0.0059)
0.25
(0.0098)
1-Dial gauge
2-Roller
3Roller bushing
4-Pin
Measuring tappet roller paly
(I) Delivery valve springs and plunger springs

Replace badly rusted, cracked or otherwise
damaged springs_ Springs visibly out of square
must be replaced. Check each spring for freestate length, and replace it if the limit, indicated
below, is exceeded.
Unit: mm (in.)
Plunger springs
Item
Free length
of spring
116
Delivery valve
springs
Standard
Service
Standard
limit
49_0
(1.929)
48.5
(1.909)
Service
limit
31.0
32.0
(1.260) (1.220)
Inspect each plunger spring seat for depth of

its concave; replace the seat if the depth is
0.1 mm (0.004 in.) or over.
(g) Camshaft
Inspect the camshaft for wear of its cam' sur
faces, of the surfaces of sealed portions in
contact with oil seals; and of screw threads at
both ends. Inspect, too, for rusting, damage
and for keyway deformation. Repair or replace
the camshaft depertdingon the result of inspec
tion.
Check the camshaft for alignment by support
ing it witli center pins fitted to its end faces,
and by measuring the amount of deflection
with a dial gauge. A camshaft exhibiting a
deflection of 0.15 mm (0.0059 in.) or over at
its middle section must be straightened in a
press or replaced by a new one.
(4) Assembly
(a) Install the cylinders (barrels), positioning each
cylinder angularly as guided by the locating pin
and positioning groove.
&.1
&'1
CAUTION 1
Take every precaution to avoid dust particles
getting into between cylinder and delivery valve
seat.
Driving in delivery valve seat
(c) Insert the spring, and run in the delivery valve

holoer and tighten the holder tentatively.
CAUTIONS 1
a) These cylinders are meant for thumbpres.

sure fit. Never attempt to drive them into
the bores with such as a mallet.
b) After fitting each cylinder'into the bore,
making it seat firmly in place, check to be
sure that it will not rotate when turned with
a finger.
Installing holder
(d) Position the control rack in place, and install
the guide screw.
Installing pumping element cylinder

(b) Fit a new valve gasket to the delivery valve, and
insert it into bore. Drive down the delivery
valve by using a drift, as shown, making the
seat meet the top of the cylinder to present an
oiltight facetoface contact. Only light blows
are needed to the end of the drift.
Fitting guide screw
117
~[ CAUTIONS)
,-.-'
a) Make sure that the guide screw installed is

located accurately inside the groove provided
in the rack. Tightening this screw located off
the groove is liable to bend the rack.
c) After inserting the cylinder, position its

lower spring seat in such a way that the
seat will not faU off.
b) After installing the rack, check to be sure

that it is capable of smooth movement
through its entire stroke.
Ce) Lay dowl1 the pump, and fit control pinions
and sleeves to barrels, making sure that each
pinion is so positioned that the adjusting hole
provided in the control sleeve points to the
pinion clamp screW.
[ NOTES)
a) Move the rack back and forth to rotate the
control pinions similarly, and check to be
sure that each pinion is accurately meshed
with the rack teeth.
b) Check, also, to see that each pinion is accurately centered to the control rack when
the rack i~ in its center position, so that
moving the rack from this position to each
stroke end rotates the pinion by an equal
'
Inserting plunger
(g) Pick up the tappet with the tappet clamp, feed
the tappet into the camshaft chamber and
insert it into the bore.
amount.
(f) Install upper spring seats and plunger springs.

Using the plunger clamp, fit the lower spring
seat to each plunger, and insertthe plunger into
the barreL
Inserting tappet
Match the plunger driving face to the notches
cut out in the control sleeve, . push up the
tappet and hold it there by means of the tappet
insert. With the tappet so held, move the rack
Inserting upper spring seat and plunger spring
[NOTES)
a) Be sure to hold each plunger true and square
and insert it straight into the barrel.
b) Remember, the driving face (on which a
number is marked by punching) of each
plunger comes on topside: if not, the helical
groove of the plunger will not meet the feed
hole and tIus defeats the adjustability of
injection quantity.
118
Fitting tappet insert to hold up tappet
..
to be sure it slides smoothly, Install all four

tappets in this manner, making sure each time
that the rack moves smoothly.
(h) Using the torque wrench, tighten the delivery
valve holders to this torque value:
Standard
Item
Delivery valve holder
tightening torque
2.5
(18
[NOTE
3.5 kg-m
25 ft-Ib)
After tightening up each delivery valve holder,

move the rack to see if this tightening has
adversely affected the ability of the control
rack to slide smoothly.
(k) Put on the bearing cover tentatively, and check

the axial play of the camshaft by using the
camshaft clearance gauge (95905-01080). If the
play noted is off the range indicated below,
reduce or increase it into the specifted range by
shimming: shim stock for this purpose is available in six thicknesses, 0.10 mm (0.0039 in.), .
0.12 mm (0.0047 in.), 0.14 mm (0.0055 in.),
0.16 mm (0.0063 in.), 0.18 mm (0.0071 in.)
and 0.50 mm (0.0197 in.). So that the camshaft
will not be so displaced by shimming to one
side as to offset the cams from the tappets, try
to use equal amounts of shim on both sides.
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Camshaft bearing
axial play
'- t
Standard
0,03 ~0.05
(0.0012 ~ 0.0020)
,
\
Tightening delivery valve holder

. (i)
Install the lock plate for locking the delivery

valve holders in place. Using the spring balance,
check the sliding resistance of the control rack.
The rack is required to slide with a push or pull
of not greater than 150 grams (5.3 ounces).
'~"'-'.
Checking camshaft axial play:

(I)
Having properly installed the camshaft, apply

BOND to the bearing cover and secure it
permanently to the pump body, with an
"0" ring set in the joint.
f.
Checking sliding resistance of control rack
0) Apply engine oil to the camshaft, and install it,
Applying BON D to bearing cover
positioning it in place with the marked end

face coming on the drive side.
119
~[ CAUTIONS]
",
a) Do not apply BOND to the "0" ring.

b) Be sure that the ventilating hole of the cover
comes on top side.
(m) Install the screw plugs, tightening each plug to
this torque value:
Item
Screw plug tightening
torque
Standard
5.5 N 7.5 kg.m
(39.8 ~ 54.2 ftlb)
(n) Remove the tappet inserts one after another

while turning over the camshaft. For the last
time, check to be sure tilat the control rack is
capable of smooth sliding movement, and check
its sliding resistance to see and confirm that a
force not greater than }50 grams (5:3 .ounces)
will move the camshaft.
1.()iI pan
20il pump
Removing oil pan
(2) . Remove the idler gear in the timing gear train.

(3) Turn camshaft gear, bringing its two holes to top
and bottom to expose bolts (I) securing thrust
plate. Reniove bolts (I), and. draw the camshaft
assembly out.
Removing tappet Inserts

Engine proper
Disassembly
Drain out engine oil and coolant: Wash the exterior
surfaces of the engine clean; arid set it up on the
disassembly stand. After removing the various compo
nents attached to the engine proper, proceed as follows:
Removing camshaft (1)
[NOTE]
Remove the tappets after drawing out the cam
shaft.
(I) Remove a total of 24 bolts securing oil pan (I) to

crankcase, and take off the oil pan. Remove oil
pump (2) as outlined in OIL PUMP REMOVAL.
Removing camshaft (2)
120
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLy
Using the puller (A), extract gear (2) from the

camshaft. Remove thrust plate from the camshaft.
1Bolt
2.Rear housing
Removing rear housing

2Gear
A-Puller
3-Thrust plate
Removing gear from camshaft
(4) Remove bolts (I) securing the front plate (2) to

crankcase, and take off the plate. The injection
pump unit (3) comes off as mounted on the front
plate.
(7) Remove connecting rods, pistons and crankshaft,

as follows:
(a) Remove 8 nuts fastening down the connecting
rod caps, two nuts on each cap. Take off caps
(I) complete with bearings.
lCap
Loosening connecting rod cap nutS".

3-lnjection pump unit
2-Front plate
(b) Lay down the crankcase, and draw out each

piston and connecting rod.
Removing front plate

(5) Remove the flywheel.
(6) Remove bolts (I) securing the rear housing (2) to
the rearplate, and take off the housing.
&J
CAUTION]
Exercise caution not to damage the oil seal
fitted to the rear housing.
\.
2.connecting rod
3-Piston
Drawing out piston and connecting rod
121
(c) Raise the crankcase (bringing crankshaft io top

side). Remove 10 bolts securing the main bearing caps, two bolts on each cap. Take off caps
(4) complete with bearings.
. l-Bearlng shell
Taking off main bearing shells
4Maln bearing cap
Loosening main bearing cap bolts
.&.1
CAUTIONS
a) Handle the bearings carefully to avoid damage. Tag or otherwise identify each bearing
shell and set aside the shells in identified
groups so that each will be restored to its
original location in reassembly_
b) Remember, No. 1 and No~ 5 bearings have

two side seals each.
(d) Lift the crankshaft (5) off and out of crankcase,
as shown.
3ldler shaft
Aldler shaft puller
Drawing out idler shaft

(9) Using the special tool (A), extract crankshaft gear
(1) from the removed crankshaft (2).
5-Crankshaft
Removing crankshaft
(8) Remove the remaining main bearing shells (1). The
idler shaft need not be removed unless to do so is
absolutely necessary; the puller (A) must be used
to draw out this shaft.
l-Gear
2-Crankshaft
'APuller
Removing crankshaft gear
122
(10) From each piston, separate its connecting rod, as

follows:
(a) Using the pistonTing tool (A), remove compression rings (1) and oil ring (2). Pick out oil ring
spring with flngers.
JI.III
1..compresslon rin-gs
2011 ring
A-Piston rfng tool
Removing piston ring
(b) .Using the snap ring tool (B), remove snap ring
(3) from each end of the pin.
4Pin
6Connecting rod
5Piston
C-Drift
Removing piston pin

(d) From the small end of connecting rod, remove
the bushing.
[NOTE]
Wash the disassembled parts clean, and decarbon them.
(II) Clean the crankcase by washing it in a bath of
caustic soda solution or cleaning solvent, removing

grease and grime from all surfaces in and out.
Clean oil drillings and holes with a long-handle

brush. After washing, dry it with steam or compressed air.
........." ~
3$nap ring (2 pes)
".
J2!m
a-Snap ring tool
Removing snap ring
(c) Remove pin (4) by driving it out with a drift

(special tool) (C), as shown:
Reassembly
(I) Fit the bushing into the small end of each connect
ing rod by driving it in with a drift, malting sure
that the oil hole provided in the bushing meets
the hole provided in the small end.
123
the other snap ring. The pin and pin hole are
sized for loose fit and, therefore, the pin should
go into the hole when given thumb pressure. This
insertion wiUbe made easier by having the piston
warmed up in advance.
.J
Using the piston ring tool, fit the piston rings (two
compression rings and one oil ring) to the piston.
:'\0
I
'
::',':,::,;.:-:
..... .
CT
....
ID'
JI is 0
Fitting bushing into small end
...
Precombustion
chamber side
.....
Camshaft side
lCompression rings
. 20il ring
Installing piston rings
(NOTE J
Cylinder number marked
on this.side.
No. 2- ring has URn mark on its top side. Be sure

that this side is on top when the ring is in tlie
groove.
This mark comes on top side.
Combining piston and connecting rod
Have a snap ring fitted to one end of the piston

pin hole, insert the small end into the piston,
aligning the bushing to the pin hole, and insert the
pin gently into the pin hole through the bushing
from the end at which the snap ring is to be
installed.
Be sure that, with the small end connected to the
piston, the big end has its match mark located on
the camshaft Side, that is, opposite to the pre
chamber side. Secure the pin in place by fitting
124
"RHmark on No.2 piston ring
When installing No.3 (oil) ring, be sure to combine

ring (I) and expander (2) by matching the ring
ends to the tube.
Expander
connecting part
Tub~
CD
'-Oil ring
2-Expander
2-ldler shaft
A-Installer
Combining oil ring with expander
Installing idler shaft
(2) After combining the connecting rods with their

pistons, to which rings are fitted, insert woodruff
keys (I) to the keyway provided in the forward
end of crankshaft, and mount gear (2) on ihis
end by driving it in with the installer (A). (This job
will be easier if crankshaft gear (2) is heated hoI.)
(5) Position the tappets in the respective tappet holes.

Lightly oil the seats of main bearings, and fit the
upper bearing shells to the seats, making sure that
the tab formed of the shell fits snugly into the
recess provided in the seat. Fit thrust plate (3) to
the rear side of the seat.
'-Woodruff key (2 pes)

gear
A-Installer
2-Cran~s~aft
Driving gear onto crankshaft
(3) Fit the thrust plate to camshaft, and press cam

shaft gear onto camshaft. Have the gear heated hot
to facilitate the job.
(4) Install idler shaft (2) by driving it into the crank
case with the installer (A), as shown:
3-Thrust plate
Fitting upper bearing shells

(6) Install the crankshaft, as follows:
(a) Lower crankshaft in level position and rest it on
the five upper shells, which have been lightly
oiled. Oil the five bearing caps, and fit the
lower bearing shells, which have been oiled
similarly. To the mating face of each cap, apply
SUPER THREEBOND No. 10. Taking care not
to damage thrust plates (3), put on No.5 cap
(2) and settle it firmly in place by tapping on
it with a mallet (A). Put on No. I, No.2, No.3
and No.4 caps, and run down the bearing caps.
Make sure that the outer end faces of No.5 and
No. I caps are flush with the outer faces of
crankcase. (The face to be flush is indicated by
the arrow.)
125
t.crankshaft
2~o. 5 bearing cap
l-Cap seal
3-Thrust phite
Fitting cap seal
A~Mallet
Fitting bearing caps
(b) Using a torque wrench, tighten the .\ 0 cap bolts

equally; tightening each just. a little at a time,
to the final torque value of 10 to 11 kgm (72
to 80 ftlb).
(4)1----'
l-Crankcasa
2Main bearing cap
3Cap seal
4Rounded corner of cap seal
Position of cap seal in groove
&[ CAUTIONS I
a) Be sure to insert each cap seal with its round
end foremost, bringing the rounded corner
on outer side.
4.:cap bolt (10.pcs)
b) After pushing in the cap seal, give a full

thumb pressure to its end to settle it in
place, taking care not to bend the seal. Never
drive the seal with such as a hammer.
B.Torque wrench
Securing main bearing caps
[NOTE
Recheck to be sure that No. I and No. 5 caps

have their outer end faces flush with crankcase
(8) Lay down the crankcase, and insert the pistonand

rod combinations, as shown. At the crankshaft
end faces.
(c) Using a dial gauge, check the crankshaft end

play to be sure it is within the specified range.
Adjust the play, as necessary, by replacing
thrust plates.
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Standard
Repair
Crankshaft end play
0.10-0.264
(0.0039 - 0.0 I 039)
0.30
(0.012)
limit
(7) Apply SUPER THREE BOND No. 10 to cap seals
(1) and insert the seals into bearing cap grooves

at No. I and No.5 main bearing cap.
126
l-Connecting rod bearing
DISASSEM'BLY AND REASSEMBLY
side, fit bearing shells to the big ends and to the

caps, oiling the shells as in the case of main bearing
shells. Have the pistons and piston rings adequately
oiled.
(a) Distribute the ring joints, as shown, and feed
the piston into the cylinder by using the piston
guide (A), positioning the piston in such a way
that the match mark provided on the connecting rod comes on camshafrside.
(b) Secure the four caps by'dightening the 8 cap
nuts to 8.5 0.5 kg-m (6L5 3.6 ft-Ib).
No.1 ring joint
3.(;ap
::n::
4-Nut 18 pcs)
Tighteningbig-end cap nuts
"
I)
Oil ring joint
(9) Check the side play of each connecting-rod big end

by barring it to one side and inserting a thickness
gauge into the clearance. If the clearance (side
play) measured exceeds service limit, the bearing
shells or connecting rod must be replaced.
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Standard
Precombustion-chamber side
Configuration of piston ring joints
Big end side play

,
0.15 ",:,0.35
(0.0059 ~ 0.0138)
ServiCe
limit
0.50
(0.020)
(10) Attach the front plate (I) (on which the injection
pump is mounted), and secure the plate to crankcase by tightening its two mounting bolts (2) to
2.1 kg-m (15.2 ft-Ib).
"II
2-Piston
", .
A-Piston guide
Inserting piston
(NOTE)
Before inserting the piston'and-rod combinations into the cylinders, have the cap bolts
studded in the big ends. Be sure to match each
cap to its big end as governed by the marks.
1-Front plate
2Bolt (2 pes)
Securing front plate to crankcase
(II) Insert the camshaft gently into crankcase. Secure

the camshaft thrust plate to crankcase by tightening its bolts with the wrench put to each bolt
head through the hole provided in camshaft gear:
the holes are indicated by the arrows.
127
:. I
.&J
CAUTION
When fitting the rear housing to the rear plate,
be careful not to allow the oil seal lip to fold
over, making iis spring to come off. The lip
portion is indicated by the arrOW.
:;: i
" i
(14) Drive dowel pin (I) into crank gear. Drive ball
bearing into flywheel- (2). Secure flywheel to
crankshaft through the crank gear by tightening
the four mounting bolts to 8.5 0.5 kg-m (61.5
3.6Ib-ft), with the lock washers inserted under
bolt heads. Lock the bolts securely by bending
the washers positively_
Installing camshaft
--""-- ~,~'
l-Dowel pin
Installing flywheel
Securing camshaft thrust plate to crankcase
(12) Fit the oil pump assembly to crankcase. Make

sure that drive gear and camshaft gear are correctly
meshed. Secure the pump in place as outlined in
OIL PUMP INSTALLATION.
(13) Position the oil pan on crankcase, and secure it by
tightening its mounting bolts evenly: there are
24 bolts to be tightened.
2-Flywheel
Starter
Removal and installation
(I) Disconnect from the starter the lead wire (I)
connecting starter-to the battery_ Disconnect, also,
the two wires (2) connecting starter to the starter
. :i.
l-Starter-tobattery wire
Oil seal in rear housing
2-5tarter-to-switch wire (2 pes)
Disconnecting electrical wires from starter
(2) Remove mounting nut (3) and bolt (4)_ Take down
the starter assembly (5) from the engine_
128
l,
[NOTEl
To install the starter, carry out the above two
steps in reverse or~er.
4-801t and washer
3Nut and washer
5Starter"assembly
Removing starter
I..,{J]
I
lBolt and washer

(2 pcs each)
2Switch
3Plunger
4Bolt and washer
(2 pes each)
5Rear bracket
6Yoke
7-Center bracket
aFront bracket
9-Armature
10Lever
11Lever spring
12Rubber packing
130verrunning clutch
14Pole piece
Starter - Exploded view
(I) Remove two bolts (1) securing the magnetic switch

to front bracket (8), and take off the switch (2).
lBolt and washer (2 pcs each)
2Magnetic switch
Removing magnetic switch
(2) From front bracket (8), remove plunger (3) com:

plete with rubber cover.
3Plunger with rubber cover
Removing plunger
129
(3) Remove two bolts (4) from rear bracket (5).
(6) From front bracket (8), draw outthe rotor, that

is, armature (9), rubber packing (12), lever (10), (
spring (II), overrunning clutch (13) complete with
pinion.
4-Bolt (2 pes)
Removing bQlts securing rear bracket
(4) Detach front bracket (8) from yoke (6) by tapping

lightly on the bracket. Separate rear bracket (5)
from yoke (6).
B-Front bracket
11Leve~ spring
g-Armature
12-Rubber packing
10Lever
13-0verrunning clutch
Separating front bracket from rotor
(7) Remove overrunning clutch (13) from armature
(9).
4-Bolt (2 pes)
6Yoke
5Rear bracket
S-Front bracket
Separating brackets from yoke
(5) Take out front bracket complete with rotor and

pinion from yoke. Remove center bracket (7) from
front bracket by-removing the bolts securing it to
front bracket.
13-0verrunning clutch
Removing clutch from armature
.&[ CAUTION l
Before drawing off the center bracket, tape the
splined portion of the shaft so that the oil seal
will not suffer damage as the bracket is moved
along the shaft for removal.
(8) To reassemble the starter, reverSe the foregoing
sequence of disassembling steps and refer to the
foHowing cross section:
.&[ CAUTION l
When installing the lever, be careful not to posi
7Center bracket
Removing center bracket

130
tion it the other way around. The correct position is clearly recognizable in the cross section.
.))
T
Jill
"
lYoke
2-Pole piece
3-Brush
4-Armature
5.(;enter bracket
6Plunger
7-Lever
...
aOverrunning clutch
9-Field coil
10-Bearing
l'-Front bracket
12-Rear bracket
13-Magnetic switch
Starter - Cross section
131
Alternator and regulator unit
(I)
Alternator removal and installation

(1) Disconnect wires between alternator and regulator
unit and disconnect ground harness (2). Loosen
adjusting plate bolt (3) and remove fan belt.
(2)
Loosen alternator bracket bolts (4) and remove

alternator assembly (5) from engine.
(3)
To install the alternator, follow the reverse of

removal procedure.
Pulling out through bolts (I) will pennit

removal of rotor (3) (with front bracket and
pulley) and stator coil (4) (with rear bracket).
t'Bol, (3 pc,)
2Front bracket
3Rotor
(2)
4-5t8tor coli
5-Rear bracket
6-Pulley
Hold rotor in a vice and remove pulley by loosening pulley clamping nut.
1Wires between alternator and regulator unit

2-Ground
3Adjusting plate bolt and washer

480Its. nuts and washers (2 pes each)
5-Alternator assembly
Alternator disassembly and reassembly
2-Front bracket
3-Rotor
(3)
'-801t (3 pes)
2Front bracket
4--Stator coil
7-Fan
SReST bracket
3-Rotor
6Pulley
8-Diode
g-Brush
Alternator - exploded view
132
Assemble alternator in the reverse order of dis

assembly. Place brush in brush holder and secure it
by passing a pin through a small hole vacated by
removing screw as shown. After assc"mbly, be sure
to pull out the pin.
Regulator unit removal and installation

The regulator unit is mounted on the inboard side of the
dashboard. To remove the regulator unit, undo the
coupler (I), remove mounting screws (2) and detach it
from the dashboard. Reverse these steps to install the
regulator unit.
J2043!1
(4) Apply a coating of sealer to the mating surfaces

between the stator and, rubber packing and those
between the front and rear brackets and rubber
packing.
(NOTE
lCoupler
Care should be, taken to install the rubber

packing to the stator properly.
3-Regulator unit
2-Mounting screw (2 pes)
Regulator unit in place

'Regulator unit disassembly and reassembly
For the purpose of servicing the regulator unit, the only
thing to be done is to remove its cover. Its internals are
not meant for disassembly.
',.-,
Regulator unit - Disassembled view
1-Rotor
2-Brush
3Bearing
4-Diode
5-Bearing
6Stator coil
7-Rear bracket
B-Front bracket
9Fan
10Pulley
Alternator assembly
133
MAINTENANCE
STANDARDS
(
j
Group
Nominal
Part or item
dimension
Maximum rpm (no-load)
2640. max.
Minimum rpm (no-load)
650
Compression pres.<;ure
"
Engine oil pressure
c"
Repair limit Service limit

[Clearance]
[Clearance]
Remedy
Remarks
Adjust governor.
700
20 kg/em'
(284.4 psi), min.
(at 150~200rpm)
16 kg/em' (227.5 psi)
3~4 kg/em'
(43 ~ 57 psi)
(at 1500 rpm)
2 kg/em' (28.4 psi)
1.0 kg/em'
(14.2 psi) min.
0"
Assembly standard
[Standard clearance]
Unit: mm (in.)
.
Oil and water temperatures:
20 ~300C (68 ~86F)
Oil temperature:
70C (158F)
0.5 kg/em' (7.1 psi)
(at idle speed)
Opens
30 BTDC
Closes
50 ABDC
Opens
74BBDC
Closes
30 ATDC
Intake valves
Valve
timing
Exhaust valves
Beginning of injection
J.D.
Cylinder
sleeves
:;:
0.35
Pistons. protrusion above

crankcase gasket cd :"Ilrface
- ,"
0.025 -0.060
[(0.0010 ~0.0024)J
o "
'"
[ 0.20 J
(0.0079)
No.2 compression ring
c "
Oil ring
4.0 (0.157)
1.20 (0.047)
Four sleeves should be fmished

to the same oversize. Hone
(0.0098) or 0.50 (0.0197) cylinder bore to
oversize with prescribed
98 -0.010 (3 858 -0.00039)
tolerance.
-0.045 .
-0.00177
Oversize pistons and piston and heat the crankcase.
rings should be used.
Press sleeves into crankcase
and machine each sleeve LD.
to assembly standard.
Hone sleeve to 0.25
[ 0.15 )
(0.0059)
:s:
Check bearing clearance.
2.0 (0.079)
,,~
'J:
0.75
0.04 ~0.08
J
[(0.0016 ~0.0031)
"0
c>
(0.0138~0.0295)

~
~
-oJ
+0.20
(+0.008)
Out-of-roundncss
+ 0.035~0
(+0.0014 ~O)
Taper
E
c
.;;;
94 (3.701)
0.Q15 (0.0006), max.
a.
c
'"
.;;
25 1
(Crank angle)
(1) Ring side clearance
Measure side ~
clearallce with
~
~gkept flush :3
Use pistons by replacing

piston rings up to service Wlth second
limit. Replace pistonswhen land.
service limit is reached.
c'"
c
~
.E
W/Q.
Z
-I
m
Z
z
(")
en
.-1
:'i
Pisto~~
~///////,
Straightedge
(2) Replace oil

ring togetJ.ter with expander.
Z
o
'"o
<J)
Unit: mm (in.)
co
Group
Part or item
'"c
.-""~6..'"
.50.
Nominal
dimension
Assembly standard
Repair limit
Service limit
[Clearance]
[Clearance]
0.30 -0.50
[(0.0118 -0.0197)J
1.5
[(0.059)
When oil"ring is compressed

to 94 (3.701).
Oil ring
Clearance in pistons
28 (1.102)
Clearance in connecting
rod bushings
Pistons, variance in weight per
0-0.016
[(0 -0.0006)J
Use pistons by replacing

piston pin, up to repair .
limit.
0.05 J
[(0.002)
rn
'0
e
'"
.;;
E
c:
'm
~
0.020 -0.051
[(0.0008 -0.0020)J
'"
.5
U
c
c
0
(big end bearing J.D.) (in

two directions at right
anglcs to each other with
bearing in place)
End play
.:::
Cl
ings. (Ream if necessary.)
5g ( 0.18 oz)
Use connecting rods by

58 (2.283)
0.035 -0.100
[(0.0014 -0.0039)J
40 (1.575)
[ 0.15 -0.35 )
(0.006 -0.014)
47 (1.850)
replacing bearings. up to
repair limit. Regrind
crankpins and use under'siZe bearings when repair
limit is reached .
[ 0.20 J
(0.008)
[ 0.50 J
(0.020)
Cap must be installed with
marks on cap and rod on

the same side.
Replace' connecting
rods or bearings.
0.15
(0.006)
0.05 (0.002)
Bent and twist

Center-to-center dimen.
sion between journals and
crankpins
'"en
Replace pistons or bush~
[ 0.08 J
(0.003)
Clearance on crankpin 0.0.
0.
0.05 ( 0.002)
0.01 (0.0004), max
Parallelism between crankpins and journals
as runout
Out-of-roundness of crankpins and journals
Variance in dia.:
.c
..::!c
~
Cl
3g ( 0.1 oz)
Variance in- weight per

engine
~
C"l
m
Z
engine
-i
m
Z
~
;;:
.z
Remarks
Remedy
s:
0.01 (0.0004), max
Taper of crankpins and

journals
Fillet radius
Variance in erankpinangles
3 (0.12)
0.03 (0.0012)
0.2 (0.008)
20'
".,.V.-'
...
'--
"'--"
e~
Runout (measured with 1st

and 4thjourna!s held in
0.02 (0.0008). max
Straighten or replace
crankshaft.
0.05 (0.0020)
"V" blocks
Replace bearings unless

repair limit is reached.
) Rcgrindcrankshaftjournal s
Clearance on crankshaft
:::m
0.
on
.;;c
0
c
.;;;
journal
~
.'"
~
.c
"
.;e
(in two directions at right

angles to each other with
75 (2.953)
0.05 -0.115
[(0.0020 -0.0045)1
[ 0.20 1
(0.008)
2.45 (0.097)
0.1-0.264
[(0.0039 - 0.01039)1
[ 0.30 1
(0.012)
bearing in place)
-0.9 (-0.035
(at crankshaft
journalO.D.)
Crankshaft end play
0.15 (0.006). max
0.50
(0.020)
0.05 (0.002). max
0.2 (0.008)
0.7 (0.028)
0.2 ( 0.008)
1.3 (0.051)
1.2 (0.047)
0.14 (:to.0055)
1.6 (0.063)
Valve guides, protrusion above

CYlinder head gasketed surface
17 (0.669)
0.3 (0.012)
Cylinder head gasket, as-installed

thickness
1.4 (0.055)
0.05 ( 0.002)
Flywheel. face runout and flatness
ru
'0
.S;
;;.
bearing caps as an assembly.
Replace thrust bearing.
Install dial gauge to flywheel

and measure face
runout with respect to
flywheel housing rear face.
Crankcase. warpage on gasketed

surface
'0
ru
0.25 (0.0098) or 0.50

(0.0197) when repair
limit is reached.
;:;;
:2
'"
.c
and usc undersize bearings Replace crankcase and
'"Jj
~
Regrind if warpage is
minor.
Warpage of gasketed
surface
45
Valve seat angle
----
'0
.5
>.
u
Valve sinkage
r-Valve seat width
()
Clcaroncc of
valve stem in
guide
.S;
~
~
m
ru
on
on
'E
i=
w
'"
Intake
valves
8 (0.315)
Exhaust
valves
s:
0.055 - 0.085
[(0.0022 -0.0033)1
[ 0.15 I
(0.0059)
0.070 -0.100
[(0.0028 -0.0039)1
[0.20 1
(0.0079)
;;
Rcplace both volve guide

and stem when service
limit is reached.
-I
m
Z
l>
(')
>
l>
Margin
1.5 (0.059)
Sinkage
0.7 (0.028)
Face runout of head
1.2 (0.0472)
after refacing
0.2 ( 0.008) .
0.Q3 (0.0012). max (perpendicular to valve face)
1.3 (0.051)
'"
~
o
l>
:D
--L---_______
-------
'"
Unit: mm (in.)
o
Group
Nominal
Part or item
.'"
.S
dimension
Assembly standard
48.85 (1.923)
Free length
As-installed length
Repair limit
Service limit
[Clearance]
[Clearance]
44 (1.732)
:>
22 (0.8661)
Tappets, fit in crankcase
c:
.;;;
--'"
"'"
Rocker arms. fit on rocker

shaft
20 (0.787)
0.Q35 -0.086
[(0.0014 -0.0034)J
[ 0.12 J
(0.0047)
dia.)
'"
Clearance of No.2 journal

in hole
i=
~
54 (z:J26)
0.016 -0.055
[(0.0006 -0.0022)J
. Replace bushing unless

[ 0.07 J
(0.0028)
Install bushing when

(Ream if necessary.)
0.040 -0.090
[(0.0016 -0.0035)1
[ 0.15 J
(0.0059)
!

in. hole
53 (2.087)
Clearance of thrust plate on

thrust journal
5 (0.197)
[ 0.05 -0.112 J
(0.0020 -0.0044)
46.916 (1.8471)
+0.1 (+0.00394)
-0.3 -0.01181
01-02 = 6.684 (0.26315)
Cam height
Intake
Exhaust
Camdia.
45.944 (1.8088)
;
End play
[0.3
J
(0.0118)
Replace thrust plate.

01
02
= 6.184
(0.24346)
~~:j (~g:gmi)
01 "':.f12
= 6.844
Replace camshaft.
0.02 (0.0008). max ..

36 (1.417)
0.Q25 -0.075
[(0.00098 -0.00295)J
0-0.1
[(0 -0.004)J
0.05 (0.0020)
[
0.1 J
(0.0039)
0.35
[(0.0138)J
ill
D2
(0.26945)
01-02 = 7..344 (0.28913)
40.232 (1.5839)
Runcut
Clearance of bushing on
shaft
""E
>
:tJ

in hole
c:
+0.10 (+0.004) Replace tappet unless

(at tappet hole repair limit is reached.
'E
(")
0.25 clearance may also be

obtained by warm setting if
intake and exhaust valves are
at the same temperature.
0.4 (0.016). max,
Valve push rods, bend
>
Z
Squareness of each end

with r~pcct to center line.
0.25 (0.0098)
(ccld setting)
Valve clearance
-;
m
Z
0.4 (0.016)/25 (0.98).

max.
Squareness
Remarks
Adjust by means of
shim(s) when repair limit
is reached.
>
;;
Remedy
47.6 (1.874)
43 (1.693)
:s:
>
Straighten or replace.
Replace bushing.
Repla.ce. thrust plate.
'-...,..
.."
~
'"
'"
c: c:
.-
E "co
f=~
:s
Clearance of shaft in bore

in crankcase
E
S
0-
"-
..
0
;:;
'"0
.~
Clearance of outer rotor

in body
Rotor and cover cnd
play
13 (0.512)
30 (1.181)
(0.04 ...; 0.09 J

(0.0016 -0.0035)
Replace gear.
( 0.15 ]
(0.0059)
0.20 - 0.28 ]
(0.0079 -0.0110) .
Replace pump case.
( 0.5 ]
'. (0.0197)
O.IS
(0.0059)]
( 0.013 -0.15
]
(0.0005 - 0.0059)
rotor clearance
"
0.25
(0.0098)
0.032 - 0.074
(0.00126 -0.00291)J
50 (1.969)
Inner rotor <!.Od outer
..0
0.009T - 0.045T
(0.00035T -O.OOI77TJ]
0.07 -0.20
(0.0028 - 0.0079)
Timing gear. backlash

Clcamncc of main shaft
in body
>
c:
30 (!.l81)
Reface case cover or case;."
( 0.25 ]
(0.0098)
.'
...J
'~"::;
Relief. pressure
"'~
Clearance of outer race in
pump casing
~
3.0 kg/cm'
(42.7 psi)
47 (1.850)
40 (1.575)
Oil pressure varies

0.15 kg/cm' (2.133 psi) per
I (0.04) of shim thickness.
0.3 kg/cm'
(4.27 psi)
Replace pump case or
0.011L-0.025t
(0.0004L -O.OOIOT)J
pump assembly.
'"
.S
""E
0~
Clearance of inner race on
O.OOIT-O.OI7T
(0.00004T - 0.00067T)J
pump shaft
0.
11
~
17 (0.669)
0.010 -0.022
(0.00039 -0.00087) 1
'"
sides)
~
'2 ..
~ :(
J::
~
'---
""
f-<
Carbon protrusion
Height (free length)
Replace bearing when it

does not rotate smoothly.
;:
Replace impeller or
bearing if vanes are
binding.
0.5 -I
(0.020 -0.039)
1.5 (0.059)
21.8 (0.858)
Valve opening temperature 76.5C(169fF)
Valve lift
Replace bearing.
O.OOIT-O.OI7T
(0.00004T -0.00067TJ]
Spacer, I.D.
Water pump impeller. vane-tocasing clearance (front and rear
J>
0.045
1(0.00177)]
Radial play
">
~
~
c:
"0
0.010-0.025
(0.00039 _0.00098)]
2::
z
-I
m
Z
l>
()
1-Floating seat (carbon)

2-5eal ring (ceramic)
I (O.04)
2C (3.6F)
m
C/)
~
Z
j;
9 (90C)
(0.35 (194F)1
:0
-_.- ~.--
----
--
--
oC/)
-~':
Unit: mm (in.)
-I>
N.
Part or item
Group
Nominal
dimension
Assembly standard

[Clearance] [Clearance]
Remedy
:s:
~
Z
-i
Remarks
g'E
:'::0.1
oo
Belt. tension
uZ:-
l>
Z
Deflect,ion:
12 (0.472)
m
(J)
Injection pressure
120 kg/em'
(1706.4 psi)
5kg/cm'(71.1 psi)
110 kg/em'
(1564.2 psi).
Adjust by means of
shim(s).
min.
N
N
"
Spray angle
;:;
:'
~
Needle valve scat oiltightness

Clearance of tappet roller
pin in pin hole
Seat shall show no sign of leakage under n pressure of
100 kg/em' (1422 psi).

0.013 -0.071
[(0.0005 -0.0028)1
0.033 - 0.085
[(0.0013 -0.0033)1
Roller 00
0;
::>
15 (0.591)
0--0.027 (-0.00106)
0-
Airtigh tness
"
"~
0-
No parts shall show sign of lcnkage.

Leakage between rod housing should be'
not more than 50 cc (3 cu in.)/min.
0.0075
Close pump discharge port

with a plug. Apply an air
0;
"-"
Number of strokes for
pumping (priming pump)
Number of strokes for

pumping
25. max.
45 seconds, max.
Replace nozzle tip when

needle surface is scratched
or scored.
(-0.00295)
See Assem bly

Standard.
30
50 seconds
pressure of 2 kg/em' (28 psi)

to the pump, and keep the
pump immersed in diesel fuel
. longer than 1 minutes.
Operate priming pump
handle at a speed of 60
strokes/minute. Check the
number of strokes requied for
making the pump start dischaging at a head of 1 meter.
Operate injection pump at
ISO rpm to check the length
of time required for the feed
pump to start discharging.
"------
o(J)
max1
u.
Wash needle valve seat

or replace nozzle tip.
:oJ
Total play:
[0.3 (0.0118).
7 (0.276)

on roller pin
'">-
~
~
10 kg/em' (142.2 psi) per

0.1 (0.004) of shim thickness.
Test by means of hand

tester, using dieseHuel
at. 20C or 68F approx.. Spray.of fuel oil should
If spray pattern is imP
be uniform and consist
proper even after nO,zzle is of nne droplets.
washed in clean kerosene,
replace nozzle tip.
"
.
Injection pressure varies
""
"
0;
E Capacity
"-
0-
Canl height
-0.2
(-0.0079)
0-+0.1
(0 - +0.0039)
32 (1.260)
Axial play of camshaft

bearing
Clearance of tappet pin in

tappet (hole)
0.013 -0.050
[io.0005 -0.0020)1
0.03 -0.05
J
(0.0012 -0.0020)
">-
~
~
~
-.;
"
u..
0-
0-
.9
.-'2"
0;
Check cam surface for

condition.
.
Total play:
[0.3 (0.0118),
0.033 -0.078
[(0.0013 -0.0031)J
max.]

on floating bushing
11 (0.433)
0.050 - 0.097
[(0.0020 -0.0038)1
Tappet roller 00
17 (0.669)
0--0.027
(0 --0.0011)
-0.075
(-0.00295)
Plunger Free length

springs As-installed length
49 (1.929)
+1-0 (+0.039-0)
-0.5(-0.020)
Re;place tappet com

plete.
44 (1.732)
Backlash between pinion

and rack
Replace camshaft.
Adjust by means of
shim.
[0.1 (0.004)J
: 7 (0.276)
Clearance of tappet floating
bushing on tappet pin
Check displacement with

injection pump operated at
IOOO rpm with a discharge
preSSUIe of 1.5 kg/cm 2 (21 psi).
600 ee (37
cu in.)/min,
min.
900 ee (55 eu in.)/min,

min.
0-
[ 0.25 1
(0.0098)
[0.15 (0.0059)1
Rack sliding resistance
150 g (5.3 oz) with pump at standstill

SO g (1.8 az) with pump funning at
1000 rpm
Free length of delivery

valve spring
32 (1.26)
0.5 ( 0.02)
1.95 (0.077)
0.05 ( 0.002)
"-
Plunger pre-stroke
-1 (-0.04)
:s:
Pump speed Rack position Strokes
rpm
mm
mm
8.5 (0.335)
1000
200
Fuel injection quantity
8.0 (0.315)
1000
200
"'w"
6.0 (0.236)
..
200
500
Injection quantity
cc (cu in.)
7.2-7.8
(0.44 - 0.48)
Variance
cc {cu in.}
0.4
(0.02)
(0~39
6.4 -7.0
- 0.43)
0.4
(0.02)
5.0 -8.0
(0.31-0.49)
1.0
(0.06)
.2
-i
Mount injection pump on

'pump tester arid allow
pump to inject.
()
::Il
oen
Unit: mm (in.)
""""
Nominal
dimension
Part or item
Grout
Assembly standard
Repair limit I Service limit
[Clearance]
Remarks
Remedy
[Clearance]
;::
1::
-I
In
'2
.- 0-
I Fuel injection quantjty
d: 6-
Test oil:
IClearance of swiveling
lever shaft in bushing
Clearance of tension
lever or guide lever
Clearance of control
lever shaft bushing on
shackle connecting pin
0;
"
I"-
11 (0.433)
[0.15 (0.0059)J
8 (0.315)
[ 0.013 -0.05 J
(0.0005 - 0.0020)
[ 0.10 )
(0.00394)
Replace pin and lever if pin hole

is worn abnormally or worn to
show any stepP7d portion.
0.005 -0
[(0.0002 _O)J
[0.10 (0.0039
Replace control lever or

shacklc.
0.Ql5 - 0.056
[(0.0006 -0.0022)J
[0.08 (0.0031)J
Replace shackle or control

rack.
5 (0.197)
Replace control block or guide

lever if chromed tip of control
block is worn down.
I Guide lever and control

block
>
0
Replace spring if hook is

badly v,:orn.
" I Control spring

.e~
-;;
" I Flyweight roller O.D.
16 (0.630)
oC
0
::;
Clearance 01 UYWClght
-0.11 -0
0.0043 -0)
[ 0.025 -0.062
-0.25
( 0.0098)
Clearance of torque control
8 (0.315)
lever bushing on support pin

Step
Item
High~speed
control
Control by adaptor
action
0:10
[(0.00394)J
0.026 -0.056
[(0.00102 -0.0022)J
Adjusting lever angle
I
Replace flyweight.
(0.00098 -0.00244)
roller on roller pin
'-
ASTM Diesel fuel No.2
Replace bushing or swivcllevcr.

Replace "0" ring and oil seal
when replacing bushing.
Clearance of shackle pin

in control rack hole
~
()
In
[ 0.016 -.o.Q7 J
(0.0006 -0.0028)
support pin in pin hole
E
E
>
ND -DNOSD
Injection pipe:
6 x 1.6 x 600 (1/4 x 1/16 x 23-5/8)
Injection pressure: 120 kg/em' (1706.4 psi)
Delivery pressure: 2.0 kg/em' (28.44 psi)
;:;
0:;
Test conditions
Nozzle tip:
e
.
Replace lever.
Pump rpm
Np.rpm
47 SO
1100
1230
1290
SlOSO
400
650
Control rack position
RW.mm
8.2 0.1 (0.3228 0.0039) at full-load stopper

7.0 0.1 (0.2756 0.0039) at initial lever setting
~ 4.0 (0.1575)
10.4 0.1 (0.4094 0.0039)
8.8 0.1 (0.3465 0.0039)'
_I
'-.
:D
o(/)
Adjusting lever angle
:;
E
">
~
~
0:;
"
u..
.""'"
Pump rpm
Total injection qt. cc (cU' in.)! 500
Np. rpm
strokes. 4 cyl.
Matching: with engine
51 <) S
"'u
top lever operatIon
I The stop lever

i
Shaft
"
E
c.
':;
0-
"
-;;
.""
~
""
iii
Voltage (V)
Current (A)
23
50, max.
4500,
min.
700, max.
Rear
Intermediate 'metal
Front
Bracket shaft
14 2 -0.050
. -0.077
142+0. 027
. -0.016
(0559 -0.0020)
.
-0.0030
(0559 +0.0011)
.
-0.0006
122 -0.050
. -0.077
122+0. 027
. -0.016
(0 480 -0.0020) (0480 +0.0011)

.
-0.0030
.
-0.0006
206+0. 02
. -0.08
(0.811 +0.0008)
-0.0031 .
20.3
0
-0.033
0
(0.799 -0.0013) .
mm
Magnetic switch operating voltage
Load operation
Rpm
Metal
- 0
Current (A)
Rear
torque spring
mUl't operate picciscly. When the stop lever is pullcd with the high-speed
Voltage (VI
Front
"
2 (2.4409 0.0787) with
control lever :1~rr .. Np = l200 rpm, the rack must be drawn up to Rw -
No-load operation
c:
62
1200
:lj
81 2 (3.1890 O.0787) with adaptor spring
600
"
in
"
>
~ tl (0.4331)
5."5 0.1 (0.2165 0.0039) at initiallcvcr setting
5.0 0.1 (0.1969 0.0039) with '\lb-spring
200
275
330
High-speed control
lever angle MINUS
260 3
Low-speed control
Torque
4 kg-m (29
ft-1b), min.
Switch IN
16V. max.
Switch OFF
When circuit
is opened.
Brush
Commutator 0.0.
service limit
Height
Wear
Spring compression,
kg IIbl
43.2
(1.701)
19 (0.75)
Service limit: 13 (0.51)
2 (4.4)
6
(0.236) Service limit: 1.5 (3.3)
s:
2
(0.079)
-;
S
c
!l
::;:
No-load operation
(battery connected)
Terminal
voltage(V)
28
'"'"
Current
Load operation
(battery + resistance load 12.SA connected)
(AI
Rpm
1100, max.
Terminal
voltage(V)
28
Current
(AI
12.5
Rpm
1900,max.
Rear
Ball bearings
#6201
#6303
Front
20C
Field resistance (SSoF)
z
()
::j
27 (n)
:ll
'"
Unit: mm (in.)
./>
OJ
Part or item
Group
Nominal
dimension
Assembly standard

[Clearance]. [Clearance]
Voltage regulator
Lamp relay
1.0 -1.4
(0.039 - 0.055)
0.9 -1.4
(0.035 - 0.055)
0.3 (0.012), min
0.75 -1.1
(0.030 -0.043)
Remedy
;:
1::
z
-i
Remarks
m
Z
z
()
m
Air gap
.9-
"
0'
~
"S
"
iIi
'c,
Contact point gap
(f)
i!z
~
:rJ
",
"
"'"
'"
Back gap
No-load voltage (V)
Cut-out voltage (V)

Cut-in voltage (V)
o(f)
0.75 -l.l
(0.Q30 - 0.043)
27.5 - 30.5 at 3000
rpm (alternator speed)
------6.5 -7.5
S.max.
. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Item
Cylinder head bolts
Unit: kgm (ftlb)

Item
Torque
12 0.5
(87 3.6)
Torque
Oil pan drain plug
10.0 0.5
(72.3 3.6)
Main bearing cap bolts
10.4 0.5
(75.2 3.6)
Oil pump connector
5.5 + 0.5
(39.8 3.6)
Connecting rod cap bolts
8.5 0.5
(61.5 3.6)
Nozzle holder retaining nuts
5.00.5
(36.2 3.6)
Flywheel bolts
8.5 0.5
(61.5 3.6)
Injection pump delivery valve holders
3.0 + 0.5
(21.7 3.6)
Flywheel housing bolts
3.5 0.5
(25.3 3.6)
Camshaft thrust plate bolts
1.8 0.5
(13 3.6)
Front plate bolts
1.8 0.5
(13 3.6)
Timing gear case bolts
3.5 0.5
(25.3 3.6)
Crankshaft pulley nut
40 0.5
(290 3.6)
Idler thrust plate bolt

Oil pan bolts
3.5 0.5
(25.3 3.6)
0.7
(5.1)
147
APPLICATION OF SEALERS
Apply to:
148
Mating part
Sealer
Main bearing caps
Crankcase bearing caps
SUPER THREE BOND No.5
Side seals
Crankcase bearing caps
SUPER THREE BOND No.5
TROUBLESHOOTING
i..:
l,
r,
i'"
,
i
,I
"f
j-
I:
i
i
f
!
,
! , ' , ,','
'
'.--. . . .
<
',;,,',,',,'
I'
;- <
.".
"-,.'
:;',
'.'
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART (1)

Engine "".i11 not start
Engine lacks
power
>.
Engine turns
but does
not start
Complaint
'"E
0
t;
0
'"""x
0
-0
t;
'"
""x
'""
.!1 ~
,E~
'ii0 ~
t;
o '"
"
E 0
~ I-~
-..:
>.
>.
';J
~ 0
c"
Ee ,="'" "c" E"
<> .~
C
c"'~
0 ~
'';:: ..... .!<
~
J:l
c c
~ "
B
ti
~
0
;;,
".0 2
Possible cause
Engine does
not turn
(;
c
-0
.0
"-0
" i3
.0
(;
c
c
"
0
8 -0"E
" " ,-"c'""c

,~~
(;
c
0
-0
~
'"
-0
~
~
.g,
a
0
" C.
C.
~
1!'" 2
w " wu
~
"""
"
~
~
>-c
.g
0
150
,-::: to>
t;
'""
"''''
"' ,='" '""x
'"" '" E 'ii
"" "".::2 "
E E ~II E.ll c {l
0
.0
0
0
"
~
"
.::::: .!<
,- 0
"..:
.0
~ ~ I- E
"' ~
t;
'"0v
'B".
"
~.~
"
'" E "' E
'"
.c
'"
,, 2"
0
,~
'""c "c "c
.'"
,='" "e0:2 0
',. ',. ',. '""

c
c
.c
"
variance of injection qll<lJltity
Defective injection pump

seals
--
Insufficient injection
quantity
Excessive injection
quantity
Improper fuel spray from

injection nozzles
Injection timing too

advanced
Injection timing too

retarded
Defective auto timer
Defective governor
control spIing
Maladj\lsted governor
dainper spring
Engine speed too low
Failure of engine to stop

properly
Poor grade of fuel oil
Poor grade of oil
Oil viscosity too low
Oil viscosity too high
Low oil pressure
Excessive oil leakage
Pumping up of oil
Low pressure at high

atomospheric temperature (or altitude)
to_o.hi~h
Defective oil indicator

switch or lamp
t;
.0 Clogged oil filter

" Defective oil bypass
-'
alarm or lamp
",
"
"""
,~
t!>-
,~
lnsufficient air
Poor compression
.~
Fuel viscosity
.c
V)
u.
""
""
.c
Excessive fuel return from

E injection nozz.les
0;
'"
>.
-,;
Gr~ter
>~
When
operating
t;
Engine
hunts
"- "-
Insufficient fuel supply to

injection pump,
t;
Abnormal exhaust smoke
OJ
OJ
OJ
"'- "'
TROUBLESHOOTING
(. For detailed information refer to the separate chart.)
Abnormal
Defective
water ternalternator
1---,--,----1 perature rise 1----.--1
Defective lubrication system
Remedy
0--
o -
---0--
Check and replace if necessary.
-0-0--
-0-0--
-0----
0--
o -
Replace nozzle tips.
-0----
----
-0----
Check and replace spring if

necessary, Then adjust governor
setting on bench.
Adjust.
-
Adjust idling set bolt. Hold lever

in STOP position.
0-----
o -
Use fuel for cold weather.

Use good quality' oil.
---- -
------.-
----
--0--0
Use proper viscosity oil.
0-0--
Use proper viscosity oil.
Retighten and replace packing
if necessary.
Change element and oil.
o
o

.
o ----
--0----
o
-
-0----
(Adjust fullload setting

of governor.)
151
TROUBLESHOOTING
Engine
hunts
Complaint
Possible cause
Engine is too cold.
Radiator dissipates heat
excessively
Insufficient coolant
Failure of radiator to dis

sipate heat properly
.s
"0
Water leak through

cylinder head gasket
o -
o -
- -
- -
Cracks in crankcase water

jacket
Defective startcr switch
Defective starter magnetic _

switch
Defective starting motor
"Defective starting motor

free Wheel
Defective flywheel ring
o -
~ gear and pinion
Battery voltage drop
Open circuit in glow

plugs or pilot lamp
0--
Short circuit in glow

plugs
o - -
Detective alternator
Defective alternator
relay
Improper wiring
Jammed moving parts
~
i!.
~
.~
-0
Worn cylinders, pistons

or piston rings
Sticking piston rings
o -
Excessive main bearing

clearance
Loose connecting rod cap

bolts
Interference between
valve and piston
o
o
Broken valve springs

Excessive valve clearance
Foreign substances in
cylinders
Excessive gear backlash
152
o
o
o
o
TROUBLESHOOTING
( For detailed information refer to the separate chart)
Defective
alternator
Remedy
-0--
__
-
----~--O--o
----
Heat oil pan from bottom side at

starting. After starting, warm up
engine thoroughly, ,',
Retighten and replace gasket

if necessary.
----0-
Replace crankcase.
Check for connections and repair.

Replace if necessary.
Repair or replace if necessary.

Repair or replace.
-~--
Repair or replace starter

if necessary.
------
Repair or replace ling gear.

Replace pinion.
---- -
0-----
Recharge or replace battery.

If necessary heat it.
Replace.
----
-----
o
0-0
0--
0--
o o -
0--
Replace copper packings and

if necessary glow plUgs.
Replace alternator if necessary.
Adjust or replace.
Connect wires properly.
Repair or replace.
Repair or -replace.
Check and replace bearing(s) with
undersize one(s) if necessary.
Retighten.
Re-time timing gear train or
adjust valve sinkage properly.
o -
0--
Replace.
Adjust valve clearance to 0.25 rum
(0.0098 in.).
Repair.
Replace gears or idler bushing.
153
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART (2)

Possible cause
Poor fuel supply to fuel

injection pump
Greater variance of injection

quantity
Remedy
Closed fuel tank suppJy cock.
Open the cock.
No fuel in tank
Fill fuel tank.
Clogged fuel lines
Repair or clean fuel pipes with air.
Air in fuel system
Retighten connections or replace

fuel pipes.
Clogged fuel feed pump inlet

strainer
Remove and clean strainer.
Defective fuel feed pump
Repair.
Leaky fuel lines or connections
Retighten connections.
Clogged fuel filter
Disassemble and clean filter.
Air in fuel system
Bleed air out of fuel system
Jammed plungers
RepJace plungers.
Jammed tappets
Replace tappets.
Worn plungers
Replace plungers.
Worn tappet cams
Replace tappet cams.
Worn bearings
Replace bearings.
Worn or broken plunger springs

Loose plunger pinions
Replace plunger springs.
Reinstall properly by matching
marks.
Insufficient injection quantity
Excessive injection quantity
Defective delivery valves
Replace valves:
Worn or broken delivery valve

springs
Replace valve spring.
Governor stop lever link is
Straighten link, placing
binding.
lever in neutral position.
Control rack is sticky.
ReIubricate or repair.
Jammed plungers
Replace plungers.
Jammed tappets
Replace tappets.
Worn plungers
Replace plungers.
Worn tappet cams
Replace tappet cams.
Worn bearings
Replace bearings.

marks.
Improper fullload setting of

governor
Adjust governor setting on

bench.
Stop lever jammed in "increase"
Repair lever link, placing lever
position.
in neutral position.
Improper full-load setting of
Adjust governor setting on bench.
governor
'154

marks.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Remedy
Possible cause
Improper fuel spray from

injection nozzles
Injection timing too advanced
Sticking needle valve in one

or more nozzles
necessary.
Repair and replace nozzles if
Damaged nozzle tip seats
Repair and replace seats if necessary.
Worn or broken nozzle springs
Replace nozzle springs.
Too Iowan injection pressure
Adjust pressure to l20+1gkg/cm '

(1706.4 + 14 psi) on nozzle
tester by inserting shim(s).
Carbon deposited on packings

at nozzle tips
Remove carbon.
Improper instalIation of fuel

injection pump
Re-time properly by tilting injection

pump away from engine.
Incorrect installation of timing

gears
Re-time timing gear train.
Improper installation of fuel

injection pump
Retime properly by tilting injection

pump toward engine.
Re-time timing gear train.
Injection timing too retarded
Incorrect meshing of timing

gears
Worn cams, tappets or bearings

in fuel injection pump
Poor grade of fuel
Low oil pressure
Use good-quality fuel.

Waler in fuel
Use good-quality fuel.
Lack of oil in oil pan
Add oil to prescribed level.
Air in oil strainer
Rep!.;ce damaged pipes or packings.

Retighten loose connections if any.
Defective oil pump
Repair.
Clogged fuel lines
Clean.
Defectiveoil pressure regulating valve
Repair and replace if necessary
Clogged oil mter
Change element and oil.
Leak in lubricating system
Repair.
Drain oil to lower oil level.
Excessive oil in oil pan

Worn cylinders, pistons or
piston rings
Pumping up of oil

Worn valve guides
Prolonged operation under no
load
Insufficient air
Replace.
Repair and replace parts if

necessary
Repair and replace damaged rings
if necessary.
Replace valve guides.
i Overhaul engine if oilladen gases
I
are exhausted.
Clogged air cleaner

(Paper element type)
Clean and replace element if
Clogged air cleaner

(Oil bath type)
Wash interior.
Clogged intake manifold
Check and clean.
155
TROUBLESHOOTING
Possible cause
Poor compression
Remedy
Defective valve seats.
Repair.
Sticking valve stems
Repair and replace valve stems

if necessary .
Failure of rocker arms to

lift valves
Adjust valve clearance to 0.25 mm

(0.0098 in.).
Repair and replace parts if
necessary .
Worn cylinders, pistons or

pist on rings
Replace damaged rings.
Exhaust gases leak through

cylinder head gasket
Retighten and replace gasket if

necessary.
Worn or broken valve springs
Replace springs.
Insufficient torque of starting

motor (at starting)
Replace parts.
Add water to prescribed level.
Overheating
Failure of radiator to
dissipate heat properly
Water leaks from unit seal of water

pump
Replace seal.
Crack in crankcase water jacket

Water leaks from other parts
Replace crankcase.
Check and repair.
Air in cooling system
Bleed air by loosening air bleed

plug, drain plug, or hose clamp.
Rust and scale deposited in

radiator
Flush.
Dust and dirt around radiator
Flush.
Slippage of fan belt
Adjust belt tension.
Inoperative thermostat
(kept closed)
Replace.
Extremely low atmospheric

temperature
Radiator-dissipates heat
excessively
Jammed moving parts
156
Uncovered radiator
Cover radiator.
Inoperative thermostat
(kept open)
Replace.
Sticking cylinders, pistons

or piston rings
Repair and replace if

necessary.
Sticking main bearings and

crankpin bearings

necessary.
Sticking cam bushing and

idler bushing

necessary.
SPECIAL
SERVICE TOOLS
.. ,.
)
@
MODEL 60~95
158
Ref.
No.
Part number
Tool
Qt.
Used for:
3449100400
Valve guide installer
Valve guide installation
3139110500
Valve guide remover
Valve guide removal
3139113010
Valve seat caulking tool

(intake valve)
Valve seat installation and caulking
3139113020
Valve seat caulking tool

(exhaust valve)
Valve seat installation and caulking
30691]J 100
Adaptor
Test pressure gauge installation
3449100200
Piston guide
Piston installation
MH0610nOI
Idler shaft puller
Idler shaft removal
30691]J 800
Cranking handle
Engine cranking
3449100300
Socket
Camshaft thrust plate removal

and installation
10
3449100100
Cylinder sleeve installer
Cylinder sleeve installation
]J
3009101101 or
commerciallyavailable
Universal extension
Injection pump removal and

installation
12
3139112900 or
Piston ring tool
Piston ring removal and

installation
13
6430912900 or
Puller assembly
Removal of crankshaft
gear, camshaft gear,
crankshaft pulley and water
pump pulley
14
3009107300
Idler bushing puller
Idler and camshaft bushing removal

and installation
15
3089104500
3089104600
Adaptors
Idler and camshaft bushing removal

and installation
159
Tool application chart

~
;;;
~
~
!!
I<
~>
Jl
Used for:
11
'0
'3
'0
.~
>'" E
"t:
~
'"
B
rt
'"><
~
rt
'0
'0
rt
So
~
:"
a.
~ g~
;;
Tool
1 3449100400
Valve guide
installer
2 31391-10500
Valve guide
remover
3 31391-13010
Valve seat insert

. caulking tool
(intake valve)
Valve seat insert

caulking tool
(exhaust valve)
31391-13020
5 30691-11100
Adaptor
6 34491-00200
Piston guide
7 MH061077-01
Idler shaft
puller
8 30691-11800
Cranking handle
9 34491-00300
Socket
10 34491-00100
30091-01101 or
II commerciallyavailable
Cylinder sleeve
installer
Universal
extenSion
31391-12900 or
12 commercially:..
Pjston .I,~g tool
available
>
.,
~
E
0
~
'0
~
~
'"
'0
.:::
~~
:..
~
il'
's. ~
'"a. '"a.
il
'"
'"
.~
~ .:::'" .:::'" .::: a.E
6 .S '" 'li '"
1!
~
~ II
~
0.
t:
~o
Jl1i
u~
.S.o
~~
!!~
.cu
""~
~.t
'0
~
'0
.:::
'"
~
<'!
2E
i>' "'0
'il
>
.~
"" "" "" @
"" ~
~"" 0 ~ a"" ~"" .5
t: .~ 'il
E
tl
t: t; t; I<
t;11 tl
.5 I>: .5 .5 .5 .5 Cl !-< .5 a. .5
0
Part No.
:S
'0
'il .!j'"
.:::
~
~
'"
'" '"i>' .::: .::: '"
'" ;g'" S 'li 12
'" 0
~
~ .5
.S
a.
-S
>
E
~
~
~
tl
rt
!3 tl
;;;
~
'li
E
.ll
:s!
f
~
.S
!3
"'0
@~
)30
~g
.S "
-g. fi
'0
~
~
~'"
.~ .~"" .5""> .~ .~ .-"" "" .-""~""

0
0
0
0
0
~.s b.S
E E E E E E'li E'"
.5 ~ ~ I>: I>: I>: 1>:.0 ~E
~~
~ ~
~~
1
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
64309-12900 or
13 commerciallyavailable
Puller assembly
14 30091-07300
pulJer
Adaptors
15
160
30891-04500
30891-04600
Idler bushing
Valve guide installer and remover
prescribed position. The remover is for driving the guide

out of the hole.
The installer is for use in driving the valve guide into the
guide hole in such a way that the guide will take its
Ie
17
55
Material: S53C
Valve guide installer (part number: 3449100400)

0.. 5
1\
- 1-.
8'
""'"
30
.- I-
J
B
11
"j
158
188
Matenal: S53C
Valve guide remover (part number: 3139110500)
How to use
' V -_ _~I
.. :.
...
-::::
'Installer
2-Valve guide
3-Cylinder head
A17mm (0.67 in.)

'Remover
3Cylinder head
2-Valve guide
161
Valve seat caulking tools

These tools are for use in driving valve seat (2) into
cylinder head (3) and, after fitting the valve, in caulking
the peripheral edge of the valve. There are two caulking
tools, one for intake valve and the other for exhaust valve.
Each comes with a caulking ring, and is to be used in
two directions, one for driving and the other for caulk-.
ing.
Do not chamfer
~t
;;;
W~~$
/
...\,0
~
IF"lII
Grind.
14
16
50
:!
80
M<O
_N
'"
:r
'.
0
N
150
. Mater ial: SK5 or SK7
1~
!;:
70
~o
N
q
&~
<;'0 'T'T
Valve seat caulking tool (intake valve) (part number: 31391-13010)

'00 not chamfer
;;;
~1
...<;'0
w//ffdffp>~
<0
. ~I
16
50
.;
'"
80
MM
_N
qq
N
q.
00 <;'0
I I
Grind.
14
!;:
70
'"
:r
~o
qq
'T'T
'.
0
N
. 150
Material: SK5 or SK7
Valve seat caulking tool (exhaust valve) (part number: 31391-13020)
How to use
I
33 (exhaust)
Ref.
No.
Part number
31391-13010
Valve seal
(intake valve)
caulking tool
31391-13020
Valve seat
(exhaust valve)
caulking tool
42 (intake)
CD
Tool
5
Cylinder head
\b'-.::::,;:::n=,~~r. gasketed surface
Adaptor
This is a connection fitting to be used in installing the
test pressure gauge in the glow plug hole for the
purpose of reading the compression pressure.
l-Caulking body
2.valve
3-Cylinder head
4.valve guide
5-Caulking ring
Installing and caulking valve seat
162
Ml0X 125
M14 X 1.5
~ ~~J
'"
00
00
f\:
19
"
0.5(
~ ~~~~ / \
fO
731
19
30
21
10
M1 ~
(l)
'\,
13
39
45
15
60
Mater ial:SS41
Adaptor (part number: 3069111100)

How to use
Piston guide
~T'~c-
Use this tool when inserting the piston into cylinder.

It protects pistons and piston rings against damage, and
facilitates the feeding in of the piston.
....
tf~
~t\~-
t~
Test pressure gauge installed with the adaptor
'02
.50
~
~
=
,,~g:
Material: STKM12A 0 r13A
'04
Piston guide (part number: 3449100200)
163
How to use
Idler shaft puller

For drawing out the idler shaft, one of the liming gear
parts.
Inserting piston into cylinder

16.2
MIOX 1.25
50.'
1.5e
~Fo~
;;
VO A;? I
~o.,'
"
I-'J,
MIOX 1.25
'"
MIOX 1.25
44 J..shhah)
o~
I
~
~
~
ro
rT
\g
!N.
-.......
MI
I.5e
ro
~.,
"
SO.
Detail3
Sl
Material: S43C
Details 1, 2
5Z.
Material:
lSTKMllA
2SS00P
Idler shaft puller (part number: MH0610n01)
164
w"
~
,I
How to use
Set tile puller over the idler shaft (4), run the stud (3)
into the shaft, and drive nut (5) to force the shaft out by
jacking action.
:t ]: :
Cranking handle
Thh tool is for turning over crankshaft, as in valve
elearance adjustment and others. Its hexagonal hole fits
the crank pulley securing nut.
.
........ .
"
"
l-Crankcase
2Puller
3-Stud (M10)
:.' .:
','
.::
:- :.'
4ldler shaft
5-Nut
Removing idler shaft
~--;,'\.
\(
~I
~~3~7~'~==============4===================~
t
Material: SS41
Cranking handle (part number: 3069111800)
165
How to use
Socket
This tool is for use in tightening the
camshaft thrust plate (through the
camshaft gear), and also the shorter
for securing the rocker brackets.,
torquing the glow plugs, too.
bolts to secure the

holes provided in
ones of the bolts
It can be used in
Turning over crankshaft

O.4,MAX
.---~
17
11
45
45
40
85
Material: SCM3
Socket (part number: 3449100300)
How to use
Tightening shorter bolt on rocker bracket
Securing the camshaft thrust plate
166
Cylinder sleeve installer

For use in driving replacement sleeve into the cylinder.
.
100
+0.05
0
/2C
It
::>.
30'
~ ~
90
i-
92.5 +0.1
0
38
I
IMatenal. S43C
Cylinder sleeve installer (part number: 34491-00100)
Universal extension
How to use
Insert the sleeve installer (2) into sleeve (1), and push on
the top end of the installer with a press arbor to force
the sleeve into cylinder (3).
The fuel injection pump unit is mounted on engine front

plate, as secured by two bolts. Thi.s extension tool is for
bringing the wrench head to these bolts.
l-Cylinder sleeve
2-lnstaller
3Cylinder
Pressing replacement sleeve into cylinder
II
II~. A..'\
! : II
!\ J
: I
1 I
1 I
'Y
14 -to.3
l.1
70
Material: SK7
Universal extension (part number: 30091-01101)
167
.. .
- "
How to use
Puller assembly
For use in removing crankshaft pulley, water pump
pulley, crankshaft gear, camshaft gear and injection
pump gear.
9801t and washer
Tightening injection pump mounting bolts
Piston ring tool

For usc in filting piston rings to and in rcmoving them
from t:!C piston.
Size of pulley to clamp

Diam. (MIN) X Width (MAX)
(;LLI_ )
40mmXl10mm
Piston ring tool (part number: 3139112900)
150 mm X 80 mm
Puller assembly (part number: 6430912900)
How to use
Idler bushing puller

For use i.n. removing and inslalling idler bushing and
camshaft bushings, when necessary.
1-Compression rings
2-0il ring
APiston ring tool
Removing piston rings
168
i
.'
PULL side
PRESS side
Material: SK7
NOTES: 1. indicates dimensions after plating.

2. Quench and temper (HRC 40""" 50).
Idler bushing puller (part number: 3009107300)
Adaptor
For use in removing and installing idler bushing and
camshaft bushings, when necessary.
O.5e
45
3
Material: S541 B
Material: 8S41 B
(part number: 3089104500)
(part number: 3089104600)

Adaptors
169
( \I
!
I
.'--:
( \I
,
I
I
Printed in Japan
SERVICE MANUAL
MITSUBISHI
TRACTOR
TRACTOR SHOVEL
BD2F
BS3F
DIRECT POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT
FOREWORD
,,
manual are based on information that was current at the time this issue was
written.
Correct servicing will give this machine a long productive life. Before
the respective sections of this manual, and know all the components you will
work on.
do. By learning what CAUTION or WARNING symbol emphasizes, know
specific instructions on a job, and the safety equipment required.

conditions:
[ NOTE ) ............... An operating procedure; condition, etc.,
which it is essential to highlight.
&[ CAUTION) ........ Operating

in damageto or destruction of machine.
WARNING
Operating procedures, practices, etc.,

January 1978
.,".-
i
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
, ,
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
Description .......................................... . . . . . . .. 3
Damper ........................................ , ........... 4
Transmission ... ,.................................... , . . . . . . .. 5
Operation .................................. ............. . 6
Hydraulic control circuit for the transmission. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8
Gear shifting .............................................. 9
Inching operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9
Safety interlock between engine starting and tramsission ............ 10
"

Troubleshooting . '.............................................
, Testing and adjustment ................................... , ....
, Preliminary steps ...........................................
Trouble diagnosis by oil pressure readings .................. '......
Testing the control valve unit ..................................
Bench test criteria for transmission oil pump ......................
Adjustment of control linkage for steering clutches ......... '.......
Adjustment of steering clutch brakes ............................
Clutch pedal adjustment ...................... , ...............
DPS control lever adjustment ............................. ,.....
13
16
16
16
19
20
20
22
22
23
Bolt tightening torque .......................................... 26
Transmission ................................................ 26
Transmission control valve ................................,.'..... 28
DISASSEMB-LYAND REASSEMBLY
Transmission
Removal ..................................................
Disassembly ................................................
Transmission case and flanged end (disassembly and reassembly) ......
REVERSE section (disassembly and reassembly) ..................
FORWARD-HIGH section (disassembly and reassembly) ............
LOW section (disassembly and r,eassembly) ........................
Transfer gear (disassembly and reassembly) ........................
33
34
34
37
41
46
48
. ,." J
Control valve unit

Disassembly and reassembly .................................. 52
Valve housing (disassembly and reassembly) ...................... 53
. Accumulator valve (disassembly and reassembly) ................... 53
Main relief valve (disassembly and reassembly) .................... 54
Safety and pilot valve (disassembly and reassembly) ................ 54
Clutch valve (disassembly and reassembly) ........................ 55
Directional selector valve (disassembly and reassembly) .............. 56
Speed selector valve (disassembly and reassembly) .................. 57
Special service tools ............................................ 58
OPERATING
PRINCIPLE
i
---I
.OPERATING PRINCIPLE
DESCRIPTION
clutches (7), right and left. Two tracks (9) are driven by
the final drive gears.
Power developed by engine (1) is conveyed through

damper (2) and propeller shaft (3) to transmission (4).
The engine and damper case are coupled together

integrally. Four rubber mounts of antivibration sleeve
type are used to support the engine at four places.
In the transmission, power is modified in terms of speed
and torque through the combination of multidisc

hydraulic clutches and planetary gears providing two
forward speeds and two reverse speeds.
From the transmission output shaft, power flows to
final drive gears (8), right and left, through singlestage

reduction transfer gear (5), bevel gear (6) and steering
Specifically, the engine crankcase rests on these mounts ,

two on each side.
The -transmissjon and transfer gear are housed in a

single case. Tllis case is rigidly bolted to the front face of
the steering clutch case.
1-Engine
2Damper
3Propeller shaft
4-Transmission
5Transfer gear
6-Bevel gear
7-Steering clutch
8-Final drive gear
9-Track
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
DAMPER
fonning two sets, and serve to absorb torsional shocks.
The damper resembles a conventional disc clutch; it

has a hub splined to the shaft and a disc bolted to the
flywheel and carrying friction plates (2) and coil springs
(1).
Six cOi,l springs (1), arranged in circular direction, are
located between the disc and the friction plates (2)
The shocks contemplated in the design of this damper

come in two directions: from the engine as when the
engine is quickly accelerated or decelerated and from the
ground through the power line. By absorbing these
shocks, the damper protects gears, bearings and shafts.
'-":
.~.
1Coil spring
2~Friction
plate
3-Flywheel
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
TRANSMISSION
The principal working parts of the transmission are
four sets of epicyclic (planetary) gearing, each set being
complete with a multi-disc hydraulic clutch, a control
valve unit (not shown in the below cutaway view), an oil
pump and filter, and two shafts (input and output)_
,-REVERSE clutch
7-Sun gear
13Mating plate
2-FORWARO clutch
3-SECOND (high) clutch
4FIRST (lQw) clutch
8-Ring gear
g-Carrier
14Piston
5-lnput shaft
6-0utput shaf!
lOPlanet gear
l1-Housing
15-Return spring
16-Transfer gear
17-Bevel pinion gear
12-Friction plate
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
Operation
(2) If the carrier is held standstill, the ring gear
To understand how power flows from input shaft to

output shaft in the_transmission, it is ne~essary to bear
in mind the rel~tive motions of the sun gear, planet gears
or pinions and ring gear.
The sun gear rotates; the carrier revolves; and the
planet gears rotate on their own shafts or pins and

revolve with the carrier, on which they are mounted.
--.j
(1) With the sun gear driving the planet gears, the
carrier revolves in the direction of sun gear rota
tion if the ring gear is held standstill. in other

words, the directions of carrier and sun gear are
the same.
revolves counter to the direction of sun gear

rotation.
There are four sets of planet gears, three for each set.
There are five ring gears, of which one is a link between
REVERSE planet gears and FORWARD car~ier. FOR
WARD carrier and HIGH carrier may be regarded as
constituting a single integral piece. HIGH ring gear links
HIGH planet gears to LOW carrier.
In the clutch, friction plates are engaged with external
splines of the ring gear, and mating plates (stationary)
with internal splines of the housing. The pressure plate
is next to the piston.
l-AEVERSE clutch
7Sun gear
2FORWARD clutch
a-Ring gear
g-Carrier
3HIGH clutch
4LOW clutch
1OPlanet gear
5lnput shaft
6-0utput shaft
12-Frictio~
l1-Housing
plate
13Mating plate
14-Piston
15Return spring
16-Transfer case
17-Bevel pinion gear
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
Planet gear
Input -!!-.,.-+-....f~-I--+-.,.-g..-Output
Planet .ea" -~4

carrier
...g~\+---\~ Sun gear
Ring gear
Planet gearing in reverse operation
-. i
The longitudinal cross section of the transmission,

shown above, serves to explain the flow of power for
FORWARD LOW drive. Assume that input shaft {5) is
running. FORWARD and LOW clutches are erigaged, so
that their ring gears are seized and dO not revolve. Sun
gear (7) will drive pinions (10) and, since ring gear (8) is
seized, carrier (9) will revolve in normal direction (which
is the same as that of sun gear).
Carrier (9), HIGH pinions, HIGH ring gear (free) and
LOW carrier revolve together, in the direction of input
shaft. Since LOW ring gear is seized, LOW pinions have
to "walk" on the.internal teeth of this ring gear; they
rotate on their own pins. By this rotation; they necessa
rily drive LOW sun gear on output shaft. Consequently,
output shaft rotates in the direction of input shaft but
with a reduced speed.
If HIGH clutch is engaged, instead of LOW clutch as
above, HIGH ring gear remains standstill, so that HIGH
(2nd) pinions have to drive HIGH sun gear on output
shaft. By the same token, output shaft runs in the
direcHon of input shaft but with a slightly higher speed
than before (FORWARD LOW).
The two modes of power. flow just explained are
schematically shown in these diagrams:
FORWARD HIGH drive

Let's see what happens if REVERSE clutch is engaged
(with FORWARD clutch disengaged), with input shaft
running as before. In tltis case, REVERSE carrier is now
sci zed and remains standstill. Its pinions meshed with
linking ring gear drive FORWARD carrier (9) in reverse
direction. Why reverse? Recall rule (2). What were said .
of HIGH and LOW planetary gear sets in 'connection
with FORWARD drive apply to REVERSE drive.
REVERSE LOW drive
I nput ~f-:,.....t---{l~---1I--r.Hr- Output
REVERSE HIGH drive

Note that the inner end of output shaft is piloted in
input shaft. The outer end of output shaft carries the
transfer pinion meshed with the transfer gear, which is
splined to the shank of bevel pinion.
Input
Output
FORWARD LOW drive
'''To engage the clutch" is to admit, through the

control valve, pressurized oil into the chamber back of
the piston. By. the admitted oil, the piston pushes on its
pressure plate to compact the friction plates and mating
plates together. liTo disengage the clutch" is to relieve
this pressure; when the pressure is removed from the
piston, return springs push the piston back to loosen the
stack of plates.
How the pressurized oil is selectively directed by the

control valve unit to the respective transmission clutches
is the main point of the subsequent topic.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
Hydraulic control circuit for the transmission
lStrainer with magnet

20il pump
30il filter~
40il cooler
5-Maln relief valve
6-Directional selector valve
7~Speed selector valve
eAccumulator valve
9-Clutch valve
10-Pilot valve
11-Safety valve
12-Main orifice
l3-Lubricatlon relief valve
14Transmission oil pan
15FORWARD clutch piston chamber
16LOW clutch piston camber
17Clutch valve plunger

18Return spring
19FORWARD-REVERSE oil port
20Clutch valv~ spool
21Lubrication circuit
22Check valve
Hydraulic circuit diagram
Oil filter (3) is installed on the front face of transmis

sion case, If the differential pressure across its element
rises to and above 2.0 kg/cm' (28.4 psi), a warning lamp
lights up and the bypass circuit opens to pass the oil
around the element, thus ensuring the adequate oil
supply to the control valve unit.

Oil pump (2) is driven from transmission input shaft;
it is mounted on the front end of transmission casco
The control valve unit comprises main relief valve (5),

directional selector valve (6), speed selector valve (7),
accumulator valve (8), clutch valve (9), pilot valve (10)

and safety valve (II).
Oil cooler (4) is located at the lower section of the
radiator.
Before we go into the discussion of the functional
aspects of control valve unit, it may be proper to take
. note of the purposes served by main components of
control valve unit.
MAIN RELIEF VALVE (5): Discharge pressure of oil

pump is limited by this valve.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
ACCUMULATOR VALVE (8): The rise of oil pressure

in the clutch piston chamber upon shifting the control
lever is cushioned by this valve to smoothen clutch
engagement.
provided in valve (8) and direct into the piston chambers,

thereby expediting the pressure build-up in these chambers: this may be spoken of as "rapid filling up of the
piston chambers.with oil."
CLUTCH VALVE (9): Oil pressure in, the piston chamber of an engaged clutch is reduced by means of this
valve when inching action is desired. This valve helps the
engine avoid stalling in the event of overloading or
quick halting.
[With the pushing back of valve (8), pilot valve (10)

too yields to its spring force and moves back to block
the circuit bypassing main orifice (12).]
PILOT VALVE (19):. This valve directs ihe full discharge

flow from oil pump to directional selector valve (6) to
improve the response of clutch valve (9).
SAFETY VALVE (II): It is by this valve that the engine
is prevented from starting up ifAhe transmission control
lever is inLOW (FIRST) or HIGH (SECOND).
As chambers (IS) (16) get filled up, pressure begins

to rise again to force valve (8) to push its spring.
Consequently, the path of oil changes in this valve:
instead of flowing through the bypass oil hole, the oil
starts flowing through main orifice (12). Because of
"throttling action" of' this orifice, the final pressure
build-up in the piston chambers is slowed down: this
action is spqken of as "modulation." In each clutch, the
piston exerts the irlitial engagement force with this
Gear shifting
"modulated" pressure.
"Gear shifting" may be a wrong tenn for tlus DPS

transmission for the selective cutting-in of epicyclic gear
sets is accomplished by selectively engaging hydraulic
clutches, but the term will be used to conform to
convention.
The clutches are now fully engaged. Accumulator

valve (8) moves farther to the end of its stroke and,
concurrently, pilot valve (10) compresses its spring and,
by this compression movement, opens the bypass circuit
to apply the full main pressure to the clutch pistons.
Thus, the clutches become fully engaged to seize and
hold FORWARD ring gear and LOW ring gear: power
now begins to flow in the manner illustrated in the
"FORWARD LOW drive" diagram.
How the valves mentioned above operate will be

described on the assumption that the control lever is
shifted into FORWARD LOW from 'neutral. We will
start out with the building up of nonnal oil pressure in
the circuit.
As the engine starts up (with speed selector valve (7)
in neutral position), oil pump (2) begins to deliver oil.
This oil (actually oil pressure) reaches selector valve (7)
through filter (3), relief valve (5), safety valve (II), main
orifice (12), accumulator valve (8) and clutch valve (9).
As the pressure builds up in tltis path, accumulator
valve (8) moves to the end of its stroke against the force
of springs: this acti?fl is equivalent to pressure accumula~
tion. Consequently; pilot valve (10) moves against its
spring to form a circuit'bYl,assing the main orifice (12).
If the pressure rises to and above 20 kg/cm 2 (284 psi),

relief valve (5) bleeds out the excess pressure, spilling the
oil out toward the oil pan (14) through oil cooler (4).
Similarly, if the pressure in the lubrication circuit (21)
rises to and above 1.4 kg/cm 2 (20 psi), relief valve (13)
operates to relieve the excess pressure, thus preventing
an excessive oil flow in the lubrication circuit.
Now, we operate the control lever to shift selector

valve (6) into FORWARD and selector valve (7) into
LOW. The moment the lever is so slufted, the pressure
accumulated in valve (8) applies through clutch valve (9)
and a port of valve (7) to piston chambers (15) (16)
designated as (CF) and (C I), respectively.
FollOWing this, the spring pushes back accumulator
valve (8), so that the oil flows through the oil hole
To summarize, oil pressure is applied to the piston

chamber in three steps: 1) Full-flow oil is supplied to
the piston chamber (to result in a drop in main pressure);
2) tile subsequent pressure build-up in the chamber is
"modulated" or slowed down as the clutch begins to
engage fully; and 3) full main pressure appUes to keep
the clutch engaged. This sequence holds true for the
other three modes, too, of shifting, namely, FORWARD
HIGH, REVERSE LOW and REVERSE HIGH.
Inching operation
Clutch plunger (17) is connected to the clutch pedal.
An inching operation (for driving the machine extremely
slowly) is controlled by means of this plunger to reduce
the pressure in the FORWARD or REVERSE clutch
chamber, without affecting the main pressure applying
to the HIGH or LOW clutch chanlber. How this is
accomplished will be explained by assuming that both
FORWARD clutch and LOW clutch are in full engagement (in sequel to the foregoing description of "gear
shifting" to FORWARD LOW).
As you push inward plunger (17) against its spring,
spool (20) begins to throttle port (19). (This port is for
FORWARD and REVERSE clutches.) At the same time,
plunger (17) opens its drain port, so that the pressure in
FORWARD clutch chamber leaks out. By throttling
port (19) and opening the drain port more or less, you
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
can control the chamber pressure within the range from

5 kg/cm' (71 psi) d;wn to 0 kg/em'. This is for
permitting clutch plates to slip moie or less.
Consider speed selector valve (7) under this condi
tion: tlus valve is on the upstream side of clutch valve
spool (20). For this reason, the above movement of
clutch valve (9) due to the actuation of plunger (17)
does not affect the full main pressure applying to LOW
clutch chamber, so that this clutch remains engaged.
If you should depress the clutch pedal all the way,
port (19) becomes closed and, with the drain port wide
open, the pressure in FORWARD clutch chamber falls
to zero, thereby disengaging this clutch. Under this
condition, the flow of power through the transmisslon
is interrupted.
This graph illustrates the change in a directional
clutch chamber (FORWARD or REVERSE) pressure as
a function of plunger (17) stroke.
18
22 (Stroke end)
Plunger stroke (mm)
Clutch valve characteristic
The graph tells that, if the plunger is pulled out (by

releaSing the clutch pedal), the chamber pressure will
jump from 4 to 20 kg/cm' (57 to 284 psi) (full main
pressure). This rise (which is needed when you want to
quickly re-engage the clutch) occurs when plunger (17)
is quickly pulled out, because the bypass circuit through
accumulator valve (8) and pilot valve (10) is wide open.
The moment the plunger moves out, the full main
pressure applies through this bypass circuit to FOR'
WARD clutch chamber. If, on the other hand, plunger
(17) is slowly pulled out, valve (8) and valve (10) jointly
perform "modulation," as explained before, to allow the
clutch to engage gradually.
reach the main orifice (12): In other words, the pressure

for engaging the directional and speed clutches is not
available to the selector valves (6) (7). Port (G) is communicated to one of the ports of speed selector valve (7).
Starting up the engine (with the control lever in any
of the operating position) results in a rise of pressure in
the line (from oil pump) to port (E). As you shift the
controllever back to neutral, selector valve (7) displaces
itself to neutral position, and communicates the oil
pump discharge line to port (G) through its ports. Oil
pressure thus applied to port (G) pressurizes the chamber
(D) through orifice (A) and check valve (C). Consequently, the valve shifts into state shown in the schematic (b).
In the new state, port' (E) and port (F) are communicated sO that the pump discharge pressure applies to the
selector valves (6) (7) through the normal path. The
transmission can now be controlled in the usual manner.
Shifting the control valve to an operating position
(with the engine running in the normal manner) displaces
the selector valve (7) and bleeds out the pressure applying to port (G), but safety valve (11) remains in state (b)
because its check valve (C) stays seated to trap the
pressure in chamber (D), to which the pressure in port
(E) applies through orifice (B). It will be seen that, as
long as the pump is runrling, safety valve (11) stays in
state (b).
After the engine is shut down, it takes some time for
safety valve (11) to return to state (a) from state (b).
;Re-starting the engine immediately or re-starting before
valve (11).has returned to state (a) is liable to jolt the
machine because of the connection explained above.
This means that the transmission control lever should be
shifted back to neutral before stopping or re-starting the
engine.
State (a)
Safety interlock between engine starting and

transmission
Oil pump M'
Selector
-II
' am on ce .
valve
The function of safety valve (11) built in the control

valve unit is to prevent the machine from rolling off
upon starting up the engine when the transmission
control lever is off neutral. Were it not for this feature,

the machine could suddenly jerk in standing position as
State (b)
the engine is started up.
Note the schematic (a), in which safety valve (10) is

shown in "blocking" state, the state prior to the starting
up of the engine. Ports (E) and (F) are not in communication, so that the oil pump discharge pressure does not
10
Se Iector va Ive
Oil pump
Main" orifice
Safety valve operation
TESTING
AND
ADJUSTMENT
<.'J '-::; :.:;~

'1
...
I
~
TROUBLESHOOTING
"
any combination of these. These measures are
Trouble in the DPS transmis-sion shows up in one or

more symptoms. What symptoms to contemplate and
how to cope with each are tabulated in TROUBLE
SHOOTING GUIDE.
In the "Remedy" column of the TROUBLESHOOT

ING GUIDE, suggested measures are in many cases
disassembly, repair, replacement, or adjustment, or
meaning~.
ful" only when the serviceman is versed with various

methods of testing and inspection. Along the line of lhis
thought, the methods of lests and adjustments are
annexed to the GUIDE to cover I) DPS transmission
proper, 2) conlrol valve unil, 3) transmission oil pump,
4) steering clutch and brake control,S) clutch pedal and
6) DPS control lever.
Troubleshooting guide
Symptom
Possible cause
Remedy
Drive is lost on one or
A. Low oil pressure.
more gears.
I) Not enough oil in the oil pan.
1) Reml.
2) Loose, broken or maladjusted control

linkage.
2) Repair or readjust.
3) Damaged oil pump.
3) Overhaul or replace.
4) Air is being sucked into pump.
4) Check packed joint in pump

suction and repair or replace.
5) Internal oil leakage in control valve unit

due to wear or failure of sealing members
such as piston seals and "0" rings.
5) Disassemble and repair or replace

defective parts.
6) Main relief valve is internally dirty with

alien matters stuck in sliding clearance,
or is out of adjustment.
6) Overhaul. Correct its pressure

setting.
7) Oil is too low in viscosity.
7) Use Class CD oil (engine oil) of

API classification, whose viscosity
rating is SAE lOW.
B. Mechanical failure.
Transmission clutches
grab, resulting in jumping
start or jolt on gear shift
ing.
I) Broken transmission shaft.
1) Disassemble and replace.
2) Seized or bound clutch piston, friction

plates or mating plates, resulting in
reduced clutch capacity.
2) Disassemble, repair or replace.
C. Malfunctioning neutral safety valve.
Overhaul or replace.
1) Accumulator valve is not working as it

should.
1) Disassemble and repair or replace.
2) Pilot valve is malfunctioning.
3) Oil viscosity is too high.
3) Use SAE IOWoil.

"
Slow standing start or

slow respon~e of trans
mission to shifting.
1) Clogged orifice in control valve unit.
1) Disassemble and clean.
2) Not enough oil in the oil pan.
2) Refill.
3) Control linkage out of adjustment.
3) Readjust.
4) Air is being sucked into oil pump, due to
4) Retighten or replace packing.
loose packed joint in suction line.
5) Faulty seal ring on clutch piston.
6) Damaged "0" ring in the path of oil to

clutch piston.
13
Symptom
Not enough output.
_Possible cause
I) Engine is not delivering enough power.
I) Retune the engine.
2) Not enough oil in transmission oil pan.
2) Refill.
3) Air is being sucked into oil pump,
3) Check the packed joint and replace

packing as necessary.
4) Sticking or bound spool in mairltelief

valve.
. 4) Disassemble and repair or replace.
5) Weakened spring in main relief valve.
5) Disassemble and replace the spring.
6) Worn-down oil pump.
6) Replace.
7) Strainer or filter is clogged.
7) Clean or replace.
8) Badly worn clutch piston ring or "0"

ring.
9) Water in oil.
Transmission does not

shift into neutral, or
remains on even when
clutch pedal is pressed
fully.
Remedy
.8) Disassemble and replace.

9) Change oil.
10) Control linkage out of adjustment.
10) Readjust.
II) Slipping clutches due to low main

pressure.
11) Readjust.
12) Damaged clutch piston.
13) Dragging wheel brakes.
13) Readjust.
I) Control linkage out of adjustment.
I) Readjust.
2) Burnt clutches.
2) Disassemble and replace burnt

parts.
3) Clutch piston, friction phites or mating

plates are bound.
4) Clutch valve is seized and does not move
into draining position.
Abnormal oil tempera-
5) Oil level too high or too low.
5) Adjust to the prescribed level.
I) Air is being drawn into oil circuit.
I) Relightenjoints and conneclions,

replace gaskets, or check oil level
and add oil, as necessary.
2) Water in oil.
2) Change oil.
3) Burnt or worn bearings.
4) Indicaling instrument out of order.
4) Replace.
5) Dragging clutches.
5) Replace friction and mating plates.
6) Clutch valve linkage out of adjustment.
6) Readjust.
7) Dragging wheel brakes.
7) Readjust.
8) Continuous overloading of the machine.
8) Avoid abusive use of the machine.
I) Safety valve is not functioning.
I) Disassemble and repair or replace.
2) Shift control linkage out of adjustment.
2) Readjust.
ture rise.
Loss of safety function of

the hydraulic interlock
(safety valve).
14
Symptom
-'-(
Poss_ible cause
Remedy
Main pressure is too high.
I) Main relief valve is out of adjustment.
1) Overhaul and adjust.
(This is not a symptom; it

is a finding obtained by
checking with pressure
gauge.)
2) Internal oil passage in main relief valve

is clogged.
2) Overhaul and clean.
3) Bound or sticking main relief valve.
3) Overhaul.
4) Wrong tind of hydraulic oil.
4) Use oil meeting the specifications.
Transmission responds too

slow to shifting.
1) Clogged oil strainer or filter.
1) Clean or replace.
2) Worndown oil pump.
2) Replace.
3) Main relief valve out of adjustment.
3) Readjust.
4) Bound or sticking main relief valve.
4) Overhaul.
5) Air is being drawn into oil circuit.
5) Retighten joinls and connections,

replace gaskets, or add oil to oil
(This is the symptom of

main pressure being too
low.)
pan.
6) Oil leakage from loose joint or connec

-tion.
6) Inspect and repair, replacing "0"

rings and seals a-s necessary.
Clutch oil pressure is

abnormally low when
clutch pedal is in released
condition.
1) Main pressure too low.
1) Refer to the procedure immediate

lyabove.
(Transmission responds too slow
to shifting.)
(This is not a symptom; it

shows up as slow response
of transmission or as
slipping clutch.)
2) Sticking spool in clutch valve.
2) Overhaul.
3) Clutch pedal control linkage is out of

adjustment.
3) Readjust.
Clutches grab even when

clutch pedal is pressed
gently.

adjustment.
1) Readjust.
Machine picks up speed

too slowly even when
clutch pedal is released
sharply.
2) Clutch valve out of order.
2) Overhaul.
3) Overhaul.

adjustment.
1) Readjust.
2) Clutch valve is out of order.
2) Overhaul.
3) Overhaul.
15
[NOTE]
How to test the DPS transmission proper, in the

event of ;any of the transmission difficulties listed in
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE, will be described. Each
test is for narrowing the scope of investigation, and is.
based on taking pressure readings at the control valve
unit.
To find whether transmission clutches are in

slipping condition or not, proceed as follows:
Preliminary steps
a) Start up the engine and keep brake applied

by locking the brake pedal in depressed
condition.
b) Pick up speed and shift the lever to F2
(FORWARD HIGH).
Inspection
(l) Make sure the oil is up to levei in the transmission
oil pan.
c) If the engine stalls upon shifting, it means

thatF2 clutch is not slipping.
(2) Inspect the transmission and oil lines for oil

leakage and correct or repair leaking points, if any.
To double-check, see how long it takes for

the machine to come to a complete standstill.
If it takes longer than 3 seconds or if the
machine continues to roll, it means that clutch
is slipping.
(3) Be sure that the clutch pedal linkage and control

lever linkage are in good adjustment.
Driving test
Drive the machine in the normal manner and try all
modes of operation, namely, standing start, inching,
acceleration, deceleration, braking, etc., in order to
verify the difficulties complained of by the user.
d) Repeat step b) for the other gear positions.
Trou ble diagnosis by oil pressure readings

The following information augments the TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE, and teaches, on the basis of
pressure reading, more specific possible causes. Three
test pressure gauges are needed: one for M port, one for
D port and one for S port of the control valve unit, on
which threaded plugs are provided. Remove these plugs
and tie the pressure gauges to the threaded holes at
which the pressures of the three ports can be sensed.
1. If the transmission refuses to shift:

Operating difficulty and pressure
1) No shift to FORWARD or
REVERSE, or to HIGH or LOW.
M port pressure: Nonnal
D and Sport pressures: Abnormally low [not higher than
10 kg/em' (142 psi))
2) No shift to all gears.

M, D and S port pressures: All
low [not higher than 10
kg/em' (142 psi))
16
Remedy
Possible maldondition
a) Ruptured clutch piston sealing.
a) Disassemble, and replace_
b) Ruptured control valve gasket.
b) Disassemble, and replace.
c) Absence, of "0" ring or broken

"0 ring in the pipe between
transmission case and clutch
housing.
. c) "Disassemble, and install "0" ring

or replace broken one.
d) Oil hole blanking ball is off.
d) Fit ball by driving.
a) Broken oil pump.
a) Replace.
b) Clogged oil passage between

strainer and pump, between
pump and line filter or between
filter and control valve; or
leakage
b) Investigate and clean clogged part

by flushing; or repair leaking
point.
c) Sticky or binding main relief

valve.
c) Disassemble, and clean.
3) No shift to all gears.

M port pressure: Normal
D and S port pressures: Both
gone (0 kg/cm')
4) No shift to FORWARD or .
REVERSE, or to HIGH or LOW.
M, D and S port pressures are
all normal.
Possible cause
Neutral safety valve in malcondition due to weakened spring,
foreign matter stuck on valve seat,
Remedy.
Disassemble, clean by washing, and
repair or replace. Weakened spring
must be replaced.
or sticky valve.
Clutch plates are burnt or the friction-material surfaces are lost due
to peeling.
Disassemble, and replace.
If FORWARD clutch plates are

burnt and seized:
Machine rolls off on FI andF2
but engine stalls on RI and R2.
If LOW (1st) clutch plates ate
burnt and seized:
Machine rolls off on FI .n.d RI
but engine stalls on F2 and R2.
2 If the machine jerks on shifting:

Possible cause
Remedy
I) Indicating hand of pressure gauge Accumulator valve is sticking, or

jumps momentarily from 0 to 20 . orifice is clogged.
kg/cm' (284 psi) on shifting to
any gear.
Wash valve body, check the bore for

damage and, as necessary, repair
valve and bore to make the valve
move smoothly.
2) Indicating hand of pressure gauge

jumps momentarily from 0 to 20
kg/cm' (284 psi) on shifting to
s~me gears.
a) Clutch piston is sticking.
a) Disassemble and repair or replace.
b) Accumulator valve is sticking, or

orifice is clogged.
b) Refer to I) above.
3. If the transmission responds too slowly to shifting:

NOTE: Normally the machine rolls off within O.S second in standing start.
OpeH;ting difficulty and pressure
Remedy
Possible cause
I) Lag is large in shifting from N to

a) Sticking accumulator valve.
I and from N to 2; but is normal b) Weakened spring of accumulator
in shifting from I to 2 and 2 to I.
valve.
Indicating hand takes 2 seconds
or more in deflecting from 0 to 20
kg/cm' (284 psi).
a) Refer to 2.1), above.
2) Indicating hand takes longer

time than normal to deflect
from 0 to 20 kg/cm' (284 psi)
upon shifting to some gears.
a) Broken clutch sealing.
a) Disassemble and replace.
b) Absence of HO" ring or damaged
b) Disassemble and install "0" ring

or replace broken one.
"0" ring in the pipe between

transmission and clutch housing .
b) Replace.
17
4. if the transmission responds erratically to the clutch pedal:

Remedy
Possible cause
I) With the pedal depressed, the

clutch remains engaged.
A. Pressures at M, Sand D
ports are all normal.
A. Clutch plates in FORWARD or

REVERSE clutch are seized.
A. Disassemble and replace.
B. M and S port pressure: Both

normal
B. a) Maladjusted control linkage.
a) Readjust.
b) Clutch valve out of order.
b) Overhaul.
D port pressure: Does not

drop to kg/em' .
2) Releasing the pedal after fully

depressing causes the machine
to jerk in standing start.
M and S port pressure: Both
normal
D port pressure: Rises but not
smoothly as the pedal moves
in releasing direction.
Clutch valve is sticking.

NOTE: If 8;mm (O.3I.in.) dia. rod
is positioned the other way
around, the clutch valve
will not function properly.
Disassemble and clean by washing.

Replace 3'piece spool as necessary.
Be sure the 8mm (0.31.in.) dia. rod
is correctly positioned.
3) Releasing the pedal quickly fails

to make the machine pick up
speed quickly: the machine
starts off slowly.
A.M port pressure: Normal
D port pressure: Changes

in the normal manner.
A. Foreign matter stuck on check

valve seat, or sticking check
valve.
A. Disassemble and clean.
B. Pilot valve is sticking.
B. Wash valve body. Check accumu

lator valve orifice for damage.
Replace valve and body as neces
sary.
S port pressure: Momen

tarily drops upon releas
ing but returns to 20
kg/cm' (284 psi)
B. M port pressure: Normal

D port pressure: Changes
-in the normal manner.
S port pressure: Normal
(does not drop).
NOTE: Be sure the slug is correctly

positioned. With the slug
mispositioned, the pilot
valve behaves as it were
sticky.
18
S. If the transmission overheats easily or does not give enough output power:
Operating
di~ficulty
Remedy
Possible cause
and pressure
"
1) Overheating tendency
A. Pressures at M, D and Sports
A. a) Too much oil in the oil pan.
are all normal or slightly lower.
b) Not enough oil in the oil pan.
D. Pressures are normal at, all

ports.
B. a) Clutch plates are tending to
a) Lower the oil level.

b) Raise the oil level.
a) Disassemble and replace.
seize.
b) Mechanical damage inside the

transmission.
b) Overhaul.
2) Not enough output power
A. Pressure are low at all ports,

M, D and S.
A. Not enough oil in the oil plan.
Add oil.
B: Pressure are normal at all

ports.
B. ") Engine is tobl"me. '.
a) Retune, the engine.
b) Mechanical damage inside the

transmission.
b) Overhaul.
NOTE: Normal steadystate pressiJre is prescribed to be 20 kg/em' (284 psi) for the three ports,
M, D and S. An abnormally high steady.state pressure means (1) the main relief valve
being sticky, or (2) the spring of this valve being weakened.
INOTE]
Testing the control valve unit

The following procedure is for determining whether
the control valve unit is operating properly, without
regard to the transmission, by checking the oil pressure
at the three ports mentioned previously. Connect three
pressure gauges to the threaded holes provided in the
valve unit body. These holes are normally closed with
plug screws indicated as 1,2 and 3.
When running the transmission and control

valve unit on the bench in order to break it in,
be sure to form an oil cooler bypassing circuit
by connecting the two, flexible hoses, one
leading to the cooler inlet and one leading from
the cooler outlet.
a
a
o oJ
Connection 3 for 0 port:
Pressure for FORWARD and REVERSE clutches
Connection 1 for M port:
Main oil pressure
Connection 2 for S port:
Pressure for HIGH and LOW clutches
19
Pressure designation
Pressure requirement
Port and gauge connection
M port; PF 1/8" connection with

"0" ring
Main pressure
.
With engine running at high idling speed and

control lever kept in neutral, this pressure is
required to be within this range:
118 -22 kg/cm' (256 -313 psi)

If not, adjust the setting of main relief valve by
increasing or decreasing the thickness of its shim.
High and low clutch
pressure
Forward and reverse

clutch pressure
Sport; PF 1/8" connection with

"0" ring
With engine running at high idling speed, this

pressure is required to remain at a level not lower
by 2 kg/cm' (28.4 psi) maximum than the main
pressure.
D port; PF 1/8" connection with

"0" ring
With engine running at high idling speed, this

pressure is required to take the following value:
okg/cm' for both clutches with control lever in

neutral.
2 kg/cm' C28.4 psi) or less below the main pres
sure, with control lever in HIGH or LOW.
Shifting clutch
pressure
Sport
NOTE: This pressure is transient.
It is to be checked when
the lever is shifted from
neutral to any gear, or
from one gear to another.
Clutch pressure is required to change between

the two values stated above, namely, 0 kg/cm'
and a level 2 kg/cm' (28.4 psi) or less below the
main pressure, in the stated period of time:
Shifting
Time
N to LOW
HIGH~
1.4 0.2 seconds

LOW
0.4 0.2 second
Bench test criteria for transmission oil pump

Direction of rotation
Hydraulic oil
..
Clockwise Cas viewed from

drive gear side)
En~ne
oil, SAE lOW,

50 5C (122 9F)
Pump drive speed
2000 rpm
Discharge flow and

pressure
32 liters (1953 cu in.)/minute

at 20 kg/cm' C284 psi)
Adjustment of control linkage for steering

clutches
The steering clutch lever controls both clutch and
brake on each side. The linkage must be so set that, as
the lever is pulled through its full stroke, the clutch
becomes disengaged or released first and the brake
applies next. These requirements, in terms of the posi.
tion of the lever tip as measured from the edge of the
dashboard, are specified.
1Steering clutch lever

2Stopper bolt
3-Rod
4Lever
5-Rod
20
6-Clevis
7Adjusting nut
8Clutch yoke
gBrake band
I.
Lever position for releasing the clutch
al (horizontal)
Model
a2 (edge-to-tip)
BS3F
22lmm (8-3/4 in_) 289 mm (11-3/8 in.)
BD2F
239 mm (9-3/8 in.) 295 mm (11-5/8 in.)
(2) How to adjust clutch lever play and distance

bl,b2,Cl,C2-,dl andd2:
The following tabulated procedure assumes that
the requirement on distance a (for clutch releasing
position) is accurately satisfied.
(1) How to adjust distance al or.a2

(a) Remove floor plate. Loos"ri'lock nut (I) .
. ".
(b) Turn stopper bolt (2) to adjust the distance

between dashboard edge to lever tip.
(c) Tighten lock nut (I) securely.
a,
Edge of
dashboard
U nit:
. mm (in.)
Step
Lever
position
Lever play
Lever stroke
Horizontal
Edge-totip
Operating
effort
bl
35-40
(13/8 - 1'5/8)
[40 (1-5/8)]
preferred
b2 - a2
30-35
(1-1/8 - 1-3/8)
I -2 kg
(2.2 - 4.4 Ib)
Loosen nut (I), turn rod (2) to

adjust, and tighten nut (1).
Brake adjusting nut setting (Refer to the part for steering brakes.)
145 -ISS
(53/4 - 61/8)
[150 (5-7/8)]
preferred
C2 - a2
125-135
(4-7/8 - 5-3/8)
[130 (5.1/8)]
preferred
5 -7 kg
(l1-15Ib)
dl
350 - 360
(133/4 - 14-1/8)
355 (14)
[ preferred]
d2 - a2
315-325
(12-3/8 - 12-3/4)
[320 (12-5/8)]
preferred
8 - 11 kg
(18 - 24 Ib)
CI
Adjusting method
Start of
braking
Brake fully
applied
Pull lever till brake band begins to

move. Loosen lock nut (5) to bring
pin to end of slot in clevis (4), and
turn rod (6) to adjust. Tighten
locknut (5).
With clutch just released, dimension (A) should be about IS mm
(5/8).
The stroke stated on the left
should result, with steps 1, 2, and
3 having been correctly carried
out.
21
Adjustment of steering clutch brakes

Brake is applied by depressing brake pedal (5) to
turn lever (2) through rod (7). The angular stroke of
lever (2) will increase as the lining of the brake band
wears down progressively) and this increase of the stroke
shows up as an increase in the pedal stroke.
(
j
The proper stroke of lever (2), as measured at its tip,

is about 33 mm (1.1/4in.). To reduce the stroke, bring
the brake band close to the drum by tightening adjusting
nut (I) (shown in the photo). The methods of setting
this nut (I) and of adjusting the brake pedal for play
and stroke are as follows:
Setting the adjusting nut (I)
(I) Tighten the nut to lock. Tightening torque of
about .2 . 0.5 kgm (14.5 3.6 Ibft) will be
required.
(2) Back off the nut by two rotations plus 3 or 5 flats ..
This will produce a proper bandtodrum clearance.
Checking pedal stroke and operating effort

With steps (1) and (2) properly carried out, the pedal
should have the following pedal play and stroke and its
operating effort should vary as indicated:
Pedal stroke
Play: 3 ~ 6 mm (1/8
Full braking:
1/4 in.)
Operating
effort
I ~2kg
(2.2 ~ 4.4lb)
1I0 ~ 125 mm
(4.3/8 ~ 47/8 in.)
10 kg (22lb),
[117 mm (4.5/8 in.)
maximum
preferred]
If the checked values are at variance with these (

values, carry out steps (1) and (2) once more.
Brake pedal adjustment

(I) Loose lock nut (4).
(2) Loosen lock nut (6) and tighten or loosen adjust
ing nut (9) to locate the pedal at the height of
clutch pedal.
(3) Shorten or elongate rod (7) to produce a clearance
of I to 2 mm (0.04 to 0.08 in.) between clevis pin
(8) and end of slot (see the magnified view). Be
sure that the distance between this pin and that on
the other end of rod (7) is 571 mm (22.48 in.).
....-.
(4) After making these adjustments, check to be sure

that lock nuts are tight.
--:,-,
22
Clutch pedal adjustment

(1) Loosen lock nut (2), run in adjusting bolt (3) to
lock, and' measure dimension (C), which is the
maximum extension of clutch valve plunger (1)
and is required to be 55 mm (2.17 in.). This
requirement is met by the design of the clutch
valve.)
(2) Depress the pedal by 9 mm (3/8 in.), and back off
adjusting bolt (3) until the bolt barely touches the
pedal arm.
(3) The pedal is now held at the position 9 mm (3/8
in.) in from the original. From this position
(backed by the adjusting bolt), depress the pedal
150 mm (5-7/8 in.), and set stopper bolt (4) to
bear against the pedal arm .
150
.l;<>nUOlllever
N
0
"Z
CD
DPS control lever adjustment

(I) Move the control lever to NR, and measure the
clearances (a) and (b). These clearances should be
between 0.5 and 2 mm (0.02 and 0.08 in.). Move
the lever to FN, and check the clearances (c) and
(d). These too should be between 0.5 and 2 mm
(0.Q2 and 0.08 in.).
(2) Move the lever to R2 and to F2 to make sure that
the clearances (e) and (I) measure between 0.5 and
2 mm (0.02 and 0.08 in.).
(3) If any of the six clearances is off the stated range,
loosen four lock nuts (1), and shorten or elongate
rods (2) and (3). To gain access to these parts,
remove the control-box side cover and the cover
under the lefthand fender (in BS3F) or the
platform Re (in BD2F).
(4) After adjusting, tighten the lock nuts and recheck
the clearances to be sure that they are not affected
by the tightening oflock nuts.
23
\.
MAINTENANCE
STANDARDS
BOLT TIGHTENING TORQUE

Unit: kg-m (lb-ft)
.--.-.
"
M8
1.7 0.2
(12.3 104)
PFI/8
2 0.2
(14.5 104)
MIO
3.4 0.4
(24.6 2.9)
PFI/4
4OA
(28.9 2.9)
MI2
6.1 0.6
(44.1 4.3)
PFI/2
lOA I
(75.2 7.2)
M36
51.8 1.5
(374.7 10.8)
PTI/2
lOA I
(75.2 7.2)
TRANSMISSION
,
Ref.
No.
Unit mm (in )
Item
Standard
Total thickness of reverse clutch (new)

(five plates and four discs)
27.7
(1.091)
Total thickness of forward clutch (new)

(four plates and three discs)
21.57
(0.8492)
0.62
(0.0244)
20.4
'(0.803)
Total thickness of 2nd-speed clutch (new)

(four plates and three discs)
21.57
(0.8492)
0.62
(0_0244)
2004
(0.803)
Total thickness of 1st-speed clutch (new)

(three plates and two discs)
15044
(0.6079)
0.44
(0.0173)
14.6
(0.575)
Thickness of new disc
2.95
(0.1161)
O.IO
(0.0039)
2045
(0.0965)
0.5 kg
(l.Ilb)
5 kg
(1IIb)
0.5 kg
(I.I Ib)
5.5 kg
(12.llb)
0.05
(0.0020)
1.8
(0.071)
-,
Tolerance
Service limit
0.8
(0.031)
26.1
(1.028)
Verify items 1 thru 4 and thickness of each disc.
26
Clutch piston
return spring
Clutch piston
return spring
Length under test force
29
Test force
6.01 kg(l3.25Ib)
Free length after test
33
Outside diameter
12.5 (0.492)
36
Test force
6.6 kg (14.55Ib)
41
Outside diameter
13.5 (0.531)
Thickness of thrust washer
(1.14)
(1.30)
(1.42)
(1.61)
(0.08)
27
TRANSMISSION CONTROL VALVE
Ref.
No.
Item
Standard

Main relief
valve spring
Accumulator
valve spring
(outer)
84 2
(3.3 0.08)
Outside diameter
13.3 (0.524)
59
Length under test Torce

Accumulator
valve spring
(inner)
28
Clutch valve
spring
Pilot valve
spring
Check valve
spring
Safety valve
spring
8.0 0.5 kg
(17.6 I.Ilb)
6.5 kg
(14.3Ib)
34.6 1.5 kg
(76.3 3.3 Ib)
30 kg
(66Ib)
23 2 kg
(50.7 4.4 Ib)
20 kg
(44Ib)
6.5 0.6 kg
(14.3 I.3lb)
5.3 kg
(1I.7Ib)
113.5 (4.468)
.
30.5 (1.201)
60
(2.36)
Test force
99
Outside diameter
22.4 (0.882)
62
(3.90)
(2.44)
.
Clutch valve
return spring
Service limit
(2.32)
Test force
Tolerance
(2.17)
Test force
Outside diameter
55
Unit mm (in )
Test force
95
Outside diameter
18.5 (0.728)
17
(3.74)
(0.67)
Test force
Free lengUI after test
31
Outside diameter
11.4 (0.449)
37
6.0 0.3 kg
(13.2 0.7Ib)
5.0kg
(1I.Olb)
16.0 0.5 kg
(35.3 I.Ilb)
13 kg
(28.71b)
0.12 0.01 kg
(0.26 0.Q2 Ib)
0.09 kg
(0.20Ib)
2.83 0.2 kg
(6.24 O.4lb)
2.5 kg
(5.5Ib)
(1.22)
(1.46)
Test force
64
Outside diameter
18.3 (0.720)
25
(2.52)
(0.98)
Test force
33
Outside diameter
13.3 (0.524)
17
(1.30)
(0.67)
Test force
33.5 (1.319)
Outside diameter
13.2 (0.520)
Unit: mm (iri.)
Ref.
No.
Standard
Item
Oulside diameter
Service limit
0.23 0.02 kg
(0.51 0.04 Ib)
0.18 kg
(0040 lb)
8.9 (0.350)
Lenglhunder lesl force

Damping valve Tesl force
spring
Free length after lesl
Tolerance
19
(0.75)
7.5 (0.295)
(J)
CD
29
,!
-.
-;
DISASSEMBLY
AND
REASSEMBLY
. "-I
.I
TRANSMISSION
Removal
Preparatory steps
(a) Removal of floor plate.
(b) Taking down of the seat and seat support.
:-1
(1) Disconnect and remove two steering clutch lever

rods (1).
(2) Disconnect and remove brake pedal rod (2).
(3) Remove return spring (3) urging the brake pedal.
(4) Undo three connections at plungers (4) of DPS
control valve unit.
(5) Remove pedal bracket assembly (5).
(10) Remove eight bolts (9) fastening the transmission

case to the steering clutch case.
(6) Disconnect oil pipe (6).
(11) Detach the transmission from the clutch case,and
(7) Disconnect and remove universal joint (7).
move the former out in fonvard direction.
(8) Disconnect oil pipe (8).
(9) Hitch a lifting sling (A) to'the transmission case,

and tension the sling to take up the weight of the
transmission.
33
(12). Lift the transmission out of the machine.
Preparatory steps
(a) Have the transfer gear assembly removed.
(b) Remove oil filter.
..
(d) Remove oil pump.
If~
~
<-,-.-.. ,.'1
Disassembly
(c) Remove the transmission control valve

unit.
(e) Remove magnet strainer.
l-Lock washer
2-801t
3-Washer
5Bolt
6Bolt
7-Transmission case
8-Snap ring
gPump driven gear
lO-Flange
11-Seal cover
Tratisnllss16n cas~ and flanged end disassembly

(1) Remove four joint pipes, using a hook, pliers and
rod, from the seating face, from which the control
. valve unit has been taken off. The pipes are
indicated by arrows (in the second photo).
(2) Bend down lock washer (I), and remove bolt (2)
and washer (3).
(3) Remove bolts (4) securing the splbed flange piece.
34
(4) Remove eight bolts fastening the case to the

flanged end. The bolts are indicated as (5).
(5) From the flanged end plate, remove bolt (6)

securing the plate to the transmission case.
(8) Pick out snap ring (8) from pump driven gear.
(9) By driving from inside the case, force out flange

piece (10). Renjove seal cover (11), and take out
driven gear (9).
(6) Run jacking bolts (E) (e) into the end plate,
detaching the case from the plate.
(7) Lift transmission case (7) off, leaving behind the

clutch assembly (A) standing on the end plate.
35
Transmission case and flanged end reassembly

(1) At. the front end, install ball bearing (2) in the
case (1).
(2) While exerting a push to the ball bearing (2), force
driven gear (3) from inside into the bearing by
driving, and put on snap ring (4).
(7) Fit washer (9)and lock washer (10) to the end face
of input shaft, run, bolt (11) into the shaft and,
after tightening the bolt good and hard, lock it by
bending the tongue of lock washer.
(3) Lower the transmission case (1) onto clutch

assembly (A) standing on the flanged end plate,
and fasten the case to the plate by bolting: There
are eight bolts (5) to be tightened.
(8) Install the four joint pipes in the seat for the
control valve unit. Be sure to use a new seal on
each joint pipe.
(4) Install the input.shaft ball bearing by driving it

into the case.
(5) Fit the' oil seal into seal cover (6) by driving,
install the cover and secure it to the case by
tightening its four bolts (7).
(6) Install the splined flange piece (8), driving it into
the bearing; and put on uO" ring.
\,
36
REVERSE section disassembly
lPump drive gear

6..snap ring
6Snap ring"
7-Mating plate
a-Friction plat.e
9Return spring
lOPressure plate
11~Piston housing
12-Piston
13-Jnput shaft
14-End housing
15-Ring gear
16Planet carrier
1 iSpring pin
l8Planet pin
19Thrust washer
20Needle bearing
21Planet gear
(I) From input shaft, pull off pump drive. gear (I).
(2) Remove bolts (2), and take off lubricating valve
assembly (3).
(3) Remove bolts (4). Leave one of these nine bolts

(4) in place. The bolt to be left is indicated as (a).
37
(4) Lift off the REVERSE section (A). This section

comprises piston housing R, epicyclic gear sub
assembly R .
(9) Pick out piston (l2), complete with piston seal,

from piston housing (II).
';
(5) Pick out snap rings (5) (6) retaining' the ball
bearing in place.
(10) Remove input shaft (l3) from epicyclic gear subassembly R by driving the shaft.
(6) Remove the remaining bolt (a).
(11) Remove ring gear (15) and planet carrier R (C)

from end housing (14).
(7) Lift off the combination (B) comprising the end
housing and epicyclic gear subassembly R.
(8) Take out, fO\li mating plates (7), four ,friction
plates (8), five return springs (9) and pressure plate
(10).
(l2) Using a proper drift, remove, three spring pins (J 7)

by driving each out of planet carrier R (16).
38
(3) Fit ball bearing (8) to end housing (7) by driving,

and install the "0" ring on the back of end
housing.
:
(13) Disassemble each planet into thrust washer (19),
needle bearing (20) and gear (21) by pulling its
pin (18) out of the carrier.
(4) Fit the planet carrier R (complete with planets) to
end housing (7).
(5) Mount the ball bearing next to the sun gear of
input shaft (8), and insert the shaft into the
carrier.
(6) Feed ring gear (9) onto the carrier, making sure
that the gear slides smoothiy onto the toothed
periphery of carrier.
REVERSE section reassembly

(1) Install the three planets in planet carrier R (I) by
locating three gears (2), needle bearings (3) and
thrust washers (4) inside the carrier and by insert
ing three pins (5), one into each gear (2). Be sure
to position pin (5) in such a way that its oil hole
will point to the center of the carrier.
(2) Drive spring pin (6) into the carrier at each planet,
and lock the pin by punching its end.
39
(7) Install piston (complete with piston seal), followed

by pressure plate (11), in piston housing (10), and
stack friction plates (12) and mating plates (12)
alternately.
,
}
--,,-. ~>----.,
#
;;
(8) Set up five return springs (14) on the pressure

plate in place, and put on the combination (B) of
end housing and epicyclic gearing. Fasten the two
together by tightening only one bolt (b).
(9) Install two snap rings (15) (16) to retain the ball
bearing (between end housing and carrier). Tins
completes reassembly of the REVERSE section.
(10) Place the REVERSE section (B) on the FOR

WARDHIGH section, and secure the former to
the latter by tightening eight bolts (19).
(1l) Install lubricating valve (18), and secure it with
two bolts (19) to end plate.
(12) Feed pump drive gear (20) onto the splined input
shaft, setting the gear snugly with its bottom end
bearing against the inner race of ball bearing.
40
FORWARD:H{GH section <lisassembly

This section comprises two clutches, two epicyclic
gearings and one carrier common to the two. (The
procedure to follow assumes that the REVERSE section
has been removed.)'
lNeedle bearing
2Matlng plate
3Frlctlon plate
4.Return spring
5Pres$ure plate
6-Linking ring gear
7-5nap ring
a-Snap ring
9.'Bolt
11-8nap ring
120utput shaft
13-B811 bearing
"14.Snap ring
15-011 seal
16-Bearlng case
17FORWARD ring gear
19~ressure plate
20Return spring
21Frlction plate
22Mating plate
23HIGH ring gear
24HIGH planet gear

25Carrier seal
26FORWARD planet gear
2.,7Piston housing
28Pist9n
29-8all bearing
30-Sall bearing
31"0" ring
(I) From the top end of output shaft, remove needle

bearing (I).
(2) From the piston housing (common to FORWARD
and HIGH clutches), take out three mating plates
(2), three friction plates (3), five return springs
(4) and pressure plate (5). These parts are for
FORWARD.
(3) Squeeze snap ring (7), as shown, and take off ring
gear (6). This gear is that which links REVERSE
planets to FORWARD carrier.
(4) Pick out snap ring (7).
41
(5) Remove snap ring (8) from output shaft.
(6) Remove five bolts (9) securing the bearing case to
the case c"over-,
(10) Lift the combination (D) of piston housing and

FORWARDHIGH epicyclic .gearings, complete
with ring gear (17). Remove five clutch pins (18).
(7) Remove nine bolts (10) holding piston housing to

the case cover.
(8) Drive out shaft (A). The shaft will move out
together with ball bearing and bearing case.
(11) Take out pressure plate (19), five return springs

(20), three friction plates (21) and three mating
plates (22). These parts are for HIGH. The HIGH
piston will have stayed in the piston housing just
removed ...
(9) Disassemble the combination of output shaft and

bearing case, as follows:
Remove snap ring (11), draw the shaft (12) off,
remove ball bearing (13), snap ring (14) from
shaft, and take off two oil seals (15) from bearing
case (16).
42
(12) Take out ring gear (23) remammg in the LOW

. section. This gear is that which links HIGH planets
(24) to LOW carrier.
(13) Disassemble the HIGH epicycle gearing, which is

on the piston housing removed. The disassembling
method is similar to that already explained for
REVERSE epicyclic gearing. This disassembly
starts out with driving oiih'>f three spring pins
locking the planet pins to the carrier.
(15) Remove two carder seals (25), and dis:lssembIC the

epicyclic gearing into three planet gears (26).
[NOTE]
Removal of pins from planets (24) will be
made easier if a soft-metal hammer is used to
tap on the carrier around each pin: the reaction
due to tlus tapping facilitates easing out of the
planet pin.
.
(16) From the piston housing, take out two pistons

(28).
FORWARD-HIGH section reassembly

(1) Set the two pistons (2), each complete with piston
seal, in the clutch pOitionsofpiston housing (1).
,.
(14) Drive out of the piston housing (27) the common

carrier. The carrier comes off complete with the
FORWARD epicyclic gearing (C).
[NOTE]
Give a mark to the piston housing in order
to identify its FORWARD side and HIGH side.
43
(2) To the common carrier (3) bore, fit snap ring (4)
and install two ball bearings (5) by driving, one
bearing on each side of the snap ring.
(5) Insert five piston pins (9) into the common piston
housing.
(3) Fit two carrier seals (6) to the carrier, and install
FORWARD epicyclic gearing (7). (fhe installing
method is similar to that explained for REVERSE.)
[NOTEl
Put on FORWARD ring gear at this time.
TillS ring will not go into position after the
carrier has been combined with the piston
. housing.
(6) Onto the LOW section (B), install ring gear (10),
and place three mating plates (II) and three
friction plates (12) alternately; set up five return
springs (13) and place pressure plate {I 4).
(4) Set the subassembly (A) of planet carrier in the

common piston housing. (The carrier is now
complete with FORWARD epicyclic gearing.)
Install three HIGH planet gears (8) on the HIGH
side of the carrier.
(7) Place the FORWARDHlGH section (C) over the

LOW section (B), admitting the clutch plates and
ring gear (on the LOW section) smoothly into the
FORWARDHlGH section (C) being lowered.
(8) Install ring gear (IS).
44
(9) Mount ball bearing (17) on output shaft (16) by

driving the bearing to and against the shoulder,
and put on snap ring (18).
(10) Insert the output shaft into bearing case (19), and
fit snap ring (20) to the case, thereby retaining the
ball bearing (17).
(13) Fit snap ring (23) to the output shaft, and mount
needle bearing (24) on the shaft.
(14) Into the snap ring groove provided in the toothed
periphery of carrier, fit snap ring (25). This is
FORWARD side of the carrier.
(11) Fit two oil seals (21) to the bearing case, making
sure that the end faces of each seal are coirectly
discriminated.
(IS) Squeeze snap ring (25) in place and insert the link
ring gear (26), making this gear engage smoothly
with the carrier teeth. Guide the hook ends of the
snap ring into the valleys 5 teeth apart.
(12) Fit "0" ring (22) to the case cover. Feed the
output shaft into the LOW and FORW ARDHIGH
sections, and seat the bearing case (D) snugly on
the case cover.
45
(16) Place pressure plate (27) over the FORWARD

piston, put on five return springs (28), and stack
three fiiction plates (29) and three mating plates
(30) alternately,
LOW section disassembly
1Piston housing
2Piston
3Pressure plate
4Return spring
5Friction plate
46
6-Mating plate
7LOW ring gear
8-Snap ring
gCarrier seal
1 O-LOW planet gear
..
~'-
(I) Lift off pistoll housing (1); piston (2) comes out
with the housing.
(5) From the case cover, remove the epicyclic gear

subassembly (A).
(2) Take out pressure plate (3), five return springs (4),
two friction plates (5) and two mating plates (6).
(3) Lift off LOW ring gear (7).
(6) Remove carrier seal (9), and disassemble the

epicyclic gearing to take out three planet gears
(10).
(4) Remove snap ring (8) retaining the ball bearing in

place.
47
'LOW section reassembly

(1) Drive ball bearing (I) into the case cover.
j
(5) Insert LOW piston (7) into piston housing (6), Be

sure that the piston is complete with seal.
(2) Fit carrier seal (2) to the LOW carrier, and

reassemble the epicyclic gearing according to the
method already describ,ed.
(3) Fit snap ring (4) to the carrier to retain the ball
bearing.
(6) Place two mating plates (8) and two friction plates
alternately; set up five return springs ,(10) and
pressure plate (ll), on the case cover. Lower the
piston housing onto what are on the cover case,
Transfer gear disassembly

(4) Install ring gear (5), resting it on the case cover.
(1) Remove twelve bolts (1) securing the transfer gear

assembly to the transmission case.
48
(2) Bend down the tongues of lock washer (2), remove

two bolts (3) and take off washer (4) .
.I
(6) Pull off transfer driven gear (11) from bevel

pinion shaft.
(3) Remove four bolts (5), run in two jacking bolts
. and force bearing case (6) out.
.~
(4) Pick out snap ring (7).

(5) Remove six bolts (8) and take off transfer gear
cover (9).
49
(7) Draw out bevel pinion (12) and drive gear (10)
from the transfer gear case.
(3) Fit transfer driven gear (6) onto the splined shank
of bevel pinion..
(
\
(4) Put on transfer gear cover (7) and secure it to the

case by tightening six bolts (8).
Transfer gear reassembly

(1) Mount ball bearing (2) on the inner end of transfer
drive gear (I), fit snap ring (3), and drive the
bearing into the case.
(2) Mount roller bearing (5) on the shank of bevel

pinion (4), and drive the bearing into the transfer
gear case, .'
(5) Drive ball bearing (9) into the cover, and retain it
by fitting snap ring (10).
(6) Drive ball bearing (12) into bearing case (11), and
retain it by fiiting snap ring (13).
~.~
~
,~
,<
\
(7) Put on shim (14), and drive bearing case (11) into
the transfer gear case. Secure the bearing case by
tightening four bolts.
50
&(CAUTION]
The distance between the end face of bevel
pinion-and the outer face of transfer gear case is
specified for each transfer gear because of the
selective -assembly during manufacture of the
transfer gear. The specification is formed by a
certain value (represented by letter "rn" and
marked on the end face of the pinion) per cent
and 46.2 mm (1.819 in.). The per-cent value is
either positive (+) or negative (-). To bring this
distance into O.l 0101 (0.004 in.) of the
specification, the thickness of the shim used
between bearing case and transfer gear cover
must be adjusted.
Two shims, 58827-10900 and 58827-11000,
each in three sizes are available for use in this
adjustment:
Value 'of "m"

marked here
Shim
thickness+--.lII--
'-' I I
Lspecified distance
1--(46.2 "m"/100) O.l mm
[(1.819 "m"/1001 0.004 in.]
(8) Fit the washer to the end face (inner) of bevel

pinion shank, put on lock washer and secure the
washer by tightening two bolts. Be sure to lock the
bolts by bending the lock washer.
(9) Secure the transfer gear assembly to the transmission case by running in and tightening a total of
12 bolts.
58827-10900: 0.10101 (0.004 in.), 0.4 mm

(0.016 in.), 1.0 mm (0.039
in.)
-,
58827-11000: 0.1 mOl (0.004 in.), 0.4 mm

(0.016 in.), 1.00101 (0.039
in.)
This specification is: 46.2 mm (1.819 in.)"m"/IOO 0.1 mOl (0.004 in.) if "01" is
positive.
46.2 mm (1.819 in.) + "rn"/100 0.1 mrn
(0.004 in.) if "rn" is negative.
51
ihl CAUTION I
The bevel crOwn gear to mesh with the bevel
pinion comes on the left side as seen in the sec
tional view. This is a requirement to be met in
the DPS transmission. For the DD transmission,
the bevel crown gear comes on the right side.
CONTROL VALVE UNIT

Control valve unit - Exploded view
52
Carry out disassembly in the following sequence:
(I) Valve housing removal

(2) Accumulator valve removal
(3). Main relief valve removal

(4) Safety and pilot valve removal
(5) Clutch valve removal
(6) Directional selector valve removal

;,')
(7) Speed selector valve removal

Reassembly is the revetse of'disassembly,
,&[ CAUTIONS)
a) The control valve unit is a precision-machined
device. Perfect cleanliness is the primary
requirement on the place of work; use clean
tools; \vork in clean, dust-free air, and handle
the removed internals carefully.
b) In reassembly, be sure to tighten similar
bolts equally to avoid distortion of parts in
which spools, plungers and valves have to
move back and forth by. sliding, Binding,
sticky or othenvise erratic movement of
these sliding members is often due to unequal
tightening of bolts and screws,
Valve housing reassembly

(I) Install accumulator orifice, plugs and gasket on the
housing,
.
(2) Put on the housing and secure it by tightening the

bolts,
Accumulator valve disassembly

(1) Remove two bolts (1) and take off cover (2).
Valve housing disassembly

(1) Remove three bolts (1) and one bolt (2), and take
off upper housing (3),
(2) Remove gasket (4) and three plugs (5),
(2) Remove accumulator pin (3), springs (4) (5), valve

(6) and "0" ring (7).
(3) Remove accumulator orifice (6),
53
Accumulator valve reassembly

(
(1) Insert into the housing the. accumulator parts in

. this order: accumulator valve, springs and pin. Put
on
"O~'
ring.
(2) Secure cover to the housing.
Main relief valve disassembly

(1) Remove two bolts (I), and takeoff cover (2).
Safety and pilot valve disassembly

(1) Remove two bolts (I), and take off cover (2).
(2) Remove slug (3), main valve (4), shim (5), main
spring (6) and "0" ring (7).
.
(3) While tapping lightly on the housing with such as
a wooden mallet, draw out bearing roller (8), and
take out check seat.
(2) Remove safety valve assembly (A), spring (3) and

"0" ring (4).
Main relief valve reassembly

(1) Insert check seat (1) into the housing, and seCUIe
by installing bearing rolier (2).
(2) Install main spring, shim, main valve, slug and
uO" ring.
(3) Put on the cover.
54
(3) Disassemble the valve assembly (A) into snap ring

(5), spring retainer (6), damping spring (7), damping valve (8) and safety valve (9).
:-.
(4) Remove four bolts (10), and take cover (II) off.
(2) Install pilot valve spring, slug, pilot valve, "0" ring
and cover.
(3) Build up the safety valve assembly.
(4) Insert safety valve spring and valve assembly into
the housing~ and install"OH ring and cover.
Clll tell valve disassembly

(I) Remove two bolts, and take clutch cover (I) and
plunger (2).
(5) Remove pilot valve (12), slug (13), pilot valve

spring (14) and "0" ring (IS).
(6) While tapping lightly on the housing with a
wooden mallet, draw out bearing roller (16), and
remove stopper.
i
1:
(2) From the clutch cover, remove "0" rings (3) (4).
Safety and pilot valve reassembly

(I) Insert stopper (1) into the housing, and secure it
by installing bearing roller (2).
55
(3) Remove clutch rod (5), spacer (6), slug (7), valve
(8), spring (9), pin (10) and clutch spring (11).
J
Directional selector valve disassembly

(4) Remove two bolts (12) and take off cover (13).
Clutch valve reassembly
(I) Remove two detent sub-assemblies (I), top and

bottom, and pull out selector plunger (2).
(2) Remove two bolts (3), and take off cover (4).
(I) Bolt the cover to the housing.

(2) Insert into the housing the clutch valve parts in
this order: clutch spring, pin, spring, valve, slug,
spacer and rod.
[NOTE 1
When inserting the clutch rod into the clutch
. valve, be sure to reed that part of rod having oil
holes (A) into the valve.
(3) Fit two "0" rings to the clutch cover, and insert
the cover and plunger into the housing.
(3) Take out check spring (5), valve (6) and "0" ring
(7).
56
.j
(4) Remove bearing roller (8) and take out the plug.
.....
. Speed selector valve disassembly

(I) Remove two bolts (I), and take off cover (2) .
(5) Remove oil seal (9).

(2) Remove detent sub-assemblies (3), top and bottom,
and take out speed plunger (4) and "0" ring.
Directional selector valve reassembly

(I) Install the oil seai by driving it into the housing.
(2) Install plug (I), securing it with bearing roller (2),
and lock the roller by punching.
(3) Insert plug, check spring and "0" ring, and put on
the cover.
(4) Insert the plunger and install the detent subassemblies.
57
(3) Remove oil seal (5).
Speed selector valve reassem bly

(I) Install the oil seal by driving it into the housing,
and insert the speed plunger and fit "0" ring.
(2) Install detent subassemblies and put on the cover.

Part number
58609-04200
Tool name
Hook
Shape
Use
For lifting clutches
i.
58
Printed in Japon
SERVICE MANUAL
MITSUBISHI
TRACTOR
TRACTOR SHOVEL
BD2F
BS3F
(DIRECT-DRiVE-TRANSMISSION TYPE)
POWER TRAIN/ HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
.. .:.j
Page
Flywheel clutch .............................................. 2
Transmission (direct drive) ................................ . . . . .. 4
Clutch lubrication oil pump .................................. ,. 6
Brake ...................................................... 7
Steering clutches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8
Final drives ......................................... ; ......... 10
Frame ...................................................... 12
Front idlers .................................................. 14
Recoil springs ................................................. 15
Track carrier rollers ............................................ 16
Track rollers ............ , .................................... 17
Tracks .................................................... '.. 18
Hydraulic pump .............................................. 20
Hydraulic control valve (BD2F) : ................................. 21
Hydraulic control valve (BS3F) .................................. 22
Hydraulic tank .............................................. 25
Lift cylinders (BS3F) .......................................... 26
Dump cylinders (BS3F) ........................................ 27
Blade lift cylinders (BD2F) ...................................... 28
Bucket and linkage (BS3F) ., .................................... 29
Blade (BD2F) ........... : .................................... 30
FLYWHEEL CLUTCH
FLYWHEEL CLUTCH
Ref.
No.
Unit mm (in)
Item
Assembly standard
Remarks
Service limit
-0.4
(-0.016)
Both sides: -0.8
One side:
Facingthickness
Clutch discs
(~0.031)
Runout
Over 0.7
(0'(~28)
26.67 -26.7
(1.0500 -1.0512)
Side fit of teeth
0.05 -0.15
(0.0020 - 0.0059)
0.3
(0.012)
20.2 (0.795)
19.7 (0.776), max
0.05 - 0.15
(0.0020 - 0.0059)
0.3
(0.012)
10.2 -10.25
(0.402 - 0.404)
10.5
(0.413)
Friction surface thickness
Friction surface flatness

Strut bolt holes
Up to 0.7 (0.028),
inc!
Minor diameter
Hub splines
5.7 - 6.3
(0.224 - 0.248)
Pressure plate
Bushings are said

to have reached
Release lever pin bushings
See Remarks.
the service Hmit

if "teflon)) overlay coating is
worn away.
FriCtion surface thickness
Mating plate
Pressure
springs
0.2
(0.008)
Free length
70.6 (2.780)
68.5 (2.697)
Load to compres, spring

to initial working length
[48.2 (1.898)1 kg (lb)
43.5 2.17
(95.9 4.78)
39.2
(86.4)
Friction surface flatness
Fit on bearing
Release levers
Stroke
12.5 (0.492), max
0.05 -0.1
(0.0020 - 0.004)
Squareness
13.0 (0.512)
Up to 2
1.9
(0.075)
18 (3/4)
Over 3
G~r
Strut bolts
Tightening torque
kgm (lb.ft)
4-6
(28.9 - 43.4)
Clutch cover
mounting bolts
Tightening torque
kg-m (lb-ft)
1.7
(12.3)
Lock plate
mounting bolts
Tightening torque
0.6-0.8
(4.3 - 5.8)
10
Seal ring
Surface
Cuts or breakage
II
Cover
Surface making contact

with seal ring
Grooves or
12
Brake band
Lining thickness
3.0 (0.118), max
13
Pump drive
gear
Backlash with mating gear
kg-m (lb-ft)
I (7.2)
scratches
0.35 - 0.42
(0.0138 - 0.0165)
Over 0.7 (0.028)
A-B
~
0.5 10.0201,
min
FLYWHEEL CLUTCH
o
o
TRANSMISSION (DIRECT DRIVE)

Ref.
No.
Item
Assembly standard
Service limit
0.12 - 0.30
(0.0047 - 0.0118)
0.6
(0.024)
0.12 -0.28
.(0.0047'" 0.0110)
0.6
(0.024)
7.1-7.2
(0.280 - 0.283)
7.7
(0.303)
Fit in forks
0.020 - 0.062
(0.00079 - 0.00i44)
0.5
(0,020)
Free length
62
(2.44)
60.5
(2.382)
9.8 0.49
(21.6 1.08)
7.5
(16.5)
I.
3rd-speed gears
Gears other than

3rd-speed gears Backlash
Sliding gears
Shifter shafts
'.
Poppet springs
' ..
Countershaft
end securing
bolts/bevel
pinion securing
bolts
Unit: mm (in.)
Backlash with reverse idler
Width of shifter fork

grooves
Load to compress spring

[55 (2.2)] kg (Ib)
'
/'"",
Remarks
..
Tightening torque
kg-m (Ib-ft)
2.7 0.3
(19.5 2.2)
'\
CLUTCH LUBRICATION OIL PUMP
CLUTCH LUBRICATION OIL PUMP

Ref.
No.
1
Item
Main shaft clearance in pump body
Outer rotor
and inner rotor
Radial fit of outer

rotor in pump body
End fit of rotors in

pump body
Fit of inner rotor
c trochoid teeth in
outer rotor
Oil pump
mounting bolts
Tightening torque
kg-m (lb-f!)
Unit: mm (in.) (
Assembly standard
Service limit
0.100 ~ 0.121
(0.00394 ~ 0.00476)
0.2
(0.008)
0.200
(0.00787
0.5
(0.020)
0.04
(0.0016
~
~
0.275
0.01083)
0.09
0.0035) -.,.
0.013 ~ 0.150
(0.00051 ~ 0.00591)
>
",,
Remarks
[0.15 1
(0.0059)
0.25
(0.0098)
>
1.7
(12.3)
\.
=-=---====~~
BRAKE
BRAKE
Ref.
No.
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Drum
Linings
Assembly. standard
Outside diameter
252 (9.92)
Clearance in linings
0.8 (0.031)
Thickness
6.5 (0.256)
Service limit
Remarks
250 (9.84)
4.5 (0.177)
STEERING CLUTCHES
STEERING CLUTCHES
Ref.
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
No.
Bevel gear
Backlash with pinion
Tapered roller
bearings
Preload (bevel gear)

kgm (lbft)
Clutch springs
8.7 (0.343)
2.8 (0.110)
2.3 (0.091)
Backlash wiUdnner dmm
0.14 ~ 0.30
(0.0055 ~ 0.0118)
0.6
(0.024)
Asassembled thickness of
plates (6 pcs) and facings
(6 pcs)
69
(2.72)
66
(2.60)
Clutch shaft
Lever and roller Clearance
Fit in pressure plate
Tightening torque
kgm (lbft)
0.3 ~0.375
(0.012 ~ 0.01476)
1.5 (0.059)
4.2 0.4
(30.4 2.9)
(lOmm diam)
9
Drive shaft!
clutch shaft
securing bolts
(16mm diam)
6 (0.24)
0.8
(0.031)
Clutch plates
securing bolts
6.5)
0.16 ~ 0.52
(0.0063 ~ 0.0205)
65.5 5 .
(144 11)
Backlash with outer drum
Drive shaft!
clutch shaft
~0.9

[63 (2.5)] kg (lb)
Thickness
5
0.7
(5.1
77.5 (3.051)
Clutch facings
Service limit
0.15 ~ 0.20
(0.0059 ~ 0.0079)
Free length
Thickness
4
Assembly standard
Tightening torque
kgm (lbft)
16~
(115.7
19
137.4)
Remarks
STEERING CLUTCHES
~~
..
~I.t---rr
... ~~
\L..
FINAL DRIVES
FINAL DRIVES
Ref.
No.
Unit mm (in)
Item
Assembly standard
0.17
(0.0067
~0.37
Gears
Backlash
Sprockets
Tooth width
40 (1.57)
Pinion lock
plate mounting
bolts
Tightening torque
kg-m (lb-ft)
4.2 0.4
(30.4 2.9)
Tapered roller
bearings
Preload
kg-m (lb-ft)
Final drive
case mounting
bolts
Tightening torque
kg-m (lb-ft)
8.4 0.8
(60.8 5.8)
Tightening torque
kg-m (Ib-ft)
55 5
(397.8 36.2)
Sprocket
6 .mounting
bolts
10
0.0146)
0.29 ~ 0.37
(2.1 ~ 2.7)
Service limit
1.0
(0.039)
36 (1.42)
Remarks
FINAL DRIVES
11
FRAME
FRAME
Un it: mm (in.)
Ref.
No.
Item
Assembly standard
Steering clutch
case/frame/rigid Tightening torque
bar mounting
kg-m (lb-ft)
bolts
Engine front
mount/flywheel Bracket-to-stopper
clutch case
clearance
mount
Service limit
29-32
(210 -231)
Upper: 1.2 - 2.2
(0.047 - 0.087)
Lower: 1.5 - 2.0
(0.059 - 0.079)
Engine front
Tightening torque
mount attaching
kg-m (lb-ft)
bolts
15.9 1.6
(115 11.6)
Flywheel clutch
Tightening torque
case mounting
kg-m (lb-ft)
bolts
15:9 1.6
(115 11.6)
Radiator mountAs-tigiltened clearance

ing bolts
Standard models
Center to center
Swamp models
of tracks
Super-swamp models
25.5
(1.004)
1200 (47-1/4)
1400 (55-1/8)
10 (3/8)
~-.
\-
"
- .. -
..
I
-,=1
"~::::==========:::s;=======t=
12
Difference between "An and
un"
1550 (61)
nS3F
Remarks
FRAME
BD2F
CD
lfl
-~I
------m=~===t='==ift= [)-,l
I~~
!cc
... .
:":
,CD
."
'~.
- f'~~-:~)
'
'
----
r-:~o
A
I_~"
LJo
8I
13
FRONT IDLERS
FRONT IDLERS
Unit: mm (in.)
.I
Ref.
Item
No.
1
,
Idlers
Shafts
Remarks
Repair limit:
413 (16.26)
Diameter at (I.a)
420 (16.54)
411 (16.18)
Diameter at (Ib)
42 (1.65)
35 (1.38)
0.2
(0.008
Fit in bushing
.
14
Service limit
Axial play
--:
Assembly standard
~0.25
0.0098)
0.1 55 ~ 0.235
(0.0061 0 ~ 0.00925)
1.4
(0.055)
1.0
(0.039)
Filler plugs
Tightening torque
kgm (lbft)
7.6 0.8
(55 5.8)
Bearingshaft
securing taper
pin bolts
Tightening torque
kgm (lbft)
6.5 0.7
(47 5.1)
Guides/track
frames
I (0.04)
3 (0.12)
I (0.04)
3 (0.12)
Lateral clearance
b Vertic.al clearance
RECOIL SPRINGS
RECOIL SPRINGS
Ref.
No.
Unit: mm (in.)
Item
Assembly standard
Free length
381.5 (15.020)
I" Recoil springs
2 .- Cylinders
Fit on piston

[326 (12.83) I kg (lb)
2610 210
(5755 463)
.0.075 - 0.164
(0.00295 - 0.00646)
Track carrier
roller bracket
mounting bolts
Roller shaftbracket securing Tightening torque

kg-m (lb-ft)
bolts
7.6 0.8
(55 5.8)
3.5 0.4
(25.3 2.9)
,.
Tightening torque
kg-m (lb-ft)
Filler valves
Tightening torque
kg-m (lb-ft)
Track adjuster
cylinders
Adjustment
Remarks
Service limit
2300
(5072)
0.8
(0.031)
13.5J.4
(97.6 10.1)
248.9
(9.800)
316.4
(12.46)
15
TRACK CARRIER ROLLERS
TRAcK CARRIER ROLLERS

Ref.
No.
Item
Rollers
-;.-., >', . :)-~
Assembly standard
Service limit
a Diameter at (I-b)
130 (5.12)
118 (4.65)
b Diameter at (1-a)
110 (4.33)
98 (3.86)
30 (1.18)
35 (1.38)
c Width at (I-c)
d Axial play
16
Unit mm (in)
0.2 ~0.5
(0.008 ~ 0.020)
0.185 ~ 0.226
(0.00728 ~ 0.00890) .
Roller shafts
Fit in bushings
Filler plug
Tightening torque
kg-m (lb-ft)
4.2 0.4
(30.4 2.9)
Roller shaft
securing bolts
Tightening torque
kg-m (lb-ft)
12.2 1.2
(88.2 8.7)
1.0
(0.039)
1.6
(0.063)
Remarks
Repairllmit: 102
(4.02)
TRACK ROLLERS
TRACK ROLLERS
Unit: mm (in.)
Ref.
No.
1
.~
.;".
Item
Rollers
,;
Assembly standard
Service limit
Diameter at (I.a)
164 (6.46)
152 (5.98)
Diameter at (I.b)
140 (5.51)
128 (5.04)
Flangewidth
9 (0.35)
4 (0.16)
d Axial play
0.30 -0.90
(0.0118 - 0.0354)
1.4
(0.055)
0.2 -0.25
(0.008 - 0.0098)
1.6
(0.063)
Roller shafts
Fit in bushings
Filler plugs
Tightening torque
kg.m (Ib-ft)
7.6 0.8
(55 5.8)
Tightening torque
kg-m (Ib-ft)
6 0.6
(43.4 4.3)
. 'Roller mounting bolts
Remarks
Repair limit: 132
(5.20) .
17
TRACKS
TRACKS
Unit: mm (in.)
Ref.
No.
1
Item
Bushings
Outside diameter
37.2
(1.465)
Limit for reverSing: 38 (1.50)

(maximum wear)
68 (2.68)
Repair limit: 70
(2.76)
b Link pitch
540 (21.3)
550 (21.65)
Limit for reversing: 552 (21.73)
Links
Track pins
Shoes
Remarks
75 (2.95)
~0.734
~0.02890)
2.5
(0.098)
Standard models
38.5 (1.516)(BD2F)
II (0.43)
Standard models
30 (1.18) (BS3F)
10 (0.39)
67.5 (2.657)
55.5 (2; 185)
Repair limit: 57.5

(2.264)
57.5 (2.264)
52.5 (2.067)
Repair limit not

specified
Fit in bushings
Grouser
height
Swamp models
. Superswamp models
18
41 (1.61)
(Limit for reversing)
Service limit
Height
a
. <: -.;-:
Assembly standard
Tracks
Sag
Shoes bolts
Tightening torque
kgm (Ibft)
0.45
(0.0177
20~30
(3{4 ~ ll{8)
17 ~20
(123 ~ 145)
TRACKS
2-b
2-a
Standard model track
Swamp model/super-swamp model track
19
. HYDRAULIC PUMP
HYDRAULIC PUMP
Ref.
No.
Item
Assembly standard
Rpm
BD2F
2400
Delivery pressure
kg/em' (psi)
. 160 (2275)
Capacity
Uter (eu in.)
Pump
performance
64 (3906)
Rpm
BS3F
2400
Delivery pressure
kg/em' (psi)
160 (2275)
Capacity
liter (eu in.)
2
Pump cover
mounting bolts
64 (3906)
4.75 ~g.25
Tightening torque
kgm (Ib-ft)
(34.36 ~~.8)
CD
20
Service limit
Remarks
HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (BD2F)
HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (BD2F)

Ref.
No.
Pilot valve
spring
Item
Assembly standard
Free length
42.9(1.689)

[34.1 (1.343)] kg(lb)
24.7 2
(54.5 4.4)
Free length
2' Relief valve
spring
Unit: mm (in.)
Service limit
Remarks
-'-
39 (154)
Load to eoorpress spring

[26.5 (1.043)] kg (Ib)
Free length
3.82 0.3
(8.42 0.7)
3
(6.6)
59 (2.32)
Plunger center
spring
Plunger detent
plug
Tightening torque
kgm (Ibft)
Relief valve
plug
Tightening torque
kg-m (Ib-ft)
7 0.7
(51 5)
Bolts
Tightening torque
kg-m (Ib-ft)
4.6 0.5
(33.3 + 3.6)
Main relief
valve performance

[46.6 (1.83)] kg (Ib)
.'
5.4 0.5
(11.9 1.1)
8 kgl45 mm
(17 .611b11.85 in.)
75 0.5
(542 3.6)
Pressure that makes reHef

valve open kglem' (psi)
160 3
(2275 + 43)
Flow rate liter (eu in.)lmin
64 3
(3906 + 183)
21
HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE UlS3F)
HYDR UALlC CONTROL VALVE (BS3F)

Ref.
Item
Assembly standard
Free length
42.9 (1.689)

[34.1 (1.343)] kg (Ib)
24.7 2
(54.5 4.4)
No.
Pilot valve
spring
Relief valve
spring
Unit: mm (in.)
Free length
3.82 0.3
(8.42 0.7)
Free length
Head
side
Rod
side
4
Free length
64.9 (2.555)

[56.2 (2.213)] kg (lb)
14.8 1.5
(32.6 3.3)
Free length
63.8 (2.512)
Check valve
spring
Makeup valve
(dump) spring
Free length
34.5 (1.358)

[30.5 (1.201)] kg (Ib)
0.100.01
(0.22 0.02)
Free length
7
10
22
Plunger (dump)
center spring
Pressure setting:
140 kg/cm 2
(1991 psi)
47.3 4.9
(104.3 10.8)
Free length
Makeup valve
(lift) spring
Pressure setting:
180 kg/cm 2
(2560 psi)
63.8 (2.512)

[56.2 (2.213)] kg (Ib)

[30.5 (1.201)] kg (lb)
Pressure setting:
140 kg/cm 2
(1991 psi)
62.9 4.9
(138.7 10.8)
Free length
Head
side
Pressure setting:
180 kg/cm 2
(2560 psi)
19 1.5
(42 3.3)

[53.7 (2.114) kg(lb)
Safety valve
spring
(outer)
3
(6.6)
64.9 (2.555)

[53.7 (2.114) kg (Ib)
Safety valve
spring
(inner) .
Remarks
39 (1.54)

[26.5 (1.043)] kg (lb)
Rod
side
Service limit
0.09 kg/30 mm
(0.20 Ib/1.l8 in.)
34.5 (1.358)
0.10 0.01
(0.22 0.02)
0.Q9 kg/3D mm
(0.20 Ib/1.I8 in.)
50 (1.97)

[36 (J .42)] kg (Ib)
0.24 0.04
(0.53 0.09)
Free length
58.5 (2.303)

[30 (1.18)] kg (Ib)
5.9 0.6
(13.0 1.32)
0.17 kg/37 mm
(0.37 Ib/1.46 in.)
Free length
88.5 (3.484)
Plunger (lift)
center spring

[46.6 (1.83)] kg (lb)
10.1 I
(22.2 2.2)
Plunger detent
plug
Tightening torque
kgm (lbft)
7.5 0.5
(54.2 + 3.6)
4 (8.8)
8(17.6)
HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (BS3F)
Ref.
No.
Item
II
Safety valve
body.
Tightening torque
kg-m (lb.ft)
20 2
(145 14)
I:)
Relief valve
plug
Tightening torque
kgm (lbft)
20 2
(14514)
13
Safety valve
plug
Tightening torque
kg.m(lbft)
20 2
(145 14)
14
Bolts
Tighteriing torque
kgm (Ibft)
4.6 0.5
(33.3 3.6)
15
Pressure that makes relief

Main relief valve valve open kg/em' (psi)
performance
Flow rate
liter (cu in.)/min
Rod
side
.
16
.Safety valve
perform.
ance
Head
side
Assembly standard
Service limit
Remarks
160 3
(2275 42.7)
64 3
(3906 IS3)
Pressure that makes

relief valve open
kg/em' (psi)
ISO 2
(2560 2S.4)
Flow rate
liter (cu in.)/01in
23 2
(1404 122)
Pressure that makes

relief valve open
kg,<;:m' (psi)
140 2
(1991 28.4)
Flow rate
liter (cu in.)/min
23 2
(1404 122)
23
HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (BS3F)
Safety/make-up valve (dump)
Make-up valve (lift)
24
Check valve (lift)
HYDRAULIC TANK
HYDRAULIC TANK
Ref.
No.
Safety valve
spring in filter
Unit: mni (in.)

Item
Assembly standard
Pree length
106.2 (4.181)

[38 (1.50)] kg (lb)
7.07 0.7
(15.6 1.5)
I
2
Tank cover
mounting bolts
Tightening torque
kgm (Ibft)
3.5 0.3
(25.3 2.2)
Filter cover
center bolt
Tightening torque
kgm (lbft)
4.8 0.5
(34.7 3.6)
Filter bleeder
plug/drain plug
Tightening torque
kgm (lbft)
2.5 0.2
(1S.l 1.4)
Tank cover
mounting bolts
Tightening torque
kgm(lbft)
3.5 0.3
(25.3 2.2)
Service limit
Remarks
6(13.2)
Copper washers
are used; they are
meant to be reo
placed each time
the bolts ate
loosened.
25
LIFT CYLINDERS (BS3F)
LIFT CYLINDERS (BS3F)

Ref.
No.
I
Unit: mm (in.) (
Item
Assembly standard
0.075 ~ 0.139
(0.00295 ~ 0.00547)
Fit of guide bushing on piston rod
Piston securing
nut
Tightening torque
kg-m (lb-ft)
95 + 5
(687 36)
Gland screw
Tightening torque
kg-m (lb-ft)
75 8
(542 58)
Stroke
386 (15.20)
Center to center of pins

with cylinder fully
retracted
700 (27.56)
Piston rod
Remarks
0.35
(0.0138)
Fit of cylinder on pis.ton

.
Service limit
0.35
(0.0138)
26
DUMP CYLINDERS (BS3F)
DUMP CYLINDERS (BS3F)

Ref.
No.
Item
Unit: mm (in.)
Assembly standard
0.35
(0.0138)
Fit of cylinder on piston
Piston securing
nut
Tightening torque
kgm (Ibft)
50 2.5
(362 18)
Gland screw
Tighkning torque
kgm (Ibft)
45 4.5
(325 32.5)
Piston rod
Remarks
Service limit
0.D75
(0.00295
0.139
0.00547)
Stroke
423.5 (16,67)

with cylinder fully
retracted
866.5 (34.11)
0.35
(0.0138)
27
BLADE LIFT CYLINDERS (BD2F)
BLADE LIFT CYLINDERS (BD2F)

Ref.
No.
Item
Assembly standard
Service limit
0,075 - 0.139
(0.00295 - 0.00547)
0.35
(0.0138)
Piston securing
nut
Tightening torque
kg-m (lb-ft)
50 2.5
(362 18)
Cylinder head
Tightening torque
kg-m (lb-ft)
45 4.5
(325 32.5)
Stroke
689 (27.13)

with cylinder fully
retracted
917 (36.10)
28
Piston rod
Unit: mm (in.)
Remarks
.
BUCKET AND LINKAGE (BS3F)
BUCKET AND LINKAGE (BS3F)

Ref.
No.
Item
Assembly standard
Fit of each pin in

bushing
Service limit
35 (1.38)
0.10-0.175
(0.0039 - 0.00689)
0.6
(0.024)
b 45 (1.77)
0.10 ~0.175
(0.0039 - 0.00689)
0.6
(0.024)
50 (1.97)
0.13 - 0.219
(0.0051 - 0.00862)
0.6
(0.024)
Unit: mm (in.)
Cutting edge width
159 (6.26)
120 (4.72)
Tooth length
160 (6.30)
100 (3.94)
Tooth securing
4 . bolts
Tightening torque'
kgm (lb.ft)
29-32
(210-231)
Lock plate
mounting bolts
Tightening torque
kg-m (lbf\)
3.5 0.3
(25.3 2.2)
Remarks
29
BLADE (BD2F )
BLADE (BD2F)
Unit: mm (in.)
{
Ref.
Item
No.
Assembly standard
Service limit
45 (1.77)
Cutting edges/
end bits
Dimension at (1)
75 (2.95)
Cutting edge
mounting plolV
bolts
Tightening torque
kgm (Ibft)
6.5 0.7
(47.0 5.1) .
mounting bolts
Tightening torque
kgm (Ibft)
JO.4 1
(75.2 7.2)
Trunnion cap
mounting bolts
Tightening torque
kg-m (Ib-ft)
(J 14.3 11.6)
3
4
Trunnion
CD
Remarks
15.81.6
-+-----tt+$ --$--
r--l
(,
30
nQ ril )d
1/'
"/
fJ /
!
,;'
- ".j ".
Printed -in
Jit.paJ'i
j,:
SERVICE MANUAL
MITSUBISHI
TRACTOR
TRACTOR SHOVEL
BD2F
BS3F
(DIRECT-DRIVE-TRANSMISSION TYPE)
POWER TRAIN/HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
(
j
FOREWORD
manual are based on information that was current at the time t\lis issue was
written.
Correct servicing will give these machines a long productive life. Before
the respective sections of this manual, and know all the components you \vill
work on.
do. By learning what CAUTION or WARNING symbol emphasizes, know
specific instructions on a job, and the safety equipment required.

conditions:
INOTE j ............... An
operating procedure, condition, etc.,

\vhich it is essential to highlight.
'&'1 CAUTION j ........ Operating

in damage to or destruction of machine.
WARNING
Operating procedures, practices, etc.,

January 1978
,;
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
.............................. I
i,
!,,'.
PreliminalY steps for servicing work

Radiator guard and radiator
Radiator guard (removal and mounting) (BS3F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2
Radiator guard (removal and mounting) (BD2F) . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. 2
Radiator (removal and mounting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3
Engine
Removal and mounting (BD2F) ................................ 5
Universal joint
Removal and installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8
Transmission
Transmission assembly (removal and mounting) .................... 9
Transmission control lever and cover (disassembly and reassembly) ..... 9
Main drive shaft (disassem bly and reassembly) .................... 10
Shift fork (disassembly and reassembly) .......................... 12
,Countershaft (disassembly and reassembly) .......... " ............. 15
Bevel gear shaft (disassembly and reassembly) ...................... 17
Flywheel clutch
Clutch housing assembly and clutch disc assembly (removal and
installation) ................................................ 20
Clutch brake (disassembly and reassembly) ................ , ....... 22
Main drive shaft (disassembly and reassembly) .................... 23
, Clutch filter and oil pump (removal and installation) ................ 25
Clutch release shaft and release lever (disassembly and reassembly) .... 26
Clutch cover and pressure plate (disassembly and reassembly) ........ 27
'Release lever height adjustment ................................ 28
Steering clutches and brakes
Steering clutch and brake assembly (removal and installation) ........ 29
Steering clutch (disassembly and reassembly) .... , ................. 30
Bevel gear and shaft (disassembly and reassembly) ..................
Bevel gear-to-pinion tooth contact adjustment ....................
Bevel gear shaft bearing preload adjustment ......................
Method of backlash adjustment ................................
Method of tooth contact adjustment ............................
Final drive
32
34
34
35
35
Removal (disassembly) and installation (reassembly) ................ 37
Undercarriage
How to slacken the track chain ................................ 40
Track (removal and installation) ................................ 40
Track (disassembly and reassembly) ............................ 41
Track roller (removal and installation) .......................... 42
Track roller (disassembly and reassembly) ........................ 42
Carrier roller (removal and installation) .......................... 43
Carrier roller (disassembly and reassembly) ........................ 44

Recoil spring (removal and installation) '.......................... 45
Recoil spring (disassem bly and reassem bly) ........................ 46
Front idler (removal and installation) ........................... 47
Front idler (disassembly and reassembly) ........................ 48
Floating seal disassembly and reassembly ........................ 49
How to service the floating seal ................................ 49
Hydraulic system
Hydraulic pump (removal imd installation) ........................ 50
Gear pump (disassembly and reassembly) ........................ 50
Hydraulic tank (removal and installation) (BS3F) .................. 51
Hydraulic tank (removal and installation) (BD2F) .................. 52
Hydraulic tank (disassembly and reassembly) ........ ; ............. 52
. Hydraulic control valve (disassembly and reassembly) (BS3F) ........ 53
Hydraulic control valve (disassembly and reassembly) (BD2F) ........ 56
Lift cylinder (removal and installation) (BS3F) .................... 57
Dump cylinder (removal and installation) (BS3F ) .................. 58
Blade cylinder (removal and instalhition)'(BD2F) .............. ' .... 58
Hydraulic cylinder disassembly ................................. 58
How tofit seal to piston ...................................... 59
Special service tools ................ : ........................... 61
I
\
"~
Preliminary steps for servicing work

Components to be serviced
.<:
-a
;;
:~
'il
'e
E
c
.gc
11
-0
'"> '5c'"
OJ
'"e " Vi"

'" '"
::>
Driver's seat removal
Seat suppor.t removal
Removal of steering clutch and brake pedal
Re~~val of steering cJutch.1evcr assembly
Universal joint removal
Transmission oil draining
Platform removal
Removarof steering
c1ut~h c~se
Remoyal
bra.eket
.
,j'"
!l'
'"
"~
E
<!:
0
0
11
0:
"
"
'" ."il
~
"0
'"
....~ ....e
11
0
0
0
0
at master pin
0
0
. Hydraulic,tank removal
Track slackening
0
0
0
fe'mOya}
I - DiSConnecting rigid bar
0
0
C frar.ne removal (DD2F)
Track roller guard removal

.
:
" ~ '"~ '"~ !2 :l
...] ....S ":I: ":I: ....e &:
.~
Hydraulic tank draining -
Track
Po
!J
of steering clutch assembly
br~aking
2~
"'.0
...
Final drive draining
Track
"'80
.S
t",
"0
..
Draining steering clut,eh cas~
:2-g
Oc
'E
's.
."">
Po
R~moval of steering clutch/brake' control
rods
?0 _
tl
>
:9,
,'Preliminary steps
-""
RADIATOR GUARD AND RADIATOR
Radiator guard removal (BS3F)

Preparatory step
Raise the bucket all the way, and support
the lift cylinders to keep the bucket raised. To

support the cylinders, install the brackets,
which are among the furnished tools.
(I) Remove three bolts (I), and take down engine

hood (2) complete with muffler pipe.
Radiator guard removal (BD2F)

Preparatory step
Lower the blade and rest it on the ground.
(I) Remove three bolts (I), and take down engine
hood (2) complete with muffler pipe.
(2) Remove four bolts (3), two on each side, and take
down side guards (4), one on each side.
(2) Remove four bolts (3), two on each side, and take
down side guards (4), right and left.
(3) Remove eight bolts (5), four. on each side, and

take down blade cylinder brackets (6), right and
left, each complete with blade cylinder (7).
(3) Hitch a sling wire to radiator guard (5) and, by
operating the overhead lifter such as a hoist to
take up the weight of the guard, hold the guard
steady. Remove eight bolts (6), four on each side .
. (4) Raise radiator guard (5) just a little in suspended

state and shift the guard forward to separate it
from the frame.
(4) Disconnect head-lamp harness (8).
Radiator guard mounting (BS3F)

Mount the gl,lards by reversing the removal procedure.
(5) Keep radiator guard (9) in suspended state, using

the hoist and lifting sling, -and remove a total of
12 bolts (10), six on each side.
(2) Remove four bolts (2), and take down fan guard
(3).
(6) Lift radiator guard (9) 'just a little and move it
forward to seVer it trom iheframe:"
(3) Loosell hose clips (4) (5) and disconnect rubber

hoses (6)(7).
i,
Radiator guard mounting (BD2F)
(4) Remove clevis pin (9) from each rod (8), right and
left.
Mount the guards by reversing the removal procedure.
Radiator removal
Preparatory step
Have the radiator guards taken down.
(I) Loosen drain cock (I) and make the radiator
empty of water.
(5) At each side of the radiator, remove slolted nut

(10) and mount bolt (II).
(6) Dismount radiator (12).
Radiator mounting
Reverse the removal procedure to mount the radiator.
After setting the radiator in place; however, be sure to .
adjust it, making it trued up relative to the frame by
turning two clevises (13), one oneach side.
ENGINE
ENGINE
Removal (BD2F)
Preparatory steps
(a) Have radiator guards removed .
. (b) Have radiatordismounted.
(c) Remove floor plates (Fr and Re).
(d) Disconnect cables from the battery.
(e) Remove the universal joint.
(I) Disconnect fuel. pipe (I), and make necessary
provisions to prevent fuel from leaking out of the
pipe.
(2) Disconnect control rods (2) (3) from engine side.
(3) Disconnect electrical wire (4) from the starter.
(9) Remove four bolts (11), and take off universal

joint (12) in the hydraulic pump drive line.
(4) Disconnect glow plug wire (5).

(5) Remove horn (6).
(6) Disconnect alternator wire (7).

(7) Disconnect oil pressure unit wire (8) and engine
grounding wire (9).
(10) Draw out clevis pin (13), and disconnect rod (14)
in the clutch control linkage.
(11) At each side of the clutch case, remove castle nut

(15) and mount bolt (16).
(8) Disconnect wire from thermo gauge unit (10).
ENGINE
Moullting (BD2F)
The following steps must be taken during the
sequence of engine mounting steps, which is the'reverse
of removal.
(I) At each of the four mount brackets, be sure to
locate the mount parts as shown here. Note that
shim (I) and washer (2) come on bottom side and

shim (3) and washer (4) on top side. Just when
you have lowered the engine to the mounts, check
(12) Remove castle nut (17) and mount bolt (I 8) at

each side of the engine.
to be sure that clearance (A) between washer (2)

and bracket measures something like 1.5 to 2 mm
(0.059 to 0.079 in.). If the clearance is gone
(measuring 0 mm) at one or more mo~nts, replace
all four mount brackets.
(2) After installing the 1\"0 universal jOilits (one is the
joint in iiydraulic pump <lrive line and the other is
that which is between clutch and transmission).
, check to be sure they are nea[!yhorizontal.
(3)
With mount bolt (5) in place, scejf clearance (8)

is between 1.2 and 2.2 mm (0.047 and 0.087 in.);
if not, reduce or increase the'thickness of shim (3)
to' set the clearance within this range at 'each
mount.
(4) Tighten castle nuts (6) to 15.9 ];6 kgm (ll5

11.6Ibft).
(5)ifter tightening the four mounts" see if the (
combination of engine and clutch is tilted under
visual observation;.it so, check the mounts and
(13) Hitch the lifting sling to the engine securely,
hooking the sling ends to the lifting means
provided on the engine and lift the engine-andclutch combination gently. Ease the engine out in
suspended state toward front side to remove it
from the machine.
brackets and make necessary corrections. Be sure

that the combination is trued up and level.
(6) As necessary, use the following replacement parts:

Washers (2) (4): 6mm (0.24in.) thiclmess,
5861102400
4'lnm (0.16in.) thickness,
5881111200.
Shim (I):
I.mm (0.04in.) thickness,

6436174611
0.5mm (0.02in.) thickness,
6436174612
Shim (3):
0.5mm (0.02in.) thickness,

6436117156
ENGINE
UNIVERSAL JOINT
UNIVERSAL JOINT
Removal
Preparatory step
Have floor plates (Fr and Re) removed to
provide access to t.he joint.
(I) Remove bolts (I) (2), four each.

(2) Pick out universal joint (3).
Installation
To install the joint, reverse the two sequential steps
of removal.
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION
Transmission assembly removal

Preparatory steps
(a) Remove Door plates (Fr and Re).
(b) Remove the under guard.
(c) Drain the transmission.
(d) Remove the propeller shaft.
(e) Remove the steeringclutch lever assembly.
(I) The transmission must be lifted with an hoist.
Hitch a lifting sling to the transmission case.
(2)"With the weight of the transmission taken up by
the sling, remove mounting boits (1) to free it
from the steering clutch case.
(3). Lift the assembly (2) out ofthe machine.
(3) Remove bolts (6) (7) to free control lever (8). Be

sure to recover spdl}g washers when removing
these bolts.
(4) Pull out control lever (8), and separate or take out
the parts assoCiated with this lever;namely, dust
cover (9), cover (10), retainer (11) and spring (12).
Transmission assembly mounting

Using the hoist and lifting sling, bring the transmission
assembly into position, reversing the procedure of
rem~jya1.
Transmission control lever and cover disassembly

(I) : Set up the removed transmission a;sembiyon the
"work stand or bench. Remove plug (1), plug base
(2) and gasket (3).
(5) Remove two bolts (13) (on the outer side, each
with a spring washer) and two bolts (14) (on the
iIUler side, each with a spring washer). Take off
lever case (15) and gasket (16).
(2) Take off level gauge (4) and remove pipe (5).
( NOTEl
Outer bolts (13) are longer than inner bolts
(14). Be sure to discriminate these two sizes at
the time of reassembly.
TRANSMISSION
(NOTE
Bolts (14) come on the inner side and bolts

(13) on the outer side of the case.
(3) Mount spring (12), retainer (11), cover (10) and
dust cover (9) on the inner end of control lever
(8).
(4) Insert lever (8) into caSe (15), positioning the lever
angularly to bring its pivoting groove to the hiner
side of the case.
(5) Put on cover (10), and secure it by tigMening
bolts (6) (7). Use spring washers on these bolts.
(6) Rem()ve ten bolts (I 7) andspriilgwashers, and

take off transmission cover (18) and gasket (19).
(
(6) Install. level gauge pipe (5), using the sealing
. compound (THREE BOND No.2) to proVide an
oil-tight fit. Insert gauge(4).
Transmission control lever and cover,reasse)nbly
(7) Install plug base (2) and plug (I), with gasket (3)
fitted to the seat.
(I) Install cover (18), securing it to the case by

tightening bolts (17), each with a spring washer.
Be sure topositioil gaskeL(19),squarely.when
placing the cover on the casc.
..,
. -
(2) Put on lever case (IS) and its gasket (16), and
seCure the case by tightening bolts (13) (14),
Remember, these bolts need spring washers.
Main drive shaft disassembly

Preparatory step
Have the transmission control lever and cover
removed in advance, and proceed as follows:
10
TRANSMISSION
(I) Remove nange (I): this nange is on the input end

of main drive shaft, and comes out with expansion
plug (2) and snap ring (3). Plug (2) and ring (3)
may be removed from the flange, as necessary.
(4) Using a proper drift and hammer, force main drive

shaft (I I) into the case by delivering the drive to
the splined end (on the steering clutch case side)
of the shaft. Take out spacer (12), constant mesh
gear (13), 1st reverse gear (14), spacer (IS), 1st
gear (16) and spacer (17). Remove bearing (18)
from main drive shaft (11), and snap ring (19) and
bearing (20) from the case: these bearings may be
left in place unless removal is necessary.
(2) Remove two bolts (4) and one seal bolt (5), that is,
a total of three bolts, each with a spring washer,
and take off COver (6) and gasket (7). Oil seal (8)
may be detached from the cover (6).
Main drive shaft reassembly

(I) . Drive bearing (20) into the case wall (on output
side) and fit snap ring (19) to retain this bearing
in place.
(2) Feed main drive shaft (II) into the case thro\lgh
the hole on input side while mounting thereon
spacer (17), 1st gear (16), spacer (15), 1st reverse
gear (14),constant mesh gear (13) and spacer (12).
(3) Install bearing (18), as shown.
11
TRANSMISSION
(6) Install lock washer (10) and lock nut (9) to secure
the bearing and snap ring on the output end of (
main drive shaft.
(4) Fit oil seal (8) - properly greased at its lip portion
- to cover (6), and install tlus' cover with gasket
(7) by tightening bolts (4) (5). Be:sureto use a
spring washer on each bolt. Remember, seal boIr
(5) comes on the bottom side.
Subseqnent step
The control lever and cover can now be
restored.
Shift fork disassembly

.' Preparatory steps
(a) Have the contiollever and cover removed.
.(b) Remove the main drive shaft.
....
.
.. (
(I) Remove three expansion plugs (0 from the traris'
mis'sian case,
(5) Fit snap ring (3) and expansion plug to flange (I),
and mount this flange on shaft (11).
(2) From the top' face of the case, remove three

. springs (2) and three steel balls (3).
12
TRANSMISSION
p) 'wosen' and remove set screw (4), which secures

3rd~hift fork (6) to 3rd"shift rail (5), Take out
3rdshift rail and shift fork (6),
(4) Pick out two steel balls (7) located between 2nd
. shift rail. and 3rd shift rail;
(5) Free 2nd shift fork (10) by removing its set screw
(8), and take out 2nd shift rail (9) and fork (10).
(6) From 2nd shift rail (9), pick out interlock pin
(11).
(7) Remove two steel balls (12) located between 2nd

shift rail and 1st shift rail.
(8) Free 1st shift fork (IS) by removing its set screw
(13), and take out 1st shift rail (14), fork (15) and
collar (16),
13
TRANSMISSION
(2) Insert 1st shift rail (14) into the case, mounting I
thereon 1st shift fork (15) and collar (16); Secure
the fork by tightening its set screw (I 3): Lock the
tightened screw (13) to the fork with a wirepiece.
(9) From the removed 3rd and 1st shift forks, remove
plug (17), spring (18) and plunger (19).
(3) Insert into the ball hole (between Istsl\iftrail and

2nd shift rail} two steelballs (12).
Shift fork reassembly

(1) Install plunger (19), spring (18) into 3rd shift fork
(6), and run in plug (17) to retain the plunger and
spring in the fork. Similarly install the plunger and
. plug in 1st sMtfork (\.5).
14
(4) Insert interlock pin (II) into 2nd shiftrail (9).
TRANSMISSION
(5) Insert 2nd shift rail (9) into the case, while
mounting shift fork (10) on the rail, and secure
the fork to the rail by tightening set screw (8).
Lock the tightened screw to the fork with a wire
(8) Place three steel balls (3) and three springs (2) in
the holes provided in the top face of the transmission case.
piece.
(9) Drive into the Case. wall thiee expansion plugs (I),
using a proper drift and hammer.
(6) Insert into the ball hole (between 2nd shift rail
and 3rd shift rail) two steel balls (7).
(7) Insert 3rd shift rail (5) into the case, while mounting thereon shift forb(6). Tighten set screw (4) to
secure the fork, andJock the screw to the fork
with a wire piece.
'i
Subsequent step
The subsequent work is in two jobs: installing the main drive shaft assembly and reassembling the control lever and cover on the top of
the transmission case.

Coun tershaft
disassembly
Preparatory step
Th." following procedure assumes that the
control lever and cover are off ane! that the
main drive shaft assembly has been taken out.
(I) Remove four bolts (I), each provided with a spring
washer, and take off cover (2) and gasket (3).
15
TRANSMISSION
output-side case wall, take out 1st sliding gear(! 2nd sliding gear (12) and 3rd sliding gear (13).1
"j
""(2)F~om the end face of oevel gearshaft, remove two

bolts (4)" and their spring washers, and take off
lock plate (5) and washer (6).
(5) Pick out snap "ring (15) off bevel gear shaft (14),
andremove the inner race of bearing (16) from the
shaft. From the case wall, remove the bearing
. outer race.
""~
(3) Run in two j'lCking bolts (A) and force bearing

cage (7) off. Remove bearing (8),"0" ring (9) and
shim (10) from the cage.
Bevel gear "shaft reassembly

(I)" Fit bearing inner race (16) to bevel gear shaft (14)
by driving the race. Fit snap ring (15) to the shaft.
(4) Drive on the end face of bevel gear shaft into the
case from the universal joint side (input side) and,
while pulling the shaft (14) out through the
18
TRANSMISSION
(3) Install bearing (18),
asshq\~n.
(4) At the steering clutch case side of the case, install

washer (9) and lock plate (8) by tightening two
bolts (7), and lock these bolts by bending the lock
plate.
(6) Put on gasket (3), place cover (2), and secure the
cover to the case by tighiening four bolts (I), each
with a spring washer, thus completing the reassembly in place of the countershaft.
Subsequent steps
The subsequent jobs are: (a) shift fork
reassembly, (b) main drive shaft reassembly',
and (c) reassembly of control lever' and cover,
all in place.
Bevel gear shaft disassembly

Preparatory step
The following procedure assumes that (a)
control lever and cover are off, (b) main drive
shaft assembly is out, (c) shift forks are out,
and (d) countershaft assembly is out, leaving
the bevel gear shaft and others in the case.
(1) Remove four bolts (1), each complete with a
spring washer. Take off cover and gasket (3).
(5) At the other side, similarly install lock plate (5)
and washer (6) on the end face of countershaft.
After' tightening two bolts (4), be sure to lock
them by bending the plate.
17
\.
"
,'.
I
I
TRANSMISSION
(:!) Fit hearing oll[er race (16) into [he bore by

driving as shown.
(5) Using the drift, drive the cage into the case wall.
.1'
..
(3) Feed bevel gear shaft "lnto the case througJr the
outputside wall of the case \vhile mounting
thereon 3rd sliding gear (13), 2nd sliding gear (12)
and 1st sliding gear (II).
(6) Fit gasket (3) and put on cover (2) .. Secure the
cover by tightening four bolts (I): a spring washer
is provided on each bolt.
(4) Fit "0" ring (9) and shim (10) to bearing case (7),
and position the cage s'ftiaiely at the bore to force
it into the case wall.--Be . sure to keep the cage
trued up by running in four guide bolts (B). These
bolts are for aligning the bolt holes.
19
FLYWHEEL CLUTCH
FLYWHEEL CLUTCH
Clutch housing assembly and chltch disc assembly
removal
Preparatory step
Have the engine unit (cOJuprisingthe clutch)
taken down from the' machine: and set on the
Ivoik stand. The clut~histo be removed from
the engine in this condition.
(1) Remove drain plug (I) to emptyitlre'cIutdtof oil. ,.
(2) Removeoil pipes (2) (3); These' pipes are associated

with the oil cooler: '
(3)
'. .
Remov~universaljoint assembly (A).

(7) InstaU four guide bolts (C) by running them into
clutch spring holes provided in the clutch cover.
InSert clutch disc arbor (D) into the splined hole
of'the clutch disc hub.
(8) Rem()~e 12 bolts (7) securing the clutch cover (0
flywheel. A spring washer is on each bolt. Pull off
the clutch cover assembly (8).
-
(
, (4) Remove a totai of '19 b"its (4) securing clutch
housing to flywheel housing. A spring I"asher is
'.,lised on each bolt.
(9) 'P~lloffouter clutch disc assembly (9).
(5) Remove the breather plug and run lifting eye bolt
(B) into the plug base.
(6) By operating the hoist, suspend the clutch housing
assembly (5) and, in suspended state, sever it from
flywheel housing. Take off gasket (6).
20
-'"
,~
FLYWHEEL CLUTCH
(10) Pull off mating plate (10) and inner clutch disc
assembly (11). .
(2)
rUt
on clutch cov.r assembly (8)and secure it to

the flywheel by tightening 12 bolts (7). Be sure to
. use a spr~ng wasller
each bolt. Remove four
guide bolts (C), and pull off arbor (D).
on
Outch housing assembly and clutch disc assembly

installation
.
Preparatory step
The clutch alignment arbor used in removing
the clutch must be used in installing work in
order to align the clutch discs and cover.
1 Alignment arbor (D)
I. 5880915600
.(1) Fit alignment arbor (D) to the center offlywheel,

and pass inner disc (11), mating plate (10) and
outer disc (9) onto the arbor.
(3) Fit gasket (6) to flywheel housing; bring in clutch

housing assembly (5) in suspended state; and fit
the assembly to flywheel housing through the
gasket. Secure the housing (5) by tightening 19
bolts (4), each complete with a spring washer.
21
FLYWHEEL CLUTCH
(4) Reconnect oil pipes (2) (3).
Clutch brake reassembly
(I) Mount adjusting bolt (18), seat (17), Spring (16),

seat (IS) and slotted nut (14) on the brake'!ever
(12); run down slotted nut to compress the spring
to 40 mm(I.S7 in.) in leJigth; and lock the nut by
, inserting split pin O(}
,
'@',-~-~
@
@~'-~-":'iI
(i]J --=:::@
@
@,
&( CAUTION)
Inner clutch disc is marked "FSIDE" and
outer clutch disc "PPSIDE," Be sure to distin-
guish between the two when installing the

clutch.
";'
Clutch brake disassembly

(1) Remove snap ring (1) and plain washer (2) to free
the anchored end of brake band (6). '
(2) ,Pull off split pin (3) and remOVe plainwasher (4)
and clevis pin (S) to disconnect the band from
lever (12). Take off brake band (6).
(2) Connect adjusting bolt (18) to the forked lug by

means of clevis pili (11) and plain'washer (10),
locking the washer by inserting split pin (9),
Mount brake lever (12) on pivoishaft and retain
the lever by ,fitting plain washer (8) and inserting
split pin (7).
(
(3) Pull off split pin (7) and remove plain washer (8)
from the pivot shaft of lever (12).
(4) Pull off split pin (9) and remove plain,vasher (10)
and' clevis pin (11). Remove brake lever (12),
complete with adjusting bolt (18), spring (16) and
others.
(S) From brake lever (12), remove 'split pin (13),

slotted nut (14), seat (IS), spring (16), seat (17)
and adjusting bolt (18).
22
(3) Connect the~lic:l;or end of brake band (6) to the

pivot pin, seCuring the connection ,by fitting plain
washer (2) and snap ,ring (I), Connect the other
end) clevis end, to lever (12), securing the conncetion by fitting clevis pin (S), plain washer (4) and
split pin (3),
FLYWHEEL CLUTCH
(3) Remove three bolls (7), each complete with a

spring washer, and take off cover (8).
(4) Pick out seal ring (9) and snap ring (10), and
detach cover (12) from main drive shaft (I I).
Maindrive'sh~ft disassembly
Preparatory step
For this work, have the clutch brake taken
down and proceed as follows:
(I) Slide the release bearing assembly off main drive

shaft in place. Disassemble this bearing into parts
(1) (2), hub (3) and two bushings (4):
(5) Remove beafing (13) and oil seal (14) from cover
(12).
(2) Remove: four bolts (5) and their spring washers,

and ,draw, out the main shaft assembly. Remove
, gask~i (1;).
'
Main drive shaft reassembly

(I) Fit oil seal (14) to cover (12).
23
FLYWHEEL CLUTCH
.:(5) . Fit gasket (6) to the mating face of clutchhousing,

position. the main drive shaft assembly in place,
and secure the assembly by tightening four bolts
(5), using a spring washer on each bolt.'
(2) Prive be~ring (13) into covet (12):
"}
(3) Insert main drive shaft (11) into cover (12), and
put on snap ring (10) and seal ring (9).
(6) Drive the two bushings into rClease hub (3), as

shown, and combine bearing halves (I), with the
hub, thus building up the release bearing.'
(7) Slide the release bearing onto main drive shaft.

(4) Secure cover (8) to cover (12), locating the oil
groove of cover (8) correctly. Be sure to use a
spring washer on each bolt (7).
24
Subsequent step
The job to follow this reassembly is the
mounting of clutch brake.
FLYWHEEL CLUTCH
Clutch fIlter and oil pump removal

(I) Disconnect and remove suction pipe (I).
(2) Remove three spring-w~sher"d bolts (2) securing

the filter cover, and take off filter cover (3) and
gasket (4).
(4) Remove four spring-washered bolts (8) fastening

down the pump in place.
(5) From .' clutCh housing, draw out clutch pump

assembly (9) and "0" ring (10).
,! ..
Clutch fIlter and oil pump installation

(3) From clutch housing, re1l1ove oil filter (5), filter
case (6) and gasket (7).
(I) Fit "0" ring (10) to the clutch pump assembly,

and fit the assembly to clutch housing.
(2) Tighten four spring-washered bolts (8) to secure
the cl\ltch pump assembly in place.
:.
'.
25
FLYWHEEL CLUTCH
0)
Fit gasket (7) 10 clutch housing, insert filtcr case

(6) and position nltcr (5) in place.
(4) Fit gasket (4) to case (6), put on cover (3), and
secure the cover by tightening three springwash
ered bolfs.
' '
(5) Reconnect suction pipe (I).
(2} Peed clutch release shaft (9) into clutch housing"

while holding clev),s (8) inside to receiveshaft (9).
With release shaft' (9) held properly by needle
bearings, insert clevis pin (7) and lock this pin by
using split pin (6).
Gutch release shaft and release lever disassembly

Preparatory step
The following procedure assumes that (a)
brake band has been removed and (b) main
drive shaft too has been- removed.
(I) Remove bolt (I) and its spring washer to loosen
the grip of clutch lever (2) upon release shaft (9).
Take off lever (2) and recover key (3).
(2) Pull out spring pin (4) and remove lever (5).
(3) Pull out split pin (6) and clevis pin (7). Draw out
clutch release shaft (9) while picking up clevis (8).
(3) Drive key (3) into the keyway provided in the
clutch release shaft. Pit clutch lever (2) onto the
shaft, and tighten bolt (1) to secure the lever
positively to the shaft. Be careful 'riot to. omit the
spring washer for tltis bolt.
Gutch release shaft and release lever reassembly

(I) Into each hole, right and left, push needle bearing
(10) by driving, and nt oil seal (11), as shown.
\
/
26
FLYWHEEL CLUTCH
(4) On the other end of the shaft, mount lever (5) and
lock it by driving split pin (4).
Subsequent step
The subsequent work is the installaiion of
main drive shaft and brake band.
Gutch cover and pressure plate disassembly

(I) Scribe or otherwise provide match marks across
the joint seam between clutch cover (1) and
pressure plate (2). Run four guide bolts into the
clutch spring holes of clutch cover.
(2) Remove' four springwashered reamer bolts (3)
securing strap plates, and take off four washers;
(3) Remove four bolts (5) and their spring washers.

Pick out four lock plates (6) from clutch cover (1).
(4) Loosen and remove four nuts (7) by running each
off its lever support (15).
(5) Gradually loosen the four guide bolts equally to
allow the clutch cover to be pushed away from
pressure plate by the force of clutch springs.
(6) Remove the guide bolts, and take clutch cover (I)
off pressure plate (2).
,L
(7) Disengage and remove from the removed clutch

cover the return spring (8).
(8) From pressure plate (2), pick out twelve pressure
springs (9).
(9) At each rekase lever (13), remove split pin (10),
washer (II) and pin (12), and take out the release
lClutch cover
2'Pressure plate
3Reamer bolt w/spring washer
4-Washer
-5-Bolt w/spril)9 washer
6 .. Lock plate
7Nut
10Split pin
l1-Washer
8-Return spring
17-Mating plate
12-Pin
13-Release lever
14Pin
15-Lever support
16-Clutch disc assembly
9-Pressure spring
Clutch cover and pressure plate reassembly

(1) Combine release levers with lever supports by
inserting pin (14) through the pin holes of release
lever (13) and lever support (15).
(2) Fit each release lever (13) to the lever boss formed
of pressure plate (2); insert pin (12) through the
boss and lever; and put on washer (II). Retain
and lock the washer (11) by inserting split pin
(10). When handling the combination of release
lever and support at each boss, be careful not to
allow the pin (14) to slip out.
lever.
,
(10) Remove pin (14) and separate lever support (IS)

from release lever (13).
(3) Set new return springs (8) in the clutch cover.
(4) At the spring boss parts formed of pressure plate

(2), position twelve pressure springs (9), keeping
each spring standing true and square.
(5) Place clutch cover (I) over pressure plate (2),

positioning the former by bringing the match
marks into alignment.
27
FLYWHEEL CLUTCH
[NOTE
As you put on the clutch cover, check to be
sure that the pressure springs fit snugly into
their seats formed of the cover.
(6) Insert the four guide bolts, each with a plain
washer, into clutch cover (I), and run them into
the tapped holes provided in pressure plate (2) at
its boss parts.
(7) Tighten the guide bolts gradually and equally to
push down the clutch cover.
[NOTES
a) While pressing the cover down,be sure to let

lever supports (15) come out neatly through
the holes provided in spherical seats formed
of the clutch cover.
b) Be sure that the return springs (8) are in
correct .position.
Push down the cover. until the strap plates
touch the boss parts of pressure plate.
(8) At each strap plate, use a drift pin of about 8 mm
(0.32 in.) in 'diameter to align the hole in strap
plate to the tapped hole in pressure plate. Into the
aligned hole, insert reamer bolt (3), complete with
special washer (4) and plain washer. Tighten the
four reamer bolts equally to a torque value
between 4 and 6 kgm (29 and 43 Ib-ft).
(9) Put nut (7) on each lever support (15), and run
down the four nuts (7) until the lever height
(defined below) measures about74 mm (2.91 in.):
tlus is a tentative setting.
Release lever height adjustment

Preparatory step
"Lever Ij~ight refers to the elevation of the
inner tip of release lever above the friction
surface of flywheel. The following procedure
assumes that the flywheel has been removed
from the engine and is now placed on a surface
plate.
(I) Rig up a dial gauge, as shown, making sure its
supporting fixture is solid and free of any rattle.
Place a 74-mm (2.91-in.) block gauge on the
flywheel and adjust the dial gauge to read zero
rum.
28
Clutch cover assembly

Discs and plate
Blockgauge
::!-_G::::==1."e
Flywheel or its
q uivalent jig
74 mm
_!LL~~~~
(b)
, 'Release lever height adjustment

(2) Stack the two clutch discs andmating plate upon
the flywheel, and put on the clutch cover assembly
with its pressure plate down. Secure the. Cover 'to
the flywheel by tightening the twelve, bolts, each
with a spring washer. Remove the four guide bolts.
(3) .Adjust tlie'leverheight of each reie~se lever, as
'follows: Poinflhe dial gaugespindlel<;/helever
tip; read its indication; tighten' or loosen the nut
(on lever support) until the dial gauge reads zero;
and repeat this process on the other three release
levers.
Pump the release levers up and down at least
50 times and measure the lever height again. As
necessary, adjust the height, making sure the
difference between largest reading and smallest
re~ding is not more than 0.7 mm (0.028 in.).
(4) Put on lock plate (6) and secure it to the cover by
tightening bolt (5) to 0.6 to 0.8 kg-m (4.3 to 5.8 I
lb-ft). Be careful not to disturb the nuts.
STEERING CLUTCHES AND BRAKES

Steering clutch and brake assembly removal
Preparatory steps
(a) Have the seat and seat bracket dismounted.
(b) Have the brake control rods taken down.
(c) Have the steering clutch control linkage
removed.
(d) Take down the battery.

(I) Remove two bolts (I) and take off cover (2).
. ~- - i!
'._ II'
.(7) Remove a total of20 bolts (12) to undo the flange

conne.ction between brake drum and pinion.
(2) Remove spring (3) and anchor mounting bolts (4),

thus disconnecting anchor (5) and lever (6).
(3) Remove bolts (7) and take off bracket (8).
(4) Remove grease nipple nut (9).
(NOTE
Removal ofbolts(ll) (12) will be facilitated

by pushing ,the machine to rotate the drive line
just a little at a time.
(8) Push clutch shaft toward final drive toundo the
spigot fit in the coupling and, under this condition,
remove the steering clutch and brake assembly
(complete with yoke).
Steering elu tcb and brake assembly installation

(I) Fit "0" ring (I) to the flange part of clutch shaft.
Gently feed ihesteering clutch. and brake assembly
(5) From brake band, remove anchor (5), lever (6)

and spring (10).
(6) Remove a total of 8 bolts (11) to sever coupling
from clutch shaft.
into the steering casco
(2) Position the assembly in place, letting the ban stud

portion of the yoke enter the boss portion of the
case.
29
(8) Connect the lever and anchor to the brake banI'

Put on the bracket, bolt the anchor, and put 0,
the cover.
Subsequent steps
(a) Installation of the steering clutch control,
and clutch adjustment.
(b) Installation of the brake control rods.
(c) Installation of the seat and seat bracket.
Steering clutch disassembly
(3) Fasten the coupling to clutch shaft by tentatively

tightening bolts (2), each with a lock washer.
Preparatory step
Have the steering clutch severed from the
brake drum', and have the belownamed tool on
han'd.'
,Needed tool
Ot.
Symbol
Steering clutch tool: 58609-01900
(A)
(1) Unbend lock washer (1), remove bolt (2) and pick
out washer (3).
-\
(4) Secure ihe pinion flange to brake drum by tightening bolts (3) to 4.3 kg-m (3 Ll Ib-ft). A spring
washer must be used with each boIt (3) .
.,
(2) Withdraw clutch shaft (4) from the assembly .
(5) Tighten bolts (2) equally, and bend the tongue of

each lock washer.
(6) Install the grease-hose nipple on the case, and
secure the nipple by tightening its nut.
(7) Install the coil spring, hooking it to the brake band
and to the case.
30
(3) Remove set screw (5), and run out nut (6).
(4) Remove yoke sub-assembly (C) from clutch plate
sub-assembly (B).
'1.
(5) Firmly hold clutch plate.subassembly. Give a

downward push with tool (A) to spring guide (7)
to compress the spring and remove retainer (8):
repeat this process to remov", all retainers (7).
(6) From each guide pin, remove guide (7) and spring
(9).
Steering clutch reassembly

Needed tool
Steering clutch tool: 5860901900
Qt.
Symbol
(A)
The reassembling procedure is the reverse of the

disassembling procedure, but some of the individual
steps must be carried out as follows:
,-
(a) Force guide pins (I) into plate (2).
..
f~~
(7) Draw out drum (10), and take out a total of 12

plates (II )(12).
(b) when inserting the two kinds plates into drum (5),
be 'sure to mate the toothed faces of plate (3) and
plate (4).
(c) Be sure to use tool (A) when fitting the retainer to'
each guide pin. Compress the spring with this tool
and fit the retainer.
(8) Disassemble the yoke subassembly into bolts (13),

shifter (14) and yoke (15).
31
(d) After r\mning in and tightening nut, (6) against

plate (2), drill and tap a hole anew for the set
screw.
(2) Force out bevel gear shaft (4) by driving with a

softmetal hammer while taking out spacer (5) and
bevel gear (6).
Use 5-mm (0.20in.) drill and make a 14mm

(0.55.in,) deep hole.
(3) Remove bolts (7), each securing loeking washer

(8). Take out washers (8).
Thread with M6 X 1 tap to lOmm (039-in.)

depth.
(e) After tightening the set screw to lock the nut,
lock the screw by punching at two places.
(I) The tightening torque for the bolts securing the
flanged portion of shaft is 17 1.7 kg-m (123
123Ibft),
Bevel gear and shaft disassembly

Preparatory step
Have the steering clutch and brake assemblies, right and left, rem.oved in advance, and
have the below-named tool on hand.
Needed tool
Wrench: 58809-10200
Qt.
Symbol
(A)
(I) Unbend lock washer (I), Remove bolt (2) and

washer (3), Repeat tItis at the other end of bevel
gear shaft.
32
(4) Using wrench (A), loosen nuts (9), Remove nuts

(9), bearing cages (10) and coupling (II).
:-.
(c) When tightening bolt (4) at each end face of bevel

gear shaft,. torque it to anywhere between 16 and
19 kg-m (liS and 134Ib.ft).
Bevel gear and shaft reassell) bly

Needed tool
Wrench: 58809-10200
.~
Qt.
Symbol
(A)
....
Reverse th" disassembly procedure, and carry out the

following instructions:
(a) Oil seal (2) is to be pressed into cage (I). Be sure

to position the seal as shown, and to fill up the lip
space with grease, before fi\!ing it to the cage.
(d) Backlash between bevel gear (5) and pinion (6) is

meant to be adjusted by repositioning nuts (7),
right and left, in place. This backlash is prescribed
to be between 0.15 and 0.20 mm. (0.0059 and
0.0079 in.). After adjusting, check to be sure that
the tooth contact pattern is satisfactory.
CD
(e) Starting torque is specified for the steering clutch.

shaft. The specification is 0.72 - 0.88 kgm (5.21
. - 6.37 Ib-ft), and is to be met by making the two
nuts (7) more or less tight.
(b) The set screw (3) on .each. bearing cage must be

locked in place by punching at two places.
33
(I) In the direct-drive machines, bevel gear (5) comes

on the right, as shown. Experience tells that this
requirement is often neglected out of carelcssness.
Bevel gear shaft bearing preload adjustment

Backlash adjustment is meaningful only where the
two bearings holding the bevel gear shaft are properly
tight to produce the specified starting torque - 0.72 0.88 kg-m (5.21 - 6.37Ib-ft) - on steering clutch shaft.
Before starting to adjust the backlash, locate the bevel
gear tentatively to permit checking, with right-hand nut
(1) held steady by means oflockplate (3) and left-hand
nut (2) made tentatively tight, both nuts beingsettJed
in place.
Bevel gear-to-piniontooth contact adjustment
It is highly essential that bevel gear and bevel pinion

should be in a properly meshed condition. Whether the
mesh is proper or not can be told from contact patterns
to be produced by rolling in the usual manner. For this
adjustment, two displacements are involved: displacement of bevel pinion on the one hand and displacement
of gear on the other, each along its own axis.
To displace the pinion, increase or decrease the shim
(!) between bearing cage and transmission case. To
displace the gear, reposition the two adjusting nuts, right
and left, on the bearing cages.
Both backlash and tooth contact pattern can be

varied for adjustment by these two displacements. The
way the backlash and pattern change for a displacement
of pinion or gear) or both, is due mainly to the tolerances
within which the related parts are machined during
manufacture. Thus, a set of general rules cannot be
quantitatively stated for these two adjustments. The
procedure is the same -for all cases, but a trialand..error
method must be used to obtain the specified backlash
and tooth contact pattern in the manner to be described
below.
The pinion and gear are selectively combined during
manufacture;the two form a set. If either the gear or the
pinion has to be replaced, both must be replaced by a
new set.
34
Depending on the starting torque, tighten or loosen

the two .nuts equally to obtain a torque between 0.72
and 0.88 kg-m (5.21 and 6.37 Ib-ft). The torque does
not chaI,lge if one nut is loosened by a certain amount
and the other nut is tightened by the same amount. This
connection is dealt with further in the section for final
drive.
Method of tooth contact adjustment

(
Be sure that the shim (for bevel pinion) is the same

as that which was removed in disassembly. Of course, a
new shim has to be used in reassembly if a new set of
pinion and gear is to be installed. The following method

assumes. that the pinion and gear have _been instal1e:d,
with a proper backlash produced by the foregoing
method.
Bear in mind that a proper backlash adjustment

usually brings the pinion and gear into a properly
meshed condition. Using a paste of red lead or prussian
blue, roll contact patterns according to the standard
practice. The mesh is correct and' proper if the contact
pattern starts faintly from the tooth toe and extends
toward the heel, covering about 30% of tooth length.
Method of backlash adjustment

\
Insert a fuse stock piece in the mesh (A) between

pinion and gear, and roll the t\V,o in the usual manner to
flatten the stock piece. Measure' the n~ttened piece (C)

with a micrometer (B). Read the backlash in this way at
four places equiangularly apart.
Backlash specification
0.15
(0.0059
This is a noload pattern; in operation, the pattern will
shift under load to distribute 'the stress properly for

quiet running and long tooth.life.
~0.20
mm
0.0079 in.)
Example A
.'
!.l
To bring the backlash into this range, loosen one nut

and tighten the other by thesame amount (so that the
bearing preload shall not be. disturbed) to displace the
gear toward or away from the pinion.
Correct no-load contact pattern
Example B sliows a contact pattern suggesting that

pinion is backed away too much from bevel gear. The
remedy is to increase the thickness of the shim by an '
alllOl-tnt necessary to relocate the contact pattern to the
position shown in Example A.
Example B
Incorrect contact pattern due to pinion
backed away too much
35
Example C means that pinion is advanced too much

toward bevel gear. In this case) the' shim thickness must
be reduced to back away the pinion.
Example C
..
~'
I ncorrect contact pattern due to pinion

. adyanced too much
Repositioning the pinion in order to obtain the

contact pattern approximating that of Example A necessarily disturbs the backlash adjustment. For tltis reason,
backlash and tooth contact must be adjusted alternately
.
more than onceuntilboth become satisfactory.
36
FINAL DRIVE
FINAL DRIVE
(
Removal (disassembly)
Two exploded views are sufficiently detaiJed to
illustrate the procedure to be followed in disassembling
and reassembling the final drive.
18
l-Solt and washer (3 each)
6-Washer
lOCap
11Bolt and washer (5 each)
12-Bolt and washer (12 each)
l3Roller bearing
l,4.Roller bearing . .
6.Sprock'et
1~~Gear
7-Bolt and washer (6 each)

a-Seal case
9Gear case
16-Floating seal
17Shaft
1S-Spacer
2Cove~
. 3Bolt"
4Lock washer
Final drive - Exploded view
CD
i-Bolt (2 pes)
2Lock 'plate
48all bearing
5Pinion
6-80h 8,nd washer (6 each)

7.QiI seal
S-5eal case
-9-Ball bearing
Pinion subassembly - Exploded view
37
FINAL DRIVE
Preparatory steps
(a) Have the two track chains broken at the
master pin.
(b) Drain the final drive case.
(c) Have the steering clutch drums removed.
(6) Install the lifting tool on the gear case. Remove (

twelve bolts (10) securing the gear case, and take'
down the case together with shaft sub-assembly in
rt'" ---.
suspended state.
(I) Remove three bolts securing the cover, and pull
the cover off.
(2) Remove bolt (1). Take out lock washer (2) and
washer (3). Draw sprocket (4) offthe:shaft.
/
\:.
r ~:
.\\~
WARNING
(3) Remove six bolts and take off seal case (5).
(4) Remove five bolts and take off cap (6).
As the final drive gear case comes off in

suspended state, the gear shaft parts from the
clutch case. Unless the lifting tool or its
eqUivalent is used to hold the shaft to the gear
case, the shaft sub-assembly might slip off and
drop to the /loor, resulting in possible personal
injury. Use of the lifting tool or its equivalent is
mandatory.
(7) Draw out the shaft sub-assembly from the removed

gear case.
(8) Pull roller-bearing inner races (ll) (12) off the
shaft, and remove spacer (13) and gear (14).
(5) From the end of pinion, remove fwo boits (7),

lock plate (8) and wash~r (9).
(9) To remove pllllOn (15), drive it into the clutch

case. For this driving, use a" softmetal hammer.
(10) Detach the seal case, which is secured by six bolts,
from the clutch case.
(ll) Remove ball bearing (16) from the clutch case.
38
\)
FINAL DRIVE
l
o 0
,
1
Installa tion( reassem bly)

(I) Install the ball bearing fDr pinion in the clutch
case, and attach the seal cas~_~
(2) Mount the gear and spacer Dn the shaft, and ddve
the two bearing inner races onto the shaft.
(3) Insert the shaft subassembly into the fmal drive
gear case; install tile lifting tool on the gear case;
and attach it in suspended state to the clutch case.
(4) Insert the pinion into the bearing already in place
in the clutch case, and install the other bearing on
the pinion by driving it onto_ the pinion.
(5) Fit l.8mm (0.071in.) (standard) thick shim to
the gear case, and secure the seal case to the gear
case, with the shirri in between.
(6) Check the bearing preload on pinion-. TillS preload

in tenns of starting .torque is specified.
_i
-,
Pinion starting torque
0.29 ~ 0.37 kgm

(2.10 ~ 2.68Ib-ft)
Attach an arm to the pinion and hook a spring

balance to the arm, as shown. Read the force
needed to turn the pinion, and compute the_ torque
on the basis of the scale reading and the length of
the arm:
T [kg.m (lb.ft)] = F [kg (lb)] X L [m (ft)]
where L is the radial length, and F is the scale
reading.
Examples:
Where L = 0.25 rri (0.82 ft), Xl = 1.16 kg
(2.56Ib) and X2.= IA8kg (3.261b)
T = 0.29 kgm (2.10 Ibft)
= 0.25 m (0.82 ft)X 1.16 kg (2.56Ib)
(Xl)
T = 0.37 kgm (2.68 Ib-ft)
=0.25 m (0.82 ft) X- 1.48 kg (3.26Ib)
(L)
(X2)
It will be seen that the starting torque is
satisfaCl()ry, that is, the bearings are properly
- preloaded if the force needed to start turning the
pinion -is anywhere between 1.16 and 1;48 kg
(2.56 and 3.26Ib).
(7) After noting that the roller bearings are properly

preloaded, mount the sprocket wheel on th~ shaft.
Subsequent steps
The subsequent jobs are: (a) installatiDn of
steering clutch drums, (b) refilling the final
drive case, and (c) connection of two track
chains.
39
UNDERCARRIAGE
UNDERCARRIAGE
How to slacken the track chain
The first step is to clean the idler, removing pebbly
muck and dirt, to make sure the front idler is capable of
yielding backward. Clean and clear the vent hole provided in the grease cylinder.
&. WARNING
Never try to peep into the vent hole and

grease valve of the grease cylinder! Be sure that
front idler is not pushing back on grease
cylinder. Remember, a very high pressure could
develop in the grease cylinder.
(I) Very slowly, loosen fill valve (I) by turning it

leftwise; this will cause grease to come'out of vent
hole (2) and, if front idler is pushing backward,
the idler will move back because of the relieved
pressure.
(2) Slacken the track as described above.
(2) If there is evidence of pressure remaining Jtigh in

the grease cylinder, loosen fill valve (I) all the.way
until it touches tIie stopper (3). TJtis should relieve
the pressure, allowing the track to slacken.
(4) Disconnect the shoe links. Insert a rod into the

links and, while holding the rod, roll the machine
ahead to spread the tack out on the fIoor.
(3) If the track remains tensioned tight, start up the

engine and drive the machine back and forth in a
jogging manner. This should force the track into
slackened state.
Track instalIatioil
(4) Again, if the track still remains tight, chock a piece

of wood into between sprocket wheel and track
and drive the machine backward just a little. This
will pull back front idler to force the grease to
come out of vent hole.
Track removal
(I) Drive the machine until master pin (I) comes to
the rear part of sprocket wheel (2).
40
(3) Using the guide bar, dtive the master pin out.
Pressing the pin out with a hydraulic ram is
preferred, however.
ksuming that ihe tw~ tracks are laid ou t parallel on

ihe fIoor; with. the machine standing astride on these
track chains, proceed as follows:
(I) Dtive the machine back to the rear ends of tracks.

(2) Insert a bar into the rearmost links and, while
holding the rear end firmly against sprocket wheel,
roll the machine ahead to carry this end over and
along until it comes to the froitt.over front idler.
(3) Reconnect the two ends of the track by driving in
the master pin. Repeat the process on the other
track, and tension the tracks.
UNDERCARRIAGE
Track disassembly
"Track disassembly" here means no more than disconnecting one pair of links from another.
r---------------------~
I '
I
I
I
I
-"';>_
I
I
I
-';;;:.-
I
I
I
..
~-
~ ;;
~~
I
I
:
I
"'"to.
0":>
'--
BD2F
./.
:I
I.
I
:I
I
'-.:: ____ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . 1
l-Bolt, nut and washer (4 each)

2Shoe
3Pin
4Bushing
5Link
6-Master pin
7-Master bushing
8-Master link
g-Seal washer
10Spacer
11Swamp shoe
Track segment - Exploded view
41
UNDERCARRIAGE
(1) Remove four bolts (1) and take off shoe (2).
(2) Drive pin (3) out of links (4).
(3) Remove bushing, links, seals, etc.
Track roIler instaIlation
Track reassembly
(1) Fit seal washers and bushing to the two links.
Drive pin into the links.
(2) Bolt the shoe to the links.
Track roIler removal

Preparatory step
Have the two track chains slackened, and
prepare two wood blocks of 300mm (11.3/4
in.) square section and two small wood blocks
for chocking.
(1) Place the two blocks (2) behind the sprockets in a
chocking manner, and ride onto these blocks until
track rollers (1) float up and away from the track,
. as shown. Chock the tracks at front end with
blocks (2), and apply brake lock.
(1) With the machine herd in the condition illustrated

above, fit each track roller assembly to frame and
secure it by boiting.
(2) After installing all track rollers, bolt the guard to
the frame, and drive ,the machine forward out of
its chocked condition.

Subsequent step
Tightening the track adjustment.
Track roIler disassem bly

Preparatory step
Remove the plug from the end face of the
shaft to drain out oil. Be sure that the roller is
completely empty of oil, and proceed as
follows:
(1) Remove two snap rings, and take off two collars
(1).
(2) From collar and roller, pick out floating seal rings
(2).
(3) Take out thrust washers (3) and shaft (4).
(4) Remove busltings from the bore of roller.
(2) Take down track roller guard (5) by removing 16

bolts (3) and 4 bolts (4).
(3) Remove four bolts (6) from underside of frame
and take down the track roller assembly. Repeat
this process at each roBer,
42
UNDERCARRIAGE
1Collar (2 pes)
4-Thrust washers (2 pes)
2Snap ring (2 pes)
5Flanged roller
3Floating seal (2 sets)
6-Shaft
7-Bushlng (2 pes)
pes)"
9-Plug
8"0" ring
(2
Track roller - Exploded view

(5) Fit the two collars and retain them in place by
installing snap rings.
Track roller reassembly

Tool needed
Adaptor
.58809-15100
(I) Install the two bushings in the bore of flanged

roller by driving them in ivith a soft-metal hammer.
(2) Insert the shaft into the roller.
(3) Fit floating seals and thrust washers to the roller.
.&J
CAUTIONS 1
a) A properly sized rod or the special installing

tool must be used to fit each set of floating
seals to the roller. Caution must be exercised
not to damage the seals and "0" rings.
(6) Using the above-named adaptor, charge 60 cc (3.66

cu in.) of oil into the track roller.
Carrier roller removal

Preparatory step
Have the track chains slackened, and proceed
as follows:
(I) Push up the track above the carrier roller to
produce some clearance between track (I) and
roller (2).
(2) Loosen two bolts (4), by which the carrier roller
bracket (3) is fastened. Take out carrier roller (2).
b) Never use a screwdriver to fit the seals and

washers.
(4) Using a lint-free cloth or a brush and the washing
fluid, clean the surface of the steel ring, which is a
part of the floating seal set. Make sure that this

surface is free of any g(ime.
43
UNDERCARRIAGE
Carrier roller disassembly
Carrier roller installa tion
Preparatory step
Have the oil inside tIle ~oller drained out
completely.
The end face of roller shaft has an arrow mark

engraved on it. Insert the shaft into the bracket, pointing
the arrow mark upward, as shown; and tighten the two
bolts to clamp the shaft.
)
/
lPJug
2801t and washer (3 each)
3-Cover
4Lock washer
5-801t
6-Washcr
7-Roller
8-Shaft
9Floating seal
lO-Seal support
l1-Bushing (2 pes)
12Snap ring
Track carrier roller - Exploded view
44
UNDERCARRIAGE
(I) Remove three bolts (I) and take cover (2) off.
/.
/.'-;:/
('1,
. CD
/ ,(.~:;'\} :'1" /
.. jF~j:V,.
\";{,~i!.1
~~~(1)
Recoil spring removal

Preparatory step
Have the grease cylinder completely depress
urized; the method of relieving the pressure is
described under "How to slacken the track
chain."
(I) Remove four bolts (I), and dismount carrier roller
bracket (2), in the cylindrical base of which is
contained the recoil spring.
(2) Remove four bolts (3) to disconnect grease cylin
der (4) from front idler yoke, and take out the
cylinder.
(2) Remove bolt (3), and drive shaft (4) out of roller
(5).
Recoil spring installation

(I) Reconnect the grease cylinder to front idler yoke.
(3) Remove the floating seal from the rollcr and seal
support
(4) Remove the seal support and "0" ring from the
shaft.
(5) Remove two bushings from carrier roller.
Carrier roller reassembly.
(2) Push the carrier roller bracket, complete with

carrier roller, into between frame and track, and
secure the bracket to the frame by tightening the
four bolis.
Subsequent step
Stretch the track tight by pressurizing the
grease cylinder.
Needed tool
Adaptor
5860900300
(I) Fit the two bushings into the bore of flanged

roller.
(2) Insert the shaft into roller and lock the shaft in
place by tightening the bolt
(3) Put on the cover.
(4) Install the floating seal and seal support, and retain
them by fitting snap ring.
(5) Using the abovenamed adaptor, charge. 75 cc
(4.58 cu in.) of oil into the roller through the plug
bolt hole. Be sure to tighten the plug bolt good
and hard.
45
UNDERCARRIAGE
Recoil spring disassembly
lPlate
6Cylinder
2-801t and washer (4 each)

3-Spring
4-Spring retainer
5-Carrier roller bracket
7-Shaft
8-Rod packing
9DU5t seal
lOPlate
n-Seal
12-Fill valve
13-Stopper
14-Cover
Recoil spring assembly - .Exploded view
46
UNDERCARRIAGE
Preparatory step
It is assumed that the recoil spring assembly.
has been taken down and is now set on the
bench.
(I) Remove the three bolts securing the guide plate,
and take off the plate and seal.
.2
Recoil spring reassembly

(1) Fit the rod packing and dust seal in the cylinder
and insert the shaft.
(2) Insert the spring into the carrier roller bracket, and
lock the spring in place with the spring retainer
and plate by tightening the four bolts. Place the
seal and guide plate on it by tightening the three
bolts .
Subsequent step
Installation of the track carrier roller.
Front idler removal

Preparatory step
Have the track chain broken at the master
pin.
Remove four bolts (1). Using a hoist and lifting sling,
suspend front idler (2) in place. With the weight of front
idler taken up, push it forward, letting the idler slide out
of the frame.
(2) Place the recoil spring assembly in the press, and
hold down the head plate (2) with the press arbor,
as shown, so that this plate will not jump off by
the force of the recoil spring. Remove four bolts
(I).
(3) Back off the press arbor gradually to let coil spring
(4) expand. Take out plate (2), spring retainer (3)
and spring.
Front idler installation

(1) Bring in the front idler assembly to the front end
of the frame, and push it into the frame.
(2) Check the front idler alignment, and connect its
bearing parts to the flange behind.
(4) Take out the shaft from the cylinder and remove
the rod packing and dust seal.
"
47
UNDERCARRIAGE
Front idler disassembly
1'. ~
.,-.
.\-.
1-801t and.~asher (4'-eac~

2Guide (2 pes)
3.shim (2 sets)
-4.Bearing (2 pes) _
on eash side)
5Floating seal (2 sets)

6-Thrust washer (2 pes)
9-Shaft
10-"0" ring (2 pes)

11Plug
12Pin, nut and washer (2 each)
78ushing (2 pes)
Sldl-er
,)
Front idler - Exploded view

Preparatory ~tep
Have the front idler completely empty of oil.
(I) Remove froin each bearing (4) the guide piece (2)
and shim (3). Four bolts (I), each with a spring
washer, must be removed to do ~o. (See the
exploded view.)
(2) Referring to the photo, remove the locking pin
from each bearing (I) to free the bearing from the
~haft, and pull the bearing off.
(3) Take out floating seal (2) and thrust washer (3).
(4) Carry ou t the above steps on the other side, and

pull shaft (4) out of the idler.
(5) Drive bushings out of the idler bore.
Front idler reassembly

Needed tool
Adaptor
58809-15100 .
Qt.
Symbol
(A)
(I) Install the two bushings ill the bore of the idler.
(2) Insert the shaft into the idler.
(3) Fit the floating seals. With the shaft held in
vertical position, fill oil into the idler by using the
adaptor (A). Keep charging the oil until it begins
to overflow from the end (a) of the bushing.
(4) Fit the thrust washers, and mount the two bearings
on the shaft.
(5) Bolt the shims and guides to the bearings. Standard
shim thickness is 2mm (0.079 in.).
48
UNDERCARRIAGE
(a) Broken ring, or chipped or scarred sealing face.

(b) Sealing face not perfectly flat (which is evi
denced by rubbing contact pattern).
(c) Pitted or corroded sealing face.

(d) Sealing face with its offset gone due to wear.
(2) Any "0" ring removed in disassembly must not be
re-used in reassembly.
Floating seal disassembly and reassembly

(1) To pick out a floating seal during disassembly, use
a 5mm (O.20.in.) dia. rod"about 100 mm (3.93
in.) long, whose tip is flattened into a spoon shape
with edges dulled by filing. It is possible to pick
out the seal with fingers, but this spoon.like tool'
will facilitate the removal.
(3) WASHING: Clean each removed floating seal by

washing. To be washed are the steering rings and
collar, and also the steelbushing seal supports by
which the floating seal is held in place. Use a clean
,washing fluid and a cloth or a brush.
It is permissible to use the washing fluid to
clean "0" rings, but do not "Soak them with jhe
washing fluid. Never Ieav~ "O"':rings immersed in
the fluid,'
INOTE]
A wire brush may be used to rub off grime
and rust from the surfaces of the collars and
steelbushing supports. Make sure that the collar
is free of any grits. Leaky floating seals are
often due to the grits caught between the two
sealing faces at the time of seal installation.
Seal plucking tool
&J CAUTION]
After cleaning by washing, make the washed

parts and surfaces dry by using compressed air.
The surfaces coming into contact with the "0"
ring must be particularly dry of washing fluid.
When removing a floating seal, be careful not

to strain any part of it. Prying out the seal with
Each replacement floating seal taken out of the

package will be found coated with antirust oiL
screwdriver is a bad practice. Remember, the
. Before. using the seal, remove its "0" rings, and
floating seal is a precision-machined component.
(2) Each floating seal removed must be handled as a

set. After cleaning the seal rings by washing, put
the two rings together, face'to face, tape them just
as c a r e f u l l y . ' .
wash the steel rings clean. Use the washing fluid

sparingly on the "0" rings to remove the oiL
(4) "0" RINGS: When fitting the "0" ring to the
steel ring, be careful not to scratch its surface with
the ring edge. Check to be sure that "0" ring fits
to the steel ring snugly and squarely.
Sealing f;.'lce
Good
How to service the floating seal

(l) The two steel rings constituting a floating seal are
selectively matched. If either ring is in any of the
following conditions, replace the seal as a set:
($
Sad
5
49
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Hydraulic pump removal
Hydraulic pump installation
Preparatory steps
(a) Remove the engineroom front guard.
(b) Have the hydraulic oil tank drained com
pletely.
(I) Remove bolts (I), four on each side, and discon
nect pipes (2) (3).
(2) Remove two bolts (4), and pull out the hydraulic
pump. _
(I) Bolt the pump to the frame.

(2) Reconnect the two pipes to the pump body.
Subsequent 'steps
Refilling of the hydraulic oil tank, and
installation of the front guard.
Gear pump disassembly

(I) Referringto the exploded view of the gear pump,
remove four bolts (I), and take off cover (2) and
mounting flange (12).
(2) Lay down pump body (9). PuIi out drive gear (8).
by hand, and remove bushings.
[NOTE)
If the bushing will not come out, tap onthe
pump body with a plastic hammer to shake the
bushings loose. Be sure to place the pump body
on a resilient base and tap lightly.
(3) Pull out driven gear (7) and remove bushings.
(4) From the cover and mounting flange, separate oil),
seals (3).
}
(jJ)
1-801t (4 pes)
2-Cover
3-Body seal (2 pes)

4-Packin~ ring
5-Bushing'seal (2 pes)
6"Bushing (2 pes)
7-Driven gear
8-Drive gear
9Body
10-Sushing (2 pes)
11-Packing ring
12-Mounting flange
13-0il seal
Gear pump (hydraulic pump) - Exploded view
50
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
(5) Layout the disassembled parts neatly in the order
hydraulic cylinders from the control valve.
in which they came out, identifying each for its

position in the assembly. Particularly, the shaft
and its bushings must be identified positionally by ,

marking or otherwise so that they \vill resume the
exact origina1 condition in reassembly.
Gear pump reassembly

(I). Fit oil seals to the mounting flange and cover.
(2) Attach bushing seals and packing rings to the
bushings of the flange side, and insertthe bushings
hilo the pump body . Be sure to apply high-grade
grease to the bushings before inserting them: tlus
applies equally to the bushings of the other side.
[NOTES]
a) When inserting the bushings, be sure (0 hold
them squarely to the bore to avoid scuffing.
(3) Run eye bolt (6) into the tapped hole (5). Take a
luich on the eye bolt with a lifting sling and
'operate the hoist to take up' the weight of the
tank.
b) If the OD surface of a bushing is found with
(4) Remove four bolts (7), and lift the tank away.
scratch marks, smoothen the surface' with

an oil stone.
(3) Mesh drive gear with driven gear in, the same
positional relationship as before, and insert them
into the pump body.
[NOTE]
The usual practice is to provide match marks
on the end faces of the two gears before

drawing them out in disassembly.
(4) Install the other buslungs, to which bushing seals

and packing rings are attached. Put on the cover
and fasten the whole assembly together by tightening the four thru-bolts.
[NOTE]
Before inserting the drive alld'-driven gears
:into the bore, liave the splirted portion of'drive
, gear shaft wrapped with one or two layers of
cellophane tape, so that, when the shaft passes
through the buslung, it will not damage the
, bushing seal there.
Hydraulic tank removal (BS3F)

Preparatory step
Drain the tank, and have the driver's seat
and right-hand arm rest taken down. These two

jobs are to precede the following procedure:
(I) Disconnect lever rods (I) (2) of hydrualic control.
(2) . Disconnect two pipes (3) associated with the
hydraulic pump, and four pipes (4) leading to
Hydraulic tank installation (BS3F)

(I) Bring the tank over to the fender, and seat the
tank snugly.
(2) After securing the tank in place, reconnect the
pipes and control lever rods.
51
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Subscqucnt steps
Installation of the righthand arm rest and
driver's seat, and refilling of the hydraulic tank.
Hydraulic tank removal (B02F)
Preparatory step
Drain the tank, and have the driver's seat and

rightChand arm rest taken dmvn.
(\) 'Disconnect two pipes(\) associated with the'
I:tydraulic pump, and two pipes (2) associated with
the control valve.
(2) Remove the top cover, loosen clamp (3) and
disconnect rubber hose (4).
(2) Run eye bolt (3) into the top of the tank, hitch a
lifting sling to the bolt, and operate the hoist to
take ,up the weight of the tank.
(3) Remove four bolts (4), and lift the tank away.
Hydraulic tank installation (BD2F)
Reverse the removal procedure to remount the tank,

and complete the work by installing the driver's seat
and arm rest and by filling up the tank.
Hydraulic tank disassembly
(\) Remove filter stud (1), and take out element (2).
52
(3) Remove a total of 40 bolts (5), and take off cover

(6).
BS3F
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
by tightening its clamp. Put on the top cover.
(4) Insert the element and secure it. in place by

tightening its stud to tltis torque value:
Filter stud tightening torque
.3.5 0.3 kgm

(25.3 2.2Ibft)
!NOTE)
An arrow mark is provided on the element
cover. Be sure to position the element so that
the arrow will point upward .
.;~ .-:;~W';ZL . {t~~i'ff;);L~il'!.
'":lP
BD2F
"
(4) Remove pipe (7) and control valve (8) from tank
cover (6).
.
Hydraulic control valve disasSembly (BS3F)

(I) Disassemble the make.upvalve in three steps:
BS3F
(a) Remove two bolts (I), and remove ihe make.up

valve sub.assembly.
.
,
~-
BD2F
(b) Remove two bolts (2) and detach cover (3).

(c) Take out "0" ring (4), spring (5) and valve (6).
Hydraulic tank reassembly

(I) Mount the control valve on, and reconnect the
pipe to, the tank cover.
(2) Put on the cover, and secure it by tightening 40

bolts.
(3) Turn over the tank and reconnect the rubber hose
53
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
(NOTE)
Thesc valves are set to relieve at: 180 kg/cm 2
(2560 psi) in valve (A) and 140 kg/cm 2 (1991
psi) in valve (B).
(2) Disassemble the lift-cylinder check valve in two

steps:
(a) Remove bolts (1) (2), two each, and take off
the check valve sub-assembly.
(b) Remove four bolts (I), and take out valves (4)
and springs (3) from body (2).
(b) From the valve body, remoVe cover (3), "0"

ring (4), spring (5) and valve (6).
(0) Remove safety valve body (5) and, from the
o'removed body, separate plug (6); shim (7),
springs (8) (9), washer (10) and valve (11).
(3) Disassemble safety valve and safety make-up valve

as follows:
(a) Detach the two safety valve sub-assemblies
(A) (B).
54
(4) Disassemble the relief and pilot valve sub,assembly, \

as follows:
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
(a) Loosen the screw plug, remove two bolts (I),

and take off the sub.assembly.
.,
(b) . Break down ihe subassembly into these parts:

seat (2), "0" ring' (3)"spring (4), piston (5),
valve (6), spring (7), screw plug (8) and shim
(c) Clamp the plunger steady. While pushing spring

retainer (5) to compress the spring, pick washer
(6) off the plunger.
(9).
(6) Disassemble the dumpcylinder plunger, as follows:

(a) Remove two bolts (1), and take out operating
plunger (3) complete with cap (2).
(5) Disassemble the liftcylinder plunger, as follows:
(a) Remove two bolts (I), and take out cap (2) and
operating plunger (3).
(b) Push down spring (5) with one hand just a little
and loosen bolt (4) by the other. Remove bolt
(4) from plunger (5).
(b) Remove two plugs (4), and draw plunger out of
cap.
55
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Hydraulic control valve disassembly (BD2F)

(i) Disassemble the make-up valve in two steps:
(a) Remove bolts (1) (2), two each, and take out
the make-up valve sub-assembly.
(7) Disassemble the dump-cylinder check. valve by

removing two bolts (1) and stopper (2) and taking
out plug (3), spring (4) and valve(S).
(b) Remove spring (3) and valve (4) from the body.
(2) Disassemble the relief and pilot valve sub-assembly;

as in the case of the similar sub-assembly of BS3F,
by proceeding as follows:
(a) Remove two bolts, and take out thesub-assembly.
(b) Break down the subassembly into these parts:
seat;- ~-"O- -. ring, spring, piston, v~lve, spring,
screw plug and shim ..
Hydraulic control valve reassembly (BS3F)

Rebuild the hydraulic control valve assembly by
installing its components in the following sequence:
\) Dump-cylinder check valve, 2) dump-cylinder plunger,
3) lift-cylinder plunger, 4) relief and pilot valve subassembly, S) safety and safety make-up valve sub-assembly, 6) lift cylinder check valve, and 7) make-up valve
sub-assembly_
56
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
.. (
(3) Disassemble the plunger, as follows:

(a) Remove two bolts (1), and take out cap (2) and
operating plunger (3).
Hydraulic control valve reassembly (BD2F)
(b) Remove two plugs (4), and draw plunger. out of.
cap.
Rebuild the hydraulic control valve assembly by

installing its components in the following sequence:
I) check valve, 2) plunger, 3) relief and pilot valve subassembly; and make-up valve sub-assembly.
Lift cylinder removal (BS3F)

Preparatory step
Have the bucket lowered to and resting on
the ground.
(I) Disconnect two pipes (1) and e.ach side of the
machine.
(2) Take up the weight of the lift cylinder with a
lifting sling and hoist, or tie the cylinder to the
arm with a rope.
(3) Removc two bolts (2), front and rear, and take off
lock plates (3) and pins (4), and carry the cylinder
in suspended state off the machine.
(c) Clamp the plunger steady. Wltile pushing spring
retainer (5) to compress the spring, pick washer
(6) off the plunger. .
Lift cylinder installation (BS3F)

(4) Disassemble the check valve, as in BS3F, by
removing two bolts (1) and stopper (2) and taking
out plug (3), spring (4) and valve (5).
Install each lift cylinder by reversing the removal

procedure. Use of a hoist and lifting sling will facilitate
the installing work.
57
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Dump cylinder removal (BS3F)

Preparatory step
Have the bucket lowered to and resting on
the ground.
(I) Disconnect two pipes (I), front and rear, at each
side of the machine.
(2) Take up the weight of the cylinder with a lifting

sling and hoist.
(3) At' each end of the cylinder, remove bolt (2),lock
plate (3) and pin (4).
(4) Carry the cylinder ill suspended state off the
machine.
Blade cyllnderinstallation (BD2F)

(I) Secure the rearendportion of the cylinder to'th~
radiator guard. '
(2) Reconnect the oil pipes to the cylinder.

(3) Extend the rod, and pin its forward end to the
"e" frame.
Hy,dr~iJlic ~ylinder disassembly

.
Tool needed
'
,:
Hook wrench " " 58609.01$00

,
Hook ",rerch
Dump cylinderinstalla lion (BS3F)

,Reverse the removal procedure to install the dump
cylinder.
Blade cylinder removal (BD2F)

Preparatory step
Have the blade lowered to and resting on the
,&round.
.! .
(I) 'Remove pin .(1) from the rod connectiori of each

cylinder. Operate the hydraulic system to contract
the two blade cylinders fully.
(2) Tie the two cylinders respectively with a rope, in ,
order to hold them steady iri place.
(3) Disconnect two pipes (2) from each cylinder, and
remove four bolts (3). Untie and take off the
,cylinders.
'
58
58609.01700
,',
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
1Cylinder pipe
2Bushing
7Piston:
8Piston seal
13-Back-llp ring
9"O~' ring
15Rod PElcking
16Dust seaf
_14:auff~r- ring .'
'3Dust seal (2 pes)

4-Rod
10Selflocking nut
6-Bushing,.
6Dust'seal (2 pes)
1_1-,Guide bushing"
12"0" ring
. .'
17-Glan,d screw
18:~_ing
Hydraulic cylinder - Exploded view
How to fit seal to piston

Preparatory step
To fit the seal (8) to the piston (7) - shown
in the exploded view - a special tool must be
used. This tool differs in dimension for different
hydraulic cylinders, as follows:
Unit: mm (in.)
Hydraulic cylinder
Piston ID
Dimension 0
Lift cylinder
30 (1.18)
29.5 (1.l61)
Blade cylinder
24 (0.94)
23.5 (0.925)
~1
f--- f--
n(
"'I
--
Calk'
c-
'Q.
~o
..,
1'-1 C
250
59
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
(J) Hold the piston seal in the palm of the hand, and
squeeze the seal 3 or 4 times to soften it.
(2) Clamp the piston in the vise, with copper plates in

between to protect til< piston against denting.
(3) Apply hydraulic oil to the piston seal. Fit a

portion of the seal to the seOl groove formed of
the piston. Insert the tool into the piston.
(4) Hold down the seal with the left hand, and slowly
tum the ann rod of the tool, letting the rod ride
on the seal. A downward push must be maintained
on the rod in so turning, in order to f(nce the seal
i~to the groove. 1n "this manner, force abo.ut threequarters of the seal into the groove.
60
(5) Change the hand, and turn the aml rod in
th~
other direction to force the remaining onc-quartcl

into the groove.
(6) Fit tile backup ring to the piston.

Part No.
Tool name
Use
58609-04200
Hook
For lifting the clutch
58809'--10200
Wrench
For turning adjusting nuts in bevel

gear adjustments
58609-01900
Steering clutch tool
For disassembly and reassembly of

steering clutches
58609-00300
Adaptor
For charging oil into carrier rollers
58809-15100
Adaptor
For charging oil into front idlers and

track rollers
58609",01500
Hook wr.ench
For tightening gland screws of dUrilP

and blade cylinders
58609-01700
Hook wrench
For tightening gland screws of lift

cylinders
58809-15600
Clutch disc arbor
For aligning clutch discs and plates

in flywheel clutch services
61
I
I
Printed in J"plln

BD2F BS3F Service Manual OCR

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BD2F BS3F Service Manual OCR

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BD2F BS3F Service Manual OCR

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main components of the engine described in the manual?

What are the main components of the engine described in the manual?

What safety precautions are emphasized in the manual?

What safety precautions are emphasized in the manual?

SERVICE MANUAL

HEAVY INDUSTRIES, LTD.

NOTES, CAUTIONS and WARNINGS

.............. An operating procedure, condition, etc.,

procedures, practices, etc.,

DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY

RECOMMENDED PERIODICAL SERVICING SCHEDULE

o refers to engines in regular service.

Replace nIter element.

Drain out sludge and condensate.

Replace nIter element.

Clean inlet connection.

Decarbon and clean nozzles

.Drain out condensate and

Check and adjust tension.

Check for performance.

Clean radiator fins.

Bolts and nuts

Check acid level and replenish.

Check and adjust.

Check electrolyte S.C.

Inspect for leakage and repair.

for- wear; recondition as necessary.

Inspect brushes and commutator

Check injection pressure.

Check oil level and replenish.

75 150 300 600 1200

CONSTRUCTION AND FUNCTION

CONSTRUCTION AND FUNCTION

5-Fuel feed pump

CONSTRUCTION AND FUNCTION

13Timing gear case

CONSTRUCTION AND FUNCTION

Longitudinal cross section

CONSTRUCTION AND FUNCTION

Transverse cross section

CONSTRUCTION AND FUNCTION

Weight (dry), kg (lb)

Maximum output, PS/rprn

Compression pressure, kg/cm 2 (psi) (rpm)

.20 (284.4) (150 ~ 200), minimum

0.25 (0.0098) (cold)

Fuel feed pump

Fuel injection pump

CONSTRUCTION AND FUNCTION

Centrifugal, flyweight, all-speed type

Oil pan, liter (gal)

Paper element type

1.0 (14.2), minimum.

Capacity (exci. radiator), liter (gal)

Low-edge cog B-type "V" belt

Steel blade, pusher type

3 0.3 (42.7 4.3)

100 (6103)/2520 (pump speed)

CONSTRUCTION AND FUNCTION

Safety relay cut-in